Home

Aperture User Manual

1. isi In the Book Layout Editor you select a page s thumbnail image to see an enlarged view of the page s layout and contents You can also change the page design and the current page is automatically updated to the format you chose To add an image you drag it from the Browser into a photo box on the page For more information about creating books see Chapter 19 Creating Books on page 357 Part Interface and Acquisition Printing and Exporting Images You can also easily print individual images in standard and custom print sizes and print collections of images on contact sheets Aperture has many preset printing options to help facilitate printing You can also customize print settings to get the optimum use of your printer and meet custom print requirements For more information about print options see Chapter 14 Printing Your Images on page 277 When you need to deliver digital files to clients prepare files for posting on websites or transfer files to other computers or users you can export images in a variety of formats You can export your original digital master files as well as versions that you ve created Aperture provides many preset options for exporting files in a variety of file sizes and formats and you can add custom touches such as watermarks or copyright information When you export images you can assign custom filenames and export all or a selection of the metadata
2. Ene Import button Part Interface and Acquisition Select the project into which you want to import images 2 Doone of the following e Ifyou want to import into a new empty project Choose File gt New Project or press Command N to create a new project Note You can also click the Library icon in the Projects panel if necessary to select it When you select the Library not a project a new untitled project is automatically created when images are imported All Projects v gt Maa Library a Make sure the Import arrow gt Indoor Weddings is pointing to the Library to gt Outdoor Weddings import the images into a E Wedding Album Portfolio new project L Wedding Portfolio Q Ifyou want to import the images into an existing project Select the project The Import arrow points at the currently selected project indicating the destination for the import All Projects gt li Library a v Indoor Weddings gt Anderson amp Reyes l gt Carreon amp Golafsar Holger amp Thoss wedding lt EJ j gt McKee amp Watanabe ae The top left portion of the Import dialog updates displaying where the images are being placed 3 Choose a location for the imported images by doing one of the following To store imported master image files in the Aperture Library Choose In the Apertur
3. ae Ceana i ox l The Folder Naming Presets dialog appears Click the Add button to create a new name format or select the preset name format you want to change Drag the name elements you want into the Format field in the order you want them Drag a backslash between the elements where you want subfolders created Enter a custom name in the Custom Name field if you want Click OK Your new folder name format now appears in the Subfolders pop up menu When using a counter in your folder name format you can specify the starting number and the number of digits from one to six digits that appear in the counter When you use a folder name format with a counter make sure to reset the initial starting number if necessary Otherwise on the next import Aperture will continue numbering the image folders starting from the last number of the previous import To reset the starting number of a counter in a folder name format In the Folder Naming Presets dialog type 0 zero in the Incrementing counter starting at field Part Interface and Acquisition Automatically Naming Your Imported Images The filenames given to images by the camera are often difficult to distinguish When you import images you can have Aperture use the original name assigned by the camera or use a filenaming convention that you choose or create For example you can use a name format that includes a name that you specify plus the date
4. Vault Action vault amp pop up menu Update All mal Vaults Panel button button e Disclosure triangle Click this to see the hard disk that is assigned to a vault e Vault Status button Click this button to update a vault The color of the Vault Status button indicates the state of the vault e Black The vault is up to date e Yellow All master files in the Library have been backed up but a change has occurred to at least one version such as an adjustment that has not been backed up The vault should be updated to safeguard your work e Red At least one master file in the Library has not been backed up The vault should be updated to protect against the loss of master files e Update All Vaults button Click this button to update all of your connected vaults at the same time e Vaults Panel button Click this button to show or hide the Vaults panel e Vault Action pop up menu You can use this pop up menu to add and remove vaults as well as update a vault e Disk space available Aperture keeps track of how much storage space is available on the hard disk used by a vault Color coded bars indicate the space used by the vault unused space and space used for other non Aperture files Vault 1 377 9GB of 465 7GB available rer ma Vault 2 261 768 of 467 58 available d f ene a Unused space available _ ft ae Space used by on the vault non Aperture files vaun g
5. To display keywords using overlays Choose View gt View Options or press Command J In the View Options window select the Viewer checkbox Choose Caption amp Keywords from the Set 1 pop up menu Choose Caption amp Keywords from this pop up menu Choose where you want the information displayed from this pop up menu Choose an option from the Placement pop up menu to specify where you want the information displayed in relation to the image To display keywords in the Browser select the Grid View checkbox Choose Caption amp Keywords from the Set 1 pop up menu 7 Choose an option from the Placement pop up menu to specify where you want the information displayed in relation to the image Click Done Aperture is now set to display keywords assigned to images You can quickly hide or show the overlays when you need to Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images 203 204 The captions and keywords appear in the area you specified To hide or show overlays in the Viewer or Browser do one of the following Press the Y key to hide or show overlays in the Viewer Press the U key to hide or show overlays in the Browser Viewing Keywords Using the Metadata Inspector The Metadata Inspector provides views of the metadata associated with a selected image When you show the Metadata Inspector and select an image the Metadata Inspector displays the keywords assigned to your image including IPTC keywords
6. 414 Setting Up a Basic System The following are basic instructions for connecting a digital camera or card reader to your computer Card reader A basic Aperture system consists of the following equipment e A computer and display e A digital camera or card reader because of their speed FireWire card readers are strongly recommended A cable to connect your camera or card reader to your computer typically a USB 2 0 cable or a 4 pin to 6 pin FireWire cable that came with your camera or card reader For information about setting up a computer and display see the documentation that came with the computer and display Part IV Appendixes and Glossary To connect a camera or card reader to your computer Connect your camera or card reader to your computer using the USB or FireWire cable that came with your camera or card reader FireWire 400 6 pin FireWire 400 4 pin To ensure proper setup see the documentation that came with your camera or card reader Optional Equipment to Consider You may consider using additional hardware and equipment depending on the number of images you have and your workflow e Additional random access memory RAM e Additional hard disk storage options e Additional displays Additional RAM The more RAM your computer has the faster it can process your actions While Aperture functions with the minimum required amount of RAM more RAM will
7. Wedding Portraiture The keyword list updates to reveal all instances of the keyword you entered Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images 209 210 Adding Keywords to the Keywords HUD You can add new keywords to the keyword library of the Keywords HUD To add new keywords to the keyword library 1 To show the Keywords HUD do one of the following Choose Window gt Show Keywords HUD or press Shift H e Click the Keywords HUD button in the toolbar The Keywords HUD appears 2 Click the Add Keyword button x Q Search gt Personal gt Photo specs gt Photojournalism Stock categories A new untitled Summa USUS gt Wedding keyword appears in the keyword list Click this button to add a new keyword Q Search The new keyword is anara aaa added to the keyword gt Personal gt Photo specs library and is sorted gt Photojournalism gt Stock categories alphabetically gt Wedding Part Il Photo Editing Click this button to add a keyword within a keyword group To add keywords to a keyword group To show the Keywords HUD do one of the following Choose Window gt Show Keywords HUD or press Shift H e Click the Keywords HUD button in the toolbar The Keywords HUD appears Select the keyword group to which you want to add a keyword Click the Add Subordinate Keyword button x Q Search Y Antarctica united A new untitled keyword gt Pers
8. Display Arrangement Color Options To rearrange the displays drag them to the desired position To relocate the menu bar drag it to a different display The red outline indicates the screen of the display you are moving Mirror Displays The display screens temporarily refresh to accommodate the new arrangement 420 Part IV Appendixes and Glossary 4 Drag the white rectangle to move the menu bar to the display on the left APRA Cinema HD Display Display Arrangement Color Options To rearrange the displays drag them to the desired position To relocate the menu bar drag it to a different display Drag the menu bar to the display on the left Mirror Displays The display screens temporarily refresh to accommodate the new arrangement The contents of the screen may be rearranged to accommodate the new position of the menu bar To ensure proper color management from the time you download your images until the time you print them or send them to a professional lab it is essential that you color calibrate your displays Color calibrating your display or displays ensures that the colors you see on your screen are faithfully reproduced when images are printed For more information about color calibrating your displays see Appendix B Calibrating Your Aperture System on page 423 Appendix A Setting Up an Aperture System 421 Cal
9. Height value slider Gallery 13 Pages Antarctica Width value slider This shows how your images will appear on the web gallery page Previous Page button Detail Page 1 Bones rane mumianio mae e eH Next Page button Export Web Pages button Publish to Mac button e Site Theme button Click this button to choose a theme or layout for your webpage Gallery Pages panel Click here to see a specific page of the web gallery Detail Images panel Click here to see the enlarged version of a selected image in a web gallery Metadata View pop up menu Choose the type of metadata that is included with each image in the webpage e Columns value slider Use this to specify the number of columns you want on a page Click the arrows to increase or decrease the number of columns or double click in the number field and enter a new value e Rows value slider Use this to specify the number of rows you want on a page Click the arrows to increase or decrease the number of columns or double click in the number field and enter a new value Fit images within pop up menu Choose an option for how you want images to appear on the webpage e Width value slider Use this to specify the column width Click the arrows to increase or decrease the width or double click in the number field and enter a new value e Height value slider Use this to spec
10. Chapter 12 Searching for and Displaying Images 251 252 Close button Search criteria To show the Query HUD do one of the following Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F Click the Query HUD button with a magnifying glass icon beside the search field in the Browser Controls in the Query HUD The Query HUD has the following controls k pop up menu ro field Match amy 7 of the following Add Filter pop up menu Rating is greater than or equal to 7 f Unrated Calendar Reset button Keywords Import Session is one or more of the following Query HUD Action New Smart Album New Album With Current images gt pop up menu New Smart Album New Album With button Current Images button Close button Click this button to close the Query HUD Match pop up menu Choose whether the image should match any of the search criteria or all the criteria that are marked by selected checkboxes Search field Enter the text you want to search for Click the search field s Reset button with an X to clear the search field Add Filter pop up menu Choose additional search criteria such as date EXIF and IPTC information text rating and other metadata Search criteria Select checkboxes for categories and specify what you want to search for such as ratings keywords and dates New Smart Album Click this button to create a new Smart Album based on the search criteria For more information see Chapter 1
11. Quickly Accessing Commands In Full Screen mode you can also access commands via a shortcut menu To view the shortcut menu Position the pointer anywhere in the Full Screen mode screen except the filmstrip or toolbar then Control click press the Control key and click Note Although accessing commands from shortcut menus can help you work more quickly keep in mind that not all commands are available in shortcut menus Part II Photo Editing Stacking Images and Making Picks Photographers frequently shoot a series of related photos with the aim of selecting one image for use Aperture makes it easy to choose the best image out of a series This chapter explains how you can easily group related images into sets called stacks that are easy to review work with and select final picks from This chapter covers e An Overview of Stacking Images p 175 e Creating Stacks p 177 e Working with Stacks p 180 Keyboard Shortcuts for Working with Stacks p 186 An Overview of Stacking Images To capture a specific moment in time such as a bride and groom kissing or two dignitaries shaking hands a photographer may shoot multiple pictures using both bracketing and continuous shooting to increase the odds of capturing a usable image After shooting the series the photographer reviews the images and picks the best image of the group Reviewing and making picks from many related pictures can be time consuming and diff
12. To set the compare image Select an image Choose Edit gt Set Compare Item or press Return The image you want to examine against the compare image is shown to the right To view an image against a compare image do one of the following Select a second image Navigate through the images in the Browser with the Up Down Left and Right Arrow keys If you wish you can view multiple images against the compare image To view multiple images against a compare image do one of the following Command click multiple images in the Browser Hold down the Shift key while pressing the Up Down Left or Right Arrow key When you ve finished comparing images you can turn this feature off To turn off the comparison feature and select the compare item Choose Edit gt Select Compare Item or press Option Return To turn off the feature and select the image you re viewing against the compare item Choose Edit gt Clear Compare Item or press Command Return You can also use these procedures to compare images in Full Screen mode For more information about Full Screen mode see Chapter 7 Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode on page 163 n Part Il Photo Editing Viewing Stacks To efficiently work with images in stacks you can set the Viewer to automatically open a selected stack and set up the stacked images for comparison The pick of the stack is set as the compare item This stack viewing feature also works in Full
13. To view keywords using the Metadata Inspector If necessary show the Metadata Inspector by doing one of the following Choose Window gt Show Inspectors or press e Double click an image in the Browser Choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D Part Il Photo Editing 2 Click the Keywords button at the bottom of the Metadata Inspector Click the Keywords button to display the keywords applied to a selected image Metadata View General v Rating Badges Caption Version Name vietnam20040220 Image Date 8 12 04 3 55 51 PM PDT Aperture 7 1 Shutter Speed 1 60 Exposure Bias Oev ISO Speed Rating Focal Length 35mm Focal Length 13mm Pixel Size 2592 x 1944 File Name vietnam2004 0220 JPG File Size 2 88 MB Credit Copyright Notice Object Name Camera Model Canon PowerShot S60 Master Location Vietnam ji Keywords EXIF IPTC Other Archive In the Browser select an image to see its keywords Any keywords applied to the selected image appear in the Keyword summary area of the Metadata Inspector Viewing Keywords in the Browser in List View When the Browser is set to list view Aperture can display a column that shows the keywords assigned to images To view keywords in the Keywords column of the Browser Choose View gt View Options or press Command J The View Options window appears In the List View Columns section select the Set
14. 1 Show the Query HUD by clicking the Query HUD button in the Browser 2 When the Query HUD appears specify secondary search criteria to show specific images within the Smart Album To see the entire contents of the Smart Album again delete the criteria in the Query HUD Chapter 13 Grouping Images with Smart Albums 272 Revising the Contents of a Smart Album To change the contents of a Smart Album you change the search criteria for the Smart Album You can manually select individual images and delete them but the deletion removes both the version and the digital master file wherever it exists in the original project Similarly you cannot simply drag images into a Smart Album to add them If you decide that certain images should not be in a Smart Album you can narrow the search criteria to exclude images Aperture performs a new search and revises the Smart Albums contents To remove an image from a Smart Album you might also change the image so that it no longer matches the Smart Album s search criteria For example if a Smart Album gathers images rated five stars changing an image s rating to four stars removes it from the Smart Album To change the contents of a Smart Album by changing the search criteria In the Projects panel click the Query HUD button to the right of the Smart Album to show the Query HUD Revise the search criteria in the Query HUD to eliminate or add the images you want or change the keyword or r
15. Part Il Photo Editing To enlarge the thumbnail icons in list view Drag the Thumbnail Resize slider to increase or decrease the size of the icons You can also easily rename files after importing When you rename a file you are renaming the image version not the digital master file The filename of the original master file does not change To rename an image version in list view Select an image double click the image name then enter a new name Searching for Images in the Browser When you have many images in a project more than the Browser can display at once you can use the search field to locate images Enter the search criteria in the search field and Aperture finds the image or images for you Query HUD button Search field aS J Reset button You can search for images in a project and show just the search results in the Browser For example if you have several hundred images of a wedding but want to view only those that have the keyword Bride you can use the Query HUD to display only the images of the bride hiding the remainder from view For more information about using the Query HUD to find images see Chapter 12 Searching for and Displaying Images on page 247 To search for an image in the Browser Enter text associated with that image in the Browser s search field To see all your images again Click the search field s Reset button or delete the text in the search f
16. Recungle E a73 e EG 100 Be o e teen 2 ll Antarctica Under The Ice 123456 The Webpage Editor shows with the selected images Antarctica fd Amarica Selects Amtarctiea Web Galery You can also create a web journal which allows you to mix text and images on the webpage For example you might create a web journal that chronicles your latest trip and include your photos You create web journal pages by creating a web journal album and using the Webpage Editor to design your pages For more information about creating web galleries and web journals see Chapter 18 Creating Webpages on page 333 35 Chapter 1 An Overview of Aperture 36 Printing Your Images in Books You can lay out images and combine them with text to create books Aperture provides a Book Layout Editor that allows you to easily combine your images with text on the page Aperture also provides master templates that you can use to compose pages You can easily create professional looking pages for art books wedding albums picture books and more You create a book by creating a book album and using the Book Layout Editor to design the book s pages 988 Aperture au aaga ke Sejana CEKELEN OB wa at map oo e alea fa iia Library amp Z CEE TEAR 00 0909 GO
17. The Light Table provides an open workspace where you can freely arrange images You can use the Light Table to review and compare images create mockups of webpages compare color values in a selection of images before applying color corrections or do anything else that involves viewing and comparing your images nee PS ee Ea ale Pe te Ley o iA enxbeecoee OB va 1 a A Put Back button Click this button to remove a selected image from the Light Table B Uncover button Click this button to reveal images that are covered by other images in the Light Table C Light Table Zoom slider Drag the Light Table Zoom slider to change the Light Table s size D Scale to Fit All Click this button to fit the entire Light Table on your screen Items button E Navigator button When the Light Table is larger than your screen click this button to reposition your view on another area of the Light Table F Show All Images button Click this button to see the entire contents of the Light Table album in the Browser G Show Unplaced Click this button to see only images in the Browser that are not yet Images button placed in the Light Table To learn more about the Light Table see Chapter 17 Using the Light Table on page 323 Part Interface and Acquisition Heads Up Displays Heads up displays or HUDs are collections of related tools and controls contained in a floating pane
18. may appear in the Color meter rather than numerical values As soon as Aperture renders the image the appropriate numerical values appear Choosing a Color Value Option You can set the Color meter to display RGB Lab CMYK HSB or HSL color values To choose a color value option for the Color meter Inthe Adjustments Inspector or Adjustments HUD choose a color value option from the Adjustment Action pop up menu st eal Hide Color Value Hide Histogram Show Auto Adjust Options Color Value Options Y RGB tab Choose a color value option here CMYK HSB HSL Color Value Sample Size ixi px Y 3x3 px 5x5 px 7x7 px Histogram Options Luminance Y RGB Red Channel Green Channel Blue Channel Remove Selected Remove All Adjustments Chapter 6 Displaying Images in the Viewer 153 Choosing a Color Value Sample Size You can also set the sample size pixel area Aperture uses to determine color values To choose a color value sample size for the Color meter n the Adjustments Inspector or Adjustments HUD choose an appropriate color value sample size from the Adjustment Action pop up menu Hide Color Value Hide Histogram Show Auto Adjust Options Color Value Options Y RGB Lab CMYK HSB HSL Color Value Sample Size 1x1 px Y 3x3 px SxS px 7x7 px Choose a color value sample size here Histogram Options Luminance Y RGB Red Channel Green Channel Blue Channel Remove Selected Remove All Adjustments Showi
19. An Overview of the Browser p 120 Navigating Through and Selecting Images p 122 Working with a Selection of Images p 124 Working with Images in Grid View p 125 Working with Images in List View p 126 Searching for Images in the Browser p 127 Rearranging Images in the Browser p 128 Sorting Images in Grid View p 129 Rotating Images p 130 Creating Versions of an Image p 130 Deleting Images from the Browser p 132 Dragging Images into Different Projects and Albums p 134 Working with Referenced Images p 135 Working with Two Projects Open p 141 Displaying Specific Metadata with Your Images p 142 119 120 Sorting pop up menu Grid View button List View button Images displayed in grid view in the Browser An Overview of the Browser When you select a project or album in the Projects panel thumbnails of its images appear in the Browser You select images in the Browser to work with them You can move and rearrange images rotate images make new versions and delete images from the project Sort Direction button Query HUD button r a Search field oo met an Shuttle control L TRS Scroll bar SESE a eero O 0909 Go i Thumbnail Resize slider Grid View button Click this button to display images as thumbnails List View button Click this button to display images as a text list Sorting pop up menu You can choose to so
20. TIFF Fit within 1024 x 1024 Dpt 72 Enter a dpi setting for PNG Original Size Py PNG 50 of Original Size Gamma Adjust 100 exported images here PNG Fit within 1024 x 1024 PNG Fit within 640 x 640 ColorSync Profile sRGB Profile PSD Original Size 16 bit eee ae PSD 50 of Original Size 16 bit Email Small JPEG Email Medium JPEG Tiss Marerser Email Original Size JPEG Position Topte Opacity g 00 Lede Ceana C The Export Presets dialog appears 5 Select an export preset then enter the dpi setting you want 6 Specify additional settings as necessary then click OK 7 Choose a name format from the Export Name Format pop up menu then click Export Chapter 15 Exporting Your Images 297 298 A U N To export images constrained to a size in inches Select the image or images you want to export Choose File gt Export gt Export Version or press Command Shift E Navigate to the location where you want the exported images placed Choose Edit from the Export Preset pop up menu Export Presets ORNS Image Format JPEG JPEG 50 of Original Size Fl include Metadata JPEG Fit within 1024 x 1024 JPEG Fit within 640 x 640 ee F Original Size 8 bi Fit Within inches o ot inches e Torso bia a i 3 H Choose Fit Within Inches TIFF Fit within 1024 x 1024 Dpt 72 and enter the width and PNG Original Size
21. To print a book Select a book album in the Projects panel The book appears in the Book Layout Editor Choose File gt Print Book or press Command Option P In the Print dialog specify the following settings Select a book preset in the Preset Name list Note The Mini Size Book preset should be selected only for books created using the Mini book size This preset selects a paper size appropriate for a mini size book Full size book layouts may print with images cut off or missing when the Mini Size Book preset is selected Make sure the settings in the Printer Selection area are correct such as paper size and ColorSync profile Verify the layout of your book in the preview area Click Print Your book is printed You can also create a PDF file of a book to store an electronic copy for use at another time or to send to others To create a PDF file of a book In the Projects panel select a book album Choose File gt Print Book or press Command Option P In the Print dialog click the Save as PDF button Enter a name for the PDF file and choose a location to save the file then click Save Chapter 14 Printing Your Images 283 284 Printing a Light Table Arrangement You can print an arrangement of images in the Light Table To print a Light Table arrangement Select a Light Table album in the Projects panel The Light Table appears above the Browser Do one of the following To print selected i
22. To specify a vault s new location or path Connect the hard disk drive to your computer To show the Vaults panel do one of the following Choose Window gt Show Vaults or press Shift R e Click the Vaults Panel button Select the vault to be updated to a new path Choose Update Vault Path from the Vault Action pop up menu Navigate to the location of the vault on the hard disk drive select it and click Update Path Part Ill Distribution and Backup Deleting a Vault Permanently You can delete an entire vault and all the images on it when you need to reconfigure your backup system This is useful when you have moved your backup vault to a larger capacity hard disk and you want to delete the vault information from the current hard disk drive to use it for other purposes To permanently remove a vault and delete its information In the Vaults panel select the vault you want to remove Do one of the following e Choose File gt Vault gt Remove Vault Choose Remove Vault from the Vault Action pop up menu A dialog appears asking if you want to remove the vault Click one of the following buttons Remove Vault When you click this button Aperture no longer tracks the vault but the vault s files remain on the hard disk e Remove and Delete Vault When you click this button Aperture no longer tracks the vault and the vault s files are deleted from the hard disk Backing Up Images from a Portable in the F
23. checkbox Deselect this option if you don t want previews created for images in new projects To enable sharing of JPEG preview images with other applications select the Share previews with other applications checkbox To change the image quality of the previews drag the Preview Quality slider The higher the quality you select the more disk space the preview requires To set a maximum pixel size for your previews choose a size from the Limit preview size pop up menu Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 69 Working with Aperture Projects The basic components of Aperture including projects albums and versions provide the building blocks for working in a nondestructive environment This chapter explains basic elements in Aperture and describes how to set up and use projects to hold your images This chapter covers Basic Components of Aperture p 72 Working with Projects p 78 Creating and Naming Projects p 79 Opening and Closing Projects p 80 Creating and Showing Favorite Projects p 82 Deleting Images from Projects and Albums p 82 Deleting Items from the Projects Panel p 83 Working with Library Files p 83 Quickly Accessing Commands p 85 71 72 Basic Components of Aperture Aperture uses the following basic components in your image management system e Digital master files The original image files imported from your camera memory card computer or external stora
24. polarizing filter A filter placed on the front of the camera lens that selectively transmits light traveling on one plane while absorbing light traveling on other planes Polarizing filters are capable of reducing unwanted reflections on windows and shiny surfaces Polarizing filters are also used to darken the sky See also filters positive Developed film where the tonal relationship of the subject or scene is the same on film as viewed by the eye also known as a Slide See also dust and scratch removal emulsion negative PNG Short for Portable Network Graphics PNG is a bitmapped graphics file that has been approved by the World Wide Web Consortium to replace patented GIF files PNG files are patent and royalty free See also format presets A saved group of settings such as export naming print and web export settings Presets determine properties such as file format file compression filename construction paper size and ColorSync profile Presets are usually defined for particular workflows and can be tailored to client specifications See also ColorSync prime lens A lens with a fixed focal length that cannot be changed print An image printed on paper also known as a photograph See also dye sublimation inkjet printer RA 4 profile A compilation of data on a specific device s color information including its gamut color space and modes of operation A profile represents a device s color reproduction capabilities and is e
25. s search field Rearranging Images in the Browser As you work with images in the Browser you can move and rearrange images into any order or grouping you want For example you might want to keep all related images of a wedding event such as the cake cutting in close proximity to allow you to easily adjust them You can drag images to new locations in the Browser You can drag single images or selections of multiple images When you drag images to new locations you create a custom arrangement of your images the Sorting pop up menu changes to show the Custom option Aperture records the order of your images and any time you choose Custom from the Sorting pop up menu your images reappear in that order Part Il Photo Editing To rearrange images in the Browser Drag the images you want to a new location when the green bar appears release the mouse button Cereo As you drag an image to a new location a green bar marks where the image will be placed To restore a custom arrangement of your images in the Browser Choose Custom from the Sorting pop up menu Aperture remembers the last time you moved images and restores that arrangement Sorting Images in Grid View You can change the order of images in the Browser based on image properties such as filename file size date rating and more For example when displaying images by filename Aperture places the images in alphabetical order according to filename
26. 252 253 253 255 256 258 259 260 261 262 Rating Images An Overview of the Aperture Rating System Rating Images Sorting Images by Rating Including Image Rating in Your Workflow Comparing and Rating Images Keyboard Shortcuts for Displaying Images with Specific Ratings Applying Keywords to Images An Overview of Keywords Viewing Keywords Applied to Images Applying Keywords Using the Keywords HUD Applying Keywords Using Keyword Controls and Keyword Presets Applying Keywords Using the Lift amp Stamp HUD Applying Keywords Using the Metadata Inspector Applying Keywords to Images in the Light Table Removing Keywords from an Image Importing and Exporting Keyword Lists Working with Metadata An Overview of Metadata Metadata Views and Metadata Presets Displaying Metadata with Your Images Turning the Display of Metadata On or Off Viewing and Changing Metadata in the Metadata Inspector Working with Metadata Views Working with Metadata Presets Batch Changing Metadata More Information About IPTC Metadata Understanding Badge Overlays Searching for and Displaying Images An Overview of Searching Controls in the Query HUD Searching Across the Entire Library Searching by Image Name Caption or Other Text Searching by Keyword Searching by Date Searching by Rating Searching by IPTC Information Searching by EXIF Information Searching by Import Session Searching by File Status Contents Chapter 13 Part Ill
27. 391 Theme button 55 359 366 369 themes for books 359 365 366 369 header styles 347 list of 365 master pages 381 393 selecting and editing 342 switching to other themes 369 for web journals 340 for webpages 338 Themes list 369 Three Up command 149 Thumbnail Image Preset pop up menu 349 Thumbnail Resize slider 43 120 125 127 166 thumbnails of book pages 359 creating while importing 88 in grid view 125 illustrated 17 in image indexes 378 size of 120 125 127 166 viewing images as 120 on webpages 349 TIFF files 20 72 89 292 304 450 time adjusting for imported images 110 bracketing images 109 in filenames 85 105 slideshow timing 316 stacking shots in same time interval 177 time zones 110 140 262 263 timing slideshows to music 322 Timing pop up menu 316 322 titles on pages 345 Toolbar illustrated 16 toolbars adding tools to 66 customizing 65 displaying 65 Full Screen mode 164 169 hiding 65 overview 45 restoring 66 tools adding to toolbar 66 labels and icons 66 toolbar buttons 45 tools HUDs 173 473 474 tooltips for images 226 231 232 transferring files 292 images from cameras or cards 91 images from Smart Albums 272 images to or from Light Table 331 images to other computers 408 Libraries 409 projects 74 114 transition effects 450 transparency of watermarks 308 355 tripods 450 troubleshooting printers 281 tungsten lights 450 U Uncover button 60 330 underexposure 450 unifying ma
28. 415 417 419 423 423 427 428 430 431 433 453 Backing Up Your Images An Overview of the Backup Workflow Planning Your Backup System Working with the Vaults Panel Creating Vaults Updating Vaults Disconnecting a Vault s Hard Drive from Your System Temporarily Reconnecting a Vault s Hard Drive to your System Deleting a Vault Permanently Backing Up Images from a Portable in the Field Restoring Your Aperture System Appendixes and Glossary Setting Up an Aperture System Setting Up a Basic System Optional Equipment to Consider Setting Up Your System with Two Displays Configuring Mac OS X for Multiple Displays Calibrating Your Aperture System An Overview of Color Management Calibrating Your Camera Calibrating and Profiling Your Display Calibrating and Profiling Your Printer Credits Contents Introducing Aperture Aperture is a powerful and easy to use digital image management system that can track thousands of digital images and provides the professional photographer with high quality image management and adjustment tools Designed for the needs of professional photographers Aperture is an all in one post production tool that provides An advanced RAW workflow From capture to output you can work with your images captured as RAW files without having to first convert them to another format before viewing adjusting organizing or printing them Aperture supports RAW formats from leading digital c
29. Aperture also allows you to change the look of your images by applying filters For example you can select a photo box and apply a sepia tone to the image it holds Adding Photo Boxes to a Page After creating a page and applying a master page design you may need to add more photo boxes to hold images on the page You can select a different master page design that has more photo boxes or you can add photo boxes where you need them To add a photo box to a page Click the Edit Layout button if it s not already selected Select the page you want in the Pages panel Click the Add Photo Box button When the photo box appears you can drag it to a new position and resize it Chapter 19 Creating Books 383 384 Changing How an Image Fills a Photo Box Aperture is preset to scale images to fill a photo box You can change the position of an image within a photo box making it appear centered or aligned on the right or left edge To change how an image fills a box Click the Edit Layout button if it s not already selected Select the photo box you want to change Choose Photo Box Alignment from the Book Action pop up menu then choose an alignment option from the submenu To have an image scale to fit the size of the box on the page Choose Scale to Fill To have an image appear centered in the box Choose Scale to Fit Centered To have an image appear aligned on the left edge of the box Choose Scale to Fit Left Aligned T
30. Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 263 264 265 267 268 270 271 272 272 273 277 277 279 281 282 282 283 284 284 286 287 291 292 293 296 306 311 312 314 315 315 315 317 318 319 320 321 Searching by Other Metadata Searching by a Combination of Criteria Saving Your Search Results Grouping Images with Smart Albums An Overview of Smart Albums Collecting Images in a New Smart Album Searching Within a Smart Album Revising the Contents of a Smart Album Transferring Smart Aloum Images to Another Project or Album Deleting a Smart Album Distribution and Backup Printing Your Images An Overview of Printing Controls in the Print Dialog Printing a Single Image Printing a Series of Images Printing a Contact Sheet or Series of Contact Sheets Printing a Book Printing a Light Table Arrangement Creating and Modifying Print Presets Proofing Your Images Onscreen Turning Off Color Management in Your Printer Exporting Your Images An Overview of Exporting Images Exporting Copies of Digital Master Files Exporting Image Versions Working with Export Presets Creating Slideshow Presentations An Overview of Slideshows Creating a Slideshow Controlling a Slideshow Arranging the Order of a Slideshow s Images Controls in the Slideshow Presets Dialog Creating Slideshow Presets Modifying Slideshow Presets Creating a Growing Grid of Images Playing Your Slideshow on Your Main Display Only
31. Chapter 9 Rating Images 189 Rating Images Aperture provides a set of seven possible image ratings e Five stars or Select e Four stars e Three stars e Two stars One star e Unrated or neutral e Reject Rejected images appear with a white X overlay Positive ratings appear with white star overlays If no overlays are displayed on the image the image is considered neutral or is not rated You can rate a single image or apply a rating to several images at once Rating Individual Images You can quickly rate a selected image with the rating buttons To rate an individual image 1 Select an image in the Browser The image you selected appears in the Viewer 2 Click the rating buttons in the control bar to assign a rating Increase Rating Reject K Qo Select Decrease Rating e To assign the highest rating to the image Click the Select button To assign a rating of Reject Click the Reject button To increase or decrease the image rating Click the Increase Rating or Decrease Rating button Note As long as the image is selected you can change its rating 3 To select the next image press the Right or Left Arrow key or click the Previous Image or Next Image button in the control bar 190 Part Il Photo Editing Keyboard Shortcuts for Rating Images For quick and efficient rating use the arrow keys to select images and use the following keyboard shortcuts to apply ratings Keyboard shortcut F
32. Drag the filmstrip to a new location You can also lengthen or shorten the filmstrip to make it better fit the screen To resize the filmstrip Drag the end of the filmstrip near the small dots that appear on either end Part Il Photo Editing Working with the Toolbar in Full Screen Mode The toolbar displayed in Full Screen mode is similar to the toolbar in the Aperture main window ee ETE Always Show Toolbar To view the Full Screen mode toolbar In Full Screen mode move the pointer to the top of your primary screen You can also have the toolbar always appear on the screen by clicking the Always Show Toolbar button You can use the toolbar s buttons and tools to create image versions work with stacks and make a variety of adjustments to your images Version Buttons Duplicate Version m pm New Version From Master e Duplicate Version Click this button to create a new version of the selected image e New Version From Master Click this button to create a version from the original master file A duplicate of the master file is created Stacking Buttons Open All Stacks Album ia Stack Pick Close All Stacks e Stack Pick Select a stack item then click this button to mark the image as its stack s pick Promote Select a stack item then click this button to move the selected stack item closer to the stack s pick e Demote Select a stack item then click this button to move the select
33. Drag the page to a new location Chapter 19 Creating Books 381 382 Removing Pages from a Book You can remove pages from a book Removing pages removes the contents of the page and remaining pages simply reflow to fill the deletion You cannot remove the cover page of a book To remove pages from your book Select the page or pages you want to remove in the Pages panel You can Shift click pages to select multiple pages Click the Delete Page button or press the Delete key then confirm that you want to delete the page or pages Choosing a Background Image You can choose a background image to appear behind the other images on a page For example you might create a page that shows a bride and groom in the foreground and a church setting in the background Or you might choose a background image that complements the colors of a foreground image To choose a background image for a page Select the page in the Pages panel Drag the image you want over the page until you see the background change color then release the mouse button To remove a background image Select the page in the Pages panel Click the page background to select the image A white border appears around the page outline Press the Delete key to remove the image Using Page Numbers in Your Book Aperture can automatically provide page numbering in your books Each theme provides page numbers in preset positions on the page You can turn off page numb
34. Part Ill Distribution and Backup Adding Text Boxes to a Page When you want to add text to a page and need another text box you can add one and position it where you want To add a text box to a page 1 In the Pages panel select the page to which you want to add text 2 Click the Edit Layout button Click the Edit Layout button to add or move a text box on the page 3 Click the Add Text Box button Add Text Box button a sT 2D ga E en A new text box appears on the page 4 Drag the new text box to the location you want You can resize a text box by dragging its resize handles Adding Metadata Boxes to a Page You can display your images on the page with the metadata associated with them To display an image s metadata you add a metadata box to the page and link it to the image To add a metadata box to a page 1 In the Pages panel select the page to which you want to add the metadata box 2 Click the Edit Layout button Click the Edit Layout button to add or move a metadata box on the page 3 Select the photo box to which you want to add a metadata box 4 Click the Add Metadata Box button i eT 90 ea e oa Add Metadata box button A new metadata box appears on the page Chapter 19 Creating Books 389 390 Drag the new metadata box to the location you want You can resize a metadata box by dragging its resize handles Choose the type of metadata you want displayed in the box
35. To create a project to hold your lia images click here Aperture f Click here to open the Wee 4e eae OB 4s Toolbar Import panel Viewer Your projects appear 4 here j Browser t k Click here to open the Vaults panel You select a hard disk to use for backing up images here Note Because you can customize the toolbar adding and deleting the buttons you want your toolbar may appear different from the one pictured in this manual For more information about changing the toolbar see Customizing the Toolbar on page 65 Part Interface and Acquisition Aperture imports the images into a project Click the project to see its images in the Browser Select a thumbnail in the Browser After you import images into a new project your screen will look similar to this o Se28 0666 O08 aa The Viewer shows the selected image Your project s image thumbnails About Aperture Sample Projects The Aperture installation disc includes several sample projects containing high resolution images When you first open Aperture a dialog appears asking if youd like to install a sample project Other sample projects are available in the Sample Projects folder on the Aperture installation disc You can import these projects into Aperture from the Aperture installation disc at any tim
36. To store imported master image files as referenced images in the Pictures folder on your hard disk Choose Pictures from the Store Files pop up menu To store imported master image files as referenced images in a location other than the Pictures folder Choose Choose from the Store Files pop up menu and select the folder you want Choose No folder from the Subfolders pop up menu to specify that the files be stored as separate individual files in the selected folder You can also specify that Aperture create and store your files in a hierarchy of subfolders with specific folder names For more information about specifying folders to hold your imported images see Importing Master Files for Referenced Images into Folders on page 103 Choose whether you want the image files moved or copied to a new location by clicking the Move files or Copy files button Chapter 4 Importing Images 111 5 Choose a naming convention from the Version Name pop up menu to specify how you want the images named For example choose Master Filename from the Version Name pop up menu to have your files stored using the current master filenames from your camera or card Choose a name format from the Version Name pop up menu to have your images stored using a specified name If you choose a custom name format enter the name you want in the Name Text field You can also apply the name format to the master image as well Choose Edit from the Version N
37. Type a keyword here and click the Add button 3 To add a keyword type a keyword in the Add Keyword field and click the Add button Part Il Photo Editing Applying Keywords to Images in the Light Table You can use the Light Table to arrange your image selection in a freeform manner After arranging your images into groups you can apply keywords to groups at once For example if you make a Light Table album consisting of the selects from your wedding shoot you can group the images according to the part of the wedding event they show After you ve arranged them you can apply keywords such as Getting Ready Wedding Ceremony Formal Shots and Reception as appropriate To apply keywords to groups of images in the Light Table Select a Light Table album in the Projects panel Choose Window gt Show Keywords HUD or press Shift H In the Light Table or Browser select a group of images to which you want to assign keywords Drag the appropriate keywords from the Keywords HUD to the selected images The keywords are applied to the selected images at once For more information about using the Light Table see Chapter 17 Using the Light Table on page 323 Removing Keywords from an Image At times you may want to remove all the keywords that you have applied to an image To remove all keywords from an image Select the image Choose Metadata gt Remove Keyword gt Remove All Keywords or press Shift Option 9 You ca
38. When you select a project or album in the Projects panel images appear in the Browser When you select one or several image thumbnails in the Browser those images are displayed in the Viewer You can use the Viewer to examine an image at its full size or compare multiple images side by side A Browser The Browser displays the contents of any project or album selected in the Projects panel By default the Browser displays images in a project or album as a set of gridded image thumbnails You can also view your images in list view B Grid View List View Display the Browser contents in grid view a grid of image buttons thumbnails or in list view a list of sortable file data C Sorting pop up menu Sort your images by a variety of sort properties in this pop up menu or define your own custom sort criteria D Sort Direction button Use this button in conjunction with the Sorting pop up menu to arrange the order of your images E Viewer The Viewer displays the images you ve selected in the Browser You can apply adjustments keywords and metadata to an image in the Viewer F Query HUD button Search for images by entering a term in the search field or and search field choosing an option from the search field pop up menu with a magnifying glass icon To perform a more complex search for images using the Query HUD click the Query HUD button to the left of the search field Part Interface and Acquisition G
39. amp Stamp HUD 218 220 lifting copying adjustments 170 keyboard shortcuts 220 463 464 keywords 218 219 Lift tool 48 Lift tool 48 170 218 219 Lift tool HUD 62 light 444 light meters 444 Light Table adding images to 326 aligning images 328 arranging images 329 badge overlays 243 245 331 color correcting and 324 creating albums 325 deleting albums 332 deleting images 326 functions and controls 60 grouping images 329 keywording images 223 metadata display 331 moving and resizing images 327 overlapping images in 329 overview 34 324 printing arrangements of images 284 332 resetting images 328 resizing display 330 sorting images 324 transferring images from 331 unplaced images 327 Light Table albums creating 325 saving search results as 265 Light Table Zoom slider 60 330 lining up images See aligning linking metadata boxes to images 390 linking to homepages 349 Link Metadata Box command 390 listing assigned keywords 222 items in Library 79 items in projects or folders 79 keywords 207 slideshow presets 316 list view displaying 121 displaying stacks in 184 keyword display in 205 metadata display 226 metadata display in 230 options 142 working with images in 126 List View button 42 120 126 205 locations of images 115 in metadata 50 for restoration 409 of vaults 404 Index Lock button 63 207 locked vaults 407 locking print presets 286 looping slideshows 316 Loupe button 48 171 Loupe tool 48
40. border of the Light Table to expand the Light Table area Setting View Options for the Light Table You can set the view options for the Light Table to display badge and metadata overlays such as ratings on your images To change the display of image information in the Light Table Choose View gt View Options In the View Options window select the Show decorations checkbox to display badge and metadata overlays on images in the Light Table Click Done Transferring Images from the Light Table You can easily select and transfer your images from the Light Table to a new album To transfer images from the Light Table to a new album Select the images you want to transfer In the Projects panel choose New Album From Selection New Web Gallery From Selection New Web Journal From Selection or New Book From Selection from the Add to Library pop up menu The images you selected are copied to the new album Chapter 17 Using the Light Table 331 332 Printing a Light Table Arrangement After arranging your images you can print the image arrangement for further review To print a Light Table arrangement 1 Select the images in the Light Table that you want to print by dragging a selection rectangle around them If no images are selected the entire Light Table is printed Ae Drag a selection rectangle around the images you want to print 2 Choose File gt Print Light Table or pre
41. character limits 242 defined 444 deleting 212 223 displaying 142 158 202 exporting 201 224 292 304 importing 224 IPTC data 201 keyboard shortcuts 215 220 keyword based web journal pages 347 keyword controls 30 213 213 214 Light Table and 223 listing 207 222 in metadata 228 in Metadata Inspector 50 overview 29 200 Index preset keywords 45 206 213 214 215 searching for images by 253 255 searching through 206 209 Smart Albums and 269 subordinate keywords 211 viewing for images 202 205 Keywords button 236 Keywords HUD adding new keywords to 210 applying keywords with 206 212 functions and controls 63 206 illustrated 23 listing keywords 29 opening 172 Keywords HUD button 48 Keywords pop up menu 255 L labels metadata 230 tools 66 lab plots 444 landscape photo boxes 385 laptops working with vaults on 407 Large Hardcover button 56 368 381 Large Softcover button 56 368 381 layering images and text on book pages 367 layout buttons 48 layouts book designs See master pages options for printing 280 workspaces See workspaces left aligning images 384 left hand pages 395 legacy images 90 lenses 444 Levels controls 62 Library adding items to 79 backing up to vaults 400 copying 407 defined 72 76 444 finding images in 253 overview 400 planning backup systems 401 restoring 400 409 searching 249 updating vaults 405 vaults and 78 working with multiple computers 407 Library Location field 68 Lift
42. choose Window gt Hide Inspectors or press I to hide the Inspectors panel 2 Choose Window gt Show Keyword Controls or press Shift D Add Keyword field Man 3 Adults Boy Children Add Keyword 1 2 Woman 4 Couple ve Girl 8 Baby Peop ri p3 Keyword buttons showing individual keywords assigned to the number keys 1 8 I Keyword Preset Group pop up menu Keyword buttons These buttons display the preset keywords in the selected keyword preset group The first eight keywords are assigned to the keyboard shortcut key combination of Option and a number key 1 through 8 on the keyboard Press Option and a number key on the keyboard not the numeric keypad to add the preset keyword to a selected image or click a button The control bar can hold up to 20 keyword buttons To remove a keyword applied by clicking a button press Shift Option and the button s corresponding number key To remove all keywords press Shift Option 9 Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images 213 214 Add Keyword field Type a new keyword in this field and press Return to add it to a selected image To remove a keyword you ve just applied type the keyword again and press Shift Return If the Keywords HUD is locked you are asked whether you want to unlock the Keywords HUD and add the keyword to the keyword library or not add the keyword to the image Keyword Preset Group pop up menu Use this to choose the keyword preset group
43. from the Match pop up menu if it s not already chosen The images that match the search criteria are displayed in the Browser Part Il Photo Editing Working with Two Projects Open You can work with two projects open at once splitting the Browser into a separate pane for each project When you Option click a second project in the Projects panel Aperture splits the Browser into two panes and shows thumbnails for both projects You can select images in either pane and see the selections in the Viewer You may find that working with multiple projects open allows you to easily copy or transfer the contents of one project to another To open an additional project in a split Browser Option click the project you want to open To close a project opened in a split Browser do one of the following Choose File gt Close Tab or press Command W Click the close button in the project s tab You can also open more than two projects without splitting the Browser When you Command click projects in the Projects panel you see tabs for each project appear across the top of the Browser You can click a tab to see the image thumbnails for that particular project To open an additional project as a tab in the Browser Commana click the project you want to open Chapter 5 Working with Images in the Browser 141 142 Displaying Specific Metadata with Your Images To help identify your images as you work
44. gt To specify the types of metadata that appear with your images n the Webpage Editor choose an option from the Metadata View pop up menu Part III Distribution and Backup _ Changing Copyright Information Web gallery and journal pages also appear with copyright information on the page You can select the copyright text on the webpage and change it You can also specify the copyright information you want for all your webpages in the Preferences window To change the copyright information that appears on web gallery or journal pages Choose Aperture gt Preferences or press Command comma Type the text you want in the Web Copyright field Working with Web Gallery Pages When you create a web gallery the images in it are placed automatically You can then make changes to the pages in the Webpage Editor Ordering Adding and Deleting Images in a Web Gallery You can adjust the placement of images on web gallery pages and add and delete images in the Webpage Editor To change the viewing order of your images in a web gallery Drag the images to different locations either in the Webpage Editor or Browser You can add images to a web gallery after you ve created it To add an image to a web gallery Drag an image from a project album or the Library into your web gallery album To delete an image from a web gallery Select the image in the Browser then choose Images gt Remove From Album or press the Del
45. j amp ES Chapter 20 Backing Up Your Images 403 404 Click the disclosure triangle to see which hard disk is assigned to the vault Creating Vaults Before you can back up your files you must create a vault and assign a hard disk to it After you assign a disk to the vault Aperture uses the vault to back up the entire Library You can create additional vaults and assign hard disks to them and each additional vault also records a complete backup of the Library To create a new vault Do one of the following e Choose File gt Vault gt Add Vault e Choose Add Vault from the Vault Action pop up menu Vault 1 377 9G8 of 465 7G8 available a e al Vault 2 261 7GB of 467 5G8 available n amp Vaults Panel button Vault Action vault S amp pop up menu In the Add Vault dialog specify the following options e Type the name you want for the vault in the Vault Name field e Choose where you want the vault stored from the Where pop up menu Click Add Important To ensure preservation of your image assets make sure to assign a separate external hard disk drive to each vault To see the hard disk assigned to a vault In the Vaults panel click the disclosure triangle beside the vault name Vault 1 X EA Backup Disk Vault 1 Vault 2 83 4GB of 232 8GB available E EEE E A Arrr a E Backup Disk Vault 2 Vault 2 me You can easily
46. referenced images and moving or copying them to a different location Note If you have folders of images to import you can import them using the Import Folders as Projects command For more information see Importing Folders of Images from the Finder on page 111 You can import image files in many common image formats including images scanned from nondigital sources such as film and photographic prints Adding these image files to your Aperture database is as simple as navigating to the folder where they reside on your hard disk using the Import dialog When you import images from a folder on your computer system you have the choice of importing the images into a new project or an existing one To import image files stored on your computer s hard disk or other storage device 1 If the Import panel is hidden click the Import Panel button in the toolbar to show it or press Shift l 2 Select the disk that holds the image files you want to import eee Ap Import Panel button Guagua E el e Select the disk where the images you want to import are located E Local Files All Projects v gt Jina Library gt Indoor Weddings gt Outdoor Weddings vvyvvvvyvv The Import dialog appears with the file browser at the top Chapter 4 Importing Images 97 98 3 Inthe file browser navigate to the folder containing the image files you want to import Selec
47. time and index number Aperture provides a number of preset name formats and you can also create your own naming conventions to suit the different types of shoots you do You can choose a preset name format when you import new photos Aperture provides the following preset name formats Preset name format Example Master Filename IMGOO1 Image Date Time 2005 10 14 09 03 25 PM Version Name IMGOO1 Version Name and Date Time IMGO01 2005 10 14 09 03 25 PM Version Name with Sequence IMGO01 1 of 2 IMG002 2 of 2 Version Name with Index IMGO01 1 IMG002 2 Custom Name with Index Thailand 1 Thailand 2 Custom Name with Counter Thailand 001 Thailand 002 You can apply names to your image files when you import them and when you export them You can specify names that will be applied to the versions and to the digital master files For example when you import images from your camera you can specify that a name format be applied to each image version that Aperture creates You can also specify that Aperture apply names to the digital master files as they are stored in the Library or on a hard disk When importing image files you select the Apply to Master filenames checkbox to apply the name format you want to the digital master files Then both versions and digital master files will share the same name format When you export master files you can also rename the digital master files if you choose When you im
48. update status of the vault Black means the vault is up to date Yellow means that changes have been made to images that have not been backed up Red means that images have been added to the Library that have not been backed up B Vaults Panel button Click this button to show or hide the Vaults panel Vault Action Add remove and update vaults from this pop up menu pop up menu D Update All Vaults Click this button to update all your existing vaults button For more information see Chapter 20 Backing Up Your Images on page 399 Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 53 Book Layout Editor When you create a new book album the Book Layout Editor appears In it you can create a variety of printed books to showcase your images iat T ST en ea Sh Design each page in the Book Layout Editor Select a page to edit in the Pages panel Title Information Here 20 pages large hardcover 11 x 8 14 A Add Pages Choose to add one or several pages to your book from this pop up menu pop up menu B Pages panel Select an individual book page in the Pages panel to view or rearrange your book pages 54 PartI Interface and Acquisition Theme button Click this button to choose a theme and layout for your book s pages D Edit Content button Click this button to change images or edit text on your pages E Edit Layout button Click this button to change the page layout moving a
49. you may want to have alternate images available when presenting images to clients You can change the order of images within a stack to help you choose the pick and alternates Moving an image to the left promotes it and moving it to the right demotes it To promote an image in a stack do one of the following Select an image then choose Stacks gt Promote or press Command left bracket Drag the image over the image location you want until you see a green bar appear then release the mouse button To demote an image in a stack do one of the following Select an image then choose Stacks gt Demote or press Command right bracket Drag the image over the image location you want until you see a green bar appear then release the mouse button Part Il Photo Editing Adding Images to and Removing Images from Stacks You can add images to and remove images from stacks at any time You can drag images into or out of a stack as well as drag images from one stack to another To add an image to a stack do one of the following Select the stack and the image you want to add to it then choose Stacks gt Stack or press Command k Drag the image into an expanded stack To remove an image from a stack do one of the following Select the image then choose Stacks gt Extract Item or press Shift Option k Drag the image out of an expanded stack Splitting Stacks You can split a stack into multiple stacks to refine
50. you want displayed The first eight keywords in the group are assigned to the keyboard shortcut combination Option and a number key from 1 through 8 Adding Keywords to Images Using Keyword Controls You can easily add a preset keyword to an image To add a preset keyword to an image Select the image to which you want to assign a keyword Do one of the following Choose Metadata gt Add Keyword then choose the keyword you want from the submenu e Press Option and a number key from 1 to 8 to assign one of the first eight keywords e Click a keyword button in the control bar You can also easily apply a new keyword that s not part of your keyword library To apply a new keyword using the keyword controls In the Browser select an image or group of images In the control bar type the new keyword in the Add Keyword field then press Return Ar Showingal Select the image to which you want to apply a new keyword Enter your keyword in this field then press Vacation Birthday Add Keyword m Return Backyard Holiday Snapshots The keyword you entered is now applied to the image or group of images To view keywords applied to images see Viewing Keywords Applied to Images on page 202 Part Il Photo Editing Choosing a Keyword Preset Group Aperture provides groups of related keywords in sets that you can easily select and use A group of related keywords is called a keyword
51. 1 button if necessary and choose Caption amp Keywords from the Set 1 pop up menu then click Done To set the Browser to list view click the List View button or press Control L The Browser switches from grid view to list view The keywords for each image appear in the Keywords column Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images 205 Applying Keywords Using the Keywords HUD The Keywords HUD provides a versatile way to apply keywords to images The Keywords HUD contains a library of predefined keywords that you can browse and search You can also add your own keywords or remove keywords The Keywords HUD is automatically updated with any keywords you add For example when you enter a new keyword in the Metadata Inspector that keyword also appears in the Keywords HUD When you change a keyword for example by changing its spelling or capitalization the keyword is updated on all images that have that keyword assigned Q Search gt Personal gt Photo specs gt Photojournalism Keyword list gt Stock categories gt Wedding Keyword group You can use the Keywords HUD in the Browser in grid and list views in the Light Table and in Full Screen mode You can also use the Keywords HUD when working with book albums in the Book Layout Editor and when working with web gallery and web journal albums in the Webpage Editor Controls in the Keywords HUD Close button x Q Search Search field Disclosure triangle gt Perso
52. 365 copying albums 396 covers 368 380 creating 36 365 creating automatically 361 displaying pages 370 editing text and layout 366 flowing unplaced images into 374 indexes 367 378 layout controls 55 metadata boxes 389 metadata in 361 367 navigating through pages 370 numbering pages 382 number of pages in 363 ordering 363 368 397 overview 358 photo boxes 367 383 planning process 363 printing 283 363 397 rearranging pages 381 rebuilding after changes 383 saving search results in albums 265 shortcut keys for turning pages 370 single page or full spread view 368 371 text boxes 388 text on pages 362 367 themes 359 365 366 369 unplaced images 372 377 updating pages with changes 396 zooming view of pages 368 371 Book Size pop up menu 365 borders onimages 195 122 on printed images 281 bounce lighting 434 bracketed images 109 177 Bring Forward button 55 367 387 Browser badge overlays 243 245 creating versions in 130 132 darkening or lightening background 125 deleting images 82 132 dragging images into projects or albums 134 finding images in 127 functions and controls 42 grid view 125 142 illustrated 16 image information in 121 keyword display 202 205 list view 126 142 metadata display 226 228 230 navigating in 122 opening multiple projects 141 overview 120 project tabs 141 rearranging images in 128 rotating images in 130 selecting images in 122 sorting images in 129 splitting pan
53. 385 386 wu A WwW N wm BB WwW N Copying Pasting Cutting and Removing Images from Photo Boxes After you place images in photo boxes on your pages you can select a box or group of boxes and copy and paste the contents or cut or remove the images from boxes To copy and paste the contents of selected boxes Click the Edit Content button if it s not already selected Select the photo box or boxes whose contents you want to copy Choose Edit gt Copy Content Select the photo box or boxes where you want the copied contents to appear Choose Edit gt Paste Content To copy selected boxes Click the Edit Layout button if it s not already selected Select the box or boxes you want to copy Choose Edit gt Copy Select the page where you want the copied photo box or boxes to appear Choose Edit gt Paste To cut the contents of selected boxes placing the contents in the Clipboard Click the Edit Content button if it s not already selected Select the photo box or boxes whose contents you want to cut Choose Edit gt Cut Content To remove the contents of selected boxes without saving them in the Clipboard Click the Edit Content button if it s not already selected Select the box or boxes whose contents you want to remove Press the Delete key Part Ill Distribution and Backup Stacking Photo Boxes in a Specific Order As you arrange boxes on the page perhaps overlapping them to create a certain look yo
54. Aperture the master file is never modified Anytime a change is made to the image that change is applied to the version See also memory card project version megapixel 1 million pixels For example 1 500 000 pixels is 1 5 megapixels See also digital image sensor pixel memory card The device in the camera where digital images are stored See also camera capture Glossary metadata Data about data metadata describes how data was collected and formatted Databases use metadata to track specific forms of data Aperture supports both EXIF and IPTC metadata See also EXIF IPTC meter The process of using a light meter to calculate the appropriate exposure See also light meter midtones The color values in an image between the highlights and shadows See also contrast highlights shadows mirroring The process of showing the same image on two or more displays See also extended desktop mode monitor See display negative Developed film with a reverse tone image of the subject or scene See also dust and scratch removal emulsion film positive noise See digital noise offset press A type of professional printer used for high volume printing for items such as magazines and brochures Offset printing presses deposit ink in lines of halftone dots to produce images on the page See also photo printer opacity The level of an image s transparency optical zoom lens See zoom lens overexposure The result of exposing a scen
55. Automatically Naming Your Imported Images on page 105 Click Relocate Masters Moving Referenced Images Master Files to the Aperture Library You can move referenced images master files to the Aperture Library For example if you have a variety of master files stored in different hard disk locations and it would be convenient to work with them all stored in the Aperture Library you can select the referenced images in the Browser and have Aperture move their master files to the Library With the referenced images master files stored in the Library Aperture manages all aspects of them always keeps them available and allows you to back them up in your vaults To move referenced images master files to the Aperture Library In the Browser select the referenced images whose master files you want to move to the Library Choose File gt Consolidate Masters Click Continue to confirm that you want the referenced images consolidated Chapter 5 Working with Images in the Browser 139 140 1 Copying Moving and Deleting Referenced Images You can copy move and delete referenced images in your Aperture projects using the same procedures you use for other Aperture versions and digital master files When you copy a version of a referenced image in Aperture a new version is created and tracked in the Aperture Library No new files are recorded on the hard disk in the location of the referenced image s master file When
56. Chapter 11 Working with Metadata on page 225 Chapter 6 Displaying Images in the Viewer 159 160 Selecting Image Preview Options Aperture can create high resolution JPEG images that are shown when you select an image in the Browser These preview images allow you to quickly see and work with your images when you select them even if images are offline referenced images The previews allow you to display high resolution detailed views of images in quick succession in the Viewer and when displaying slideshows using the best quality of display You can also share the preview images with other applications You can select preview options in the Preferences window that allow you to control the creation and quality of the previews You can have Aperture create high resolution previews of your images automatically or you can control the creation of previews manually You can have Aperture create previews for each new project that you create You can also have Aperture create previews for all your projects or for only specific projects For example you can select a project and specify that the images in it should have previews created for them You can also specify that other projects don t create previews for their images You can control the creation of previews on a project by project basis Aperture creates previews for projects as a background task that you can monitor with the Task list You can also control the creation of previews
57. Display of Metadata On or Off p 231 Viewing and Changing Metadata in the Metadata Inspector p 232 Working with Metadata Views p 235 Batch Changing Metadata p 241 More Information About IPTC Metadata p 242 Understanding Badge Overlays p 243 225 226 An Overview of Metadata Metadata Views and Metadata Presets You can display different combinations of metadata with your images in the Viewer and Browser as well as in Full Screen mode Aperture provides many metadata views that represent specific combinations of information that you can display For example you can choose a basic metadata view that shows an image s version name and caption Or you can choose an expanded metadata view that displays an image s rating badges aperture setting shutter speed exposure bias focal length caption keywords version name ISO speed rating file size and master image file location You can also create your own metadata views You choose the metadata view you want in the View Options window You can choose different metadata views for the Viewer the Browser in grid view and the Browser in list view You can also display metadata with labels that help identify the types of metadata being displayed 800 View Options Viewer D Set amp Viewer Basic Placement Below _ Show Labels set 2 Viewer Expanded Placement Over M Show Labels Viewer metadata Light Tab
58. For example if you shoot weddings you might create a wedding category with specific keywords that include Candid Ceremony Guests and so on Q Search gt Personal gt Photo specs gt Photojournalism Y Stock categories Abstract Agriculture Animals Architecture Backgrounds Business Celebrations Gty Culture Documentary Education Entertainment Fantasy You can apply a keyword directly to a selected image or group of images by dragging it from the Keywords HUD to the selection in the Viewer or Browser Chapter 1 An Overview of Aperture 29 30 Disclosure triangle A Library Smart Album has this icon You can also show keyword controls in the control bar at the bottom of the Aperture main window by choosing Window gt Show Keyword Controls Children Add Keyword People gt Man Adults Boy Woman Couple Girl 5 Baby Using these simple controls you can display different categories of keywords and easily apply those keywords with a quick click or keystroke Your Aperture keyword scheme can ensure comprehensive accessibility to your images and even help with the management of your copyrights sales and usage rights For more information about assigning keywords see Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images on page 199 Grouping Images with Smart Albums Photographers often need an easy way of regrouping and presenting images based on the needs of a client or project For
59. Images by Rating p 192 Including Image Rating in Your Workflow p 194 Comparing and Rating Images p 195 e Keyboard Shortcuts for Displaying Images with Specific Ratings p 197 187 188 Five stars indicate the highest rating Select An Overview of the Aperture Rating System After finishing a shoot photographers typically review their images and determine which ones are worth working with While a yes or no judgment of an image can work for a small selection of photos with a larger collection of similar images that show small variations photographers need an organized method of noting which images are superior shots which deserve further review and which are poor quality or rejects A simple and effective rating system can help photographers quickly narrow the focus of the selection process Rating is a simple process with powerful results If you can easily identify 100 out of 500 images that aren t going to work removing these images reduces your workload by 20 percent Rating and thereby reducing your workload can save you a considerable amount of time Aperture provides a system for rating images from Select to Reject The easily decipherable image ratings appear on the images themselves as overlays Positive ratings appear as stars you can rate images from one to five stars with five being the highest or Select rating A negative or Reject rating appears as an X Stars in
60. Metadata Presets You can apply metadata using metadata presets when importing images using the Import dialog and when using the Batch Change command You can also apply metadata presets to selected images using the Metadata Inspector To apply a metadata preset when importing images Show the Import panel by choosing File gt Import gt Images or by clicking the Import Panel button Select the images you want to import if necessary Choose the metadata preset you want to use from the Add Metadata From pop up menu Select Append to add the preset s metadata to the images maintaining any currently associated metadata or select Replace to add the preset s metadata to the images and remove any other associated metadata Select the other import options you want then click the Import button To apply a metadata preset when changing images with the Batch Change dialog Select the images you want to change Do one of the following e Choose Metadata gt Batch Change e Show the Metadata Inspector by choosing Window gt Show Metadata or pressing Control D then choose Batch Change from the Metadata Action pop up menu Choose the metadata preset you want from the Add Metadata From pop up menu Select Append to add the preset s metadata to the images maintaining any currently associated metadata or select Replace to add the preset s metadata to the images and remove any other associated metadata Select the other options
61. PNG 50 of Original Size a height values here PNG Fit within 1024 x 1024 PNG Fit within 640 x 640 Colorsync Profile sRGB Profle PSD Original Size 16 bit Black Point Compensation PSD 50 of Original Size 16 bit Email Small JPEG C Show wat Email Medium JPEG Email Original Size JPEG Position Top Left owe 5 ojo Care GD The Export Presets dialog appears Select an export preset Choose Fit Within Inches from the Size To pop up menu and specify the size of the image by entering values in the Width and Height fields Specify additional settings as necessary then click OK Choose a name format from the Export Name Format pop up menu then click Export Renaming Images at Export When you export selects from a large group of images the exported files often have nonsequential names You can rename your images at export giving them more meaningful names For example suppose you want to export images LA 031 LA 441 LA 686 and LA 894 from image group LA 001 to LA 1061 You can use the Custom Name with Index name format to rename your images LA 1 LA 2 and so on To rename images at export Select the image or images you want to export Choose File gt Export gt Export Version or press Command Shift E Navigate to the location where you want the exported images placed Part Ill Distribution and Backup 4 Choose a name format from the Export Name Format pop up menu Choose a name
62. Page Display Controls Sy 100 mG a A Scale To Fit button Click this button to scale the display of your pages to fit the Book Layout Editor screen size B Actual Size button Click this button to view the selected page at its actual size Display Size slider Drag this slider to increase or decrease the size of the page Cover and Page Display Buttons B Large Hardcover Click this button to choose a large hardcover book format Large Softcover Click this button to choose a large softcover book format Show Full Spreads Click this button to display two facing pages A B a D Show Single Pages Click this button to display single pages Printing and Page Navigation Buttons i Buy Book ra 30 Print Click this button to print your book s pages B Buy Book Click this button to purchase a printed copy of your book from Apple s print vendor C Previous Page Click this button to go to the previous page of your book D Next Page Click this button to go to the next page of your book To learn more about creating books see Chapter 19 Creating Books on page 357 56 PartI Interface and Acquisition Webpage Editor You can use the Webpage Editor to create professional quality gallery style pages and web journal pages for displaying your images After designing your pages you can post them to your Mac account or web server The controls
63. Shuttle control Use the Shuttle control to quickly move through your image thumbnails H Scroll bar Use the scroll bar to scroll through your image thumbnails l Thumbnail Resize slider Use the Thumbnail Resize slider to quickly change the size of your image thumbnails To learn more about using the Browser and Viewer see Chapter 5 Working with Images in the Browser on page 119 and Chapter 6 Displaying Images in the Viewer on page 145 Control Bar The control bar contains buttons and controls you can use to rotate rate and navigate through images as well as apply keywords to them It runs across the bottom of the Aperture main window If you don t need the control bar you can hide it by choosing Window gt Hide Control Bar or press D Enmen O08 000 68 He oe oS EE Display Controls ZZZ A Viewer Mode Choose how to view your images and arrange your displays from pop up menu this pop up menu For more information see Chapter 6 Displaying Images in the Viewer on page 145 B Zoom Viewer button Click this button to move between viewing an image at actual size and fitting the image to the Viewer s screen size C Show Master Image Click this button to view the original digital master file without any button applied adjustments Click again to switch the view back to the current version D Full Screen button Click this button to switch to Full Screen mode For mo
64. The images that match the search criteria are immediately displayed in the Browser To save your search results see Saving Your Search Results on page 265 254 Part Il Photo Editing Searching by Keyword You can search for and locate images by any of the keywords that you ve assigned to them You can select one or more keywords to search for You can also specify which keywords an image must have to qualify as a match For example you can choose to search for images that have both Silhouette and Landscape as keywords or images that have either Silhouette or Landscape as keywords To search for images by keyword 1 In the Projects panel select a project or an album you want to search 2 Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following e Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser 3 In the Query HUD select the Keywords checkbox Note The Keywords checkbox is dimmed if no keywords have been applied to the images in the selected project or aloum x Match any of the following Rating Is greater than or equal to Select the Keywords checkbox Choose an option from the Keywords pop up Select the checkbox next a BEIN asjaga e menu to each keyword you want to search for New Smart Album New Album With Current Images ey 4 Choose an option from the Keywords pop up menu e To display images that have any of the selected keywords Ch
65. Webpage Editor 335 operating system naming conventions 106 operator characters 106 optical zoom lenses 445 orange borders 195 ordering books 363 368 397 organizing projects before importing files 90 importing folders 111 tips 78 orientation photo boxes 385 printer settings 280 searching for images by 140 262 263 Orientation pop up menu 280 Other button 236 output device proofing profiles 156 overexposure 445 overlapping images on book pages 367 filmstrip and 168 in Light Table 329 overlapping photo boxes 387 overlapping text on book pages 367 overlays badges 243 displaying or hiding 204 keywords 202 Light Table display 331 ratings 190 P Padding slider 317 Page Action pop up menu 59 340 347 page controls 56 page designs See themes page display controls 56 page navigation buttons 56 page numbers in books 367 382 pages adding metadata boxes to 389 adding or removing from books 367 374 382 adding text to 389 background images 382 copying designs 381 creating automatically 374 376 deleting photo boxes 387 formatting text in 391 inserting 375 376 377 378 layouts 366 left hand and right hand 395 master pages 360 377 381 393 navigating through 368 numbering 367 382 number of in books 363 number to print 279 overlapping images on 387 photo boxes 383 387 rearranging in books 381 saving as master pages 395 updating with changes 396 in web galleries 338 in web journals 340 347 webpages See w
66. You can create as many projects as you need and name them according to any naming scheme you prefer It s important to name projects so that they will be easy to identify and access When you need to further subdivide and organize images in a project you can create albums Over the long term you may be using Aperture to track years of projects so you ll want to develop a naming system that is easy to use and understand For more information about organizing your images in projects and albums see Chapter 3 Working with Aperture Projects on page 71 Part Interface and Acquisition Select your camera card reader or hard disk here Importing Images When you connect a camera or card reader to your computer the Import dialog appears You can select your camera or card reader and see the images you re about to import You can select all the images on a memory card or select and import only those you want You can also select image files on your hard disk for importing Specify import options here When you click Import All your images l i 4 are imported into the selected project or a new project You can then specify options for importing your images For example you can specify that your images be imported into the Aperture Library in your Pictures folder or specify another location to store them If you have images already stored on a hard disk you can s
67. a single drive volume The performance of a group of hard disks striped together as a RAID can be much higher than that of the individual drives RAM Short for random access memory A computer s memory capacity measured in megabytes MB or gigabytes GB which determines the amount of data the computer can process and temporarily store at any moment rangefinder An apparatus found on many cameras used to help focus the image See also camera viewfinder raster image processor RIP A specialized printer driver that replaces the driver that comes with your printer It takes input from applications and converts or rasterizes the information into data that the printer understands so that it can put dots on a page Software RIPs typically offer features not found in standard printer drivers rating In Aperture the process of adding a value to an image to indicate its quality in relation to other images in a selection See also photo edit Reject Select RAW The original bit for bit digital image file captured by the camera reciprocity The relationship between the aperture and the shutter that allows for correct exposures as a result of multiple shutter speed and aperture setting combinations An increase in aperture and decrease in shutter speed creates the same exposure as the previous aperture and shutter combination and vice versa See also aperture shutter red eye The phenomenon that gives people glowing red eyes in photographs
68. album in the Projects panel the Book Layout Editor appears above the Browser You use the Book Layout Editor to set up the page structure of your book and place images and text on the pages Use these controls to Use this button to choose change your view of the a theme for your book pages zooming in or out Theme Ar Colecon E Tw a oT Sm San l E o naia Book Layout Editor To add an image to a page drag an image from the Browser into a photo box on the page Title Information Here To add text to a page click a text box and type or paste the text Use this pop up menu to choose the master page design you want Part III Distribution and Backup The Pages panel on the left shows thumbnails of your book pages You can scroll through the thumbnails and click one to select a page of your book to work on A larger view of the selected page appears on the right Selected page Aperture Selected book album 5 5 eu venn o Select the page you want to work on here A larger view of the selected page appears here 56 pages large hardcover 11 x 849 Laseced A rma eoeeoece Books are based on a theme or design and master page layouts that present your images in a standardized way Click the Theme button to see the themes you can choose took size Standard Select the theme yo
69. an album you want to search Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser In the Query HUD choose Date from the Add Filter pop up menu Select the Date checkbox then choose a date option from the Date pop up menu Choose an option from the middle pop up menu to qualify your search Enter the date you want the search based upon x Match any lt of the following Rating 1S greater than or equal to m e Choose how you want to qualify your search from this pop up menu is one or more of the following V vate image Bate P E a bos oa m Enter a date here New Smart Album New Album With Current images 7 Choose a date option from the Date pop up menu If needed you can add multiple Date options to specify the capture year capture month capture day and so on Choose any from the Match pop up menu if it s not already chosen The images that match the search criteria are immediately displayed in the Browser To save your search results see Saving Your Search Results on page 265 Chapter 12 Searching for and Displaying Images 257 258 Select the Rating checkbox Choose an option from the Rating pop up menu Searching by Rating You can use the Query HUD to see all images with a certain rating For example you can search for all the images in a project that have a rating
70. are backed up The versions previews and metadata associated with referenced images master files are also backed up in the vault Referenced images master files are not backed up in the vault with the Library Important Because the digital master files for referenced images are stored outside of the Library you must manage the backup and archiving of them yourself Working with Projects How you use and organize your projects depends on the scope of your workflow as well as your particular organizational style These factors also affect your decision to use one or more albums in your project Organizing Your Projects Typically you create a new project for each photographic project or job that you work on regardless of its duration For example if you re working on a documentary in Thailand you would create a project for it If you re also shooting the temples in the interior of the country that could be a second separate project Both projects could conceivably refer to some of the same images but they are completely independent structures each with its own versions master files and albums Very large photography projects such as documentaries and sporting events often consist of large numbers of captured images You can always break one project into several should the need arise Part Interface and Acquisition Using More Than One Album in a Project For some projects it makes sense to use several albums within the
71. associated with an image For example you can send an editor a digital file complete with the IPTC information you ve added Aperture also enables you to quickly email images For more information about exporting images see Chapter 15 Exporting Your Images on page 291 Backing Up Your Work After importing images from your camera and erasing memory cards in preparation for the next shoot the only record of your images is stored on your hard disks It s vital that you back up your files on storage media separate from your computer and its hard disks Backing up your photos and storing the backups in a safe place can save your work from catastrophes such as fire theft storm related disruptions or equipment failure Aperture backs up your managed images images that are stored in the Aperture Library and all information such as versions metadata and previews associated with them on vaults located on hard disk drives Aperture doesn t back up the digital master files of referenced images located outside the Aperture Library You must maintain your own backup system of referenced image master files Aperture does back up the versions previews and metadata information associated with referenced images but does not back up the master images themselves Chapter 1 An Overview of Aperture 37 38 You can view your vaults in the Vaults panel There are several controls that you ll use when you update vaults to back up your ima
72. be printed on sheetfed coated paper you can choose a proofing profile for sheetfed coated paper to see what the printed image might look like Aperture provides several dozen profiles that match the characteristics of many printers screen devices and color spaces After choosing a proofing profile that matches the final output of the image you turn on the onscreen proofing feature and the image changes to show the expected results Onscreen proofing changes the look of images in the Viewer and in Full Screen mode To choose a proofing profile Choose View gt Proofing Profile then choose the profile you want from the submenu To turn onscreen proofing on or off Choose View gt Onscreen Proofing or press Shift Option P Note After setting up onscreen proofing make sure to set your image export preset to match the eventual output of the image Choose Aperture gt Presets gt Image Export In the dialog that appears choose the profile you want from the ColorSync Profile pop up menu For more information about exporting images see Chapter 15 Exporting Your Images Part Il Photo Editing Choose Alternate from the Viewer Mode pop up menu to display the selected image in the secondary Viewer Viewing Images on Multiple Displays Using the additional screen space of a second display affords an excellent platform for viewing and adjusting images playing slideshows and presenting your full color full size images to
73. came with the computers Open Aperture on the computer to which you want to transfer the project In the Projects panel select Library Choose File gt Import gt Projects In the Import dialog navigate to the location on the other computer where the project you want to transfer is stored select the project then click Open The selected project appears in the Projects panel Making an Immediate Backup After you import images into Aperture you can make an immediate backup to ensure that your digital master files exist in more than one place You do this by having Aperture update your vault For more information see Chapter 20 Backing Up Your Images on page 399 Part Interface and Acquisition Where Aperture Stores Your Managed Files in the Library You always view and work with your images within Aperture However you may wonder where your managed image files physically reside in the Aperture Library on your computer s hard disk By default your images are stored in the Aperture Library file within your Pictures folder You can open and see the contents of the Aperture Library file in the Finder by Control clicking the file and choosing Show Package Contents However it s not recommended that you access or work with your master files in this way because it presents a risk of interfering with the Aperture Library Warning You should always back up and work with your managed images and projects from within the
74. checkbox Select this checkbox to show Watermark apply a watermark to Position your images Opacity e w oo 4 Click the Choose Image button Select the image you want as a watermark then click Choose 6 Choose where you want the watermark to appear on the image from the Position pop up menu 7 To adjust the opacity of the watermark drag the Opacity slider to a new position Chapter 18 Creating Webpages 355 8 When you re satisfied with how your watermark appears in the watermark preview area click OK Tips for Creating High Quality Watermarks Use the following guidelines to create high quality watermarks for your images e Save your watermark as a psd Photoshop file with a transparent background e Create multiple sizes of your watermark so that you can select the one that is the best match for the output size of the exported image Note If a watermark file is larger than the image you wish to export Aperture automatically scales the watermark down to fit the image Aperture does not scale watermarks up e After you create a watermark save it as part of a web export preset so you can reuse it as often as you need Note Export presets and web export presets are independent of one another Make sure to save your watermark as part of the appropriate preset 356 Part Ill Distribution and Backup Creating Books 1 With Aperture you can easily create books of your images that you can
75. create two new slideshow presets one for your presentation and the other for your question and answer period The presentation slideshow can show one image at a time and be manually controlled so you can move through the images at your own pace Your second slideshow preset to be used during the question and answer period of your presentation can display the same images you just showed in a grid across two displays The images can advance automatically and be set to music To create or modify a slideshow preset you choose Aperture gt Presets gt Slideshow or choose Edit from the Slideshow Preset pop up menu in the Run Slideshow dialog and the Slideshow Presets dialog appears You can then select a slideshow preset or create a new one and specify the settings you want Chapter 16 Creating Slideshow Presentations 313 314 Creating a Slideshow You can easily set up your slideshow by selecting the images you want and then choosing a slideshow preset To create and play a slideshow Select a set of images by doing one of the following e Select a project or album in the Projects panel e Select individual images or image stacks in the Browser Choose File gt Slideshow or press Shift S The Run Slideshow dialog appears Run Slideshow Slideshow Preset Dissolve 3 Ceancet Esar Choose a preset from the Slideshow Preset pop up menu The slideshow presets include Dissolve Displays each image fo
76. decrease the size of the thumbnails To shuttle continuously through the images in a project do one of the following Drag the Shuttle control Press J to shuttle left press K to stop shuttling or press L to shuttle right Note Pressing J or L multiple times increases the shuttle speed Depending on your work preferences you may want to lighten or darken the background that your thumbnails appear against in the Browser The darker the background the less it interferes with the colors in your image It s a good idea to set the background to a dark color when performing color adjustments to your images You can darken the background from shades of gray all the way to black or lighten it from gray to white To lighten or darken the background of the Browser 1 Choose Aperture gt Preferences or press Command comma 2 In the Preferences window drag the Grid View Background Brightness slider to lighten or darken the background then close the window Chapter 5 Working with Images in the Browser 125 126 Working with Images in List View Instead of thumbnails list view displays images by name and icon with accompanying information such as rating image dimensions file size and date To switch to list view do one of the following Choose View gt List or press Control L Click the List View button in the Browser List View button image Date 4 To choose what type of information is displayed in l
77. determined by the metadata view that is displayed You can control whether badges are visible by choosing a metadata view that includes badge overlays you can also control whether badge overlays are visible by turning metadata views on or off Important Badge overlays appear only in the Aperture application they do not appear on images exported or printed from Aperture To display badge overlays on images in the Viewer 1 Choose View gt View Options or press Command J The View Options window appears 2 Select the Viewer checkbox 3 From the Viewer Set 1 pop up menu choose a metadata view that includes badge overlays Some examples are General and Ratings as well as Viewer Basic and Viewer Expanded Choose a metadata view that includes badge overlays from the Set 1 pop up menu 4 Click Done Badges are now visible in the Viewer You can turn off the display of badge overlays in the Viewer by turning off the display of metadata For more information see Turning the Display of Metadata On or Off on page 231 244 Part Il Photo Editing To display badge overlays on images in the Browser in grid view Choose View gt View Options or press Command J The View Options window appears Select the Grid View checkbox From the Grid View Set 1 pop up menu choose a metadata view that includes badge overlays Some examples are General and Ratings as well as Grid View Basic and Grid View Expanded Cli
78. editor select the image then choose Images gt Open With External Editor Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 67 E Image display checkboxes Select the Show Loading indicator while full size images load checkbox to have Aperture display an initial proxy image if there is any delay when loading a full size image Select the Show tooltips on controls checkbox to have Aperture display the names of interface items when you place your pointer over them Select the Use proportional spacing for images in Grid View checkbox to change the spacing of images in the Browser Select the Add gaps between Sort Groups checkbox to add space between groups when sorting by a particular category For example when sorting images by rating you can have Aperture add a gap between the last five star image and the first four star image Select the Show number of versions for projects and albums checkbox to have Aperture display the number of versions in a project or album in the Projects panel Select the Badge referenced images checkbox to display badges that identify referenced images Grid View Background Brightness slider Adjust the Browser background brightness using this slider Viewer Background Brightness slider Adjust the Viewer background brightness using this slider Hot Area Display Threshold slider You can view an image s hot areas where exposure goes beyond the current scre
79. example a corporate client might call to request images of a general location or subject such as airports or Asian temples to be included with future collateral Aperture allows you to easily make selections from across the entire library of images and group them in Smart Albums which are albums that can be dynamically generated based on search criteria you specify Aperture comes with a selection of predefined Smart Albums set up in the Library for you For example there are Smart Albums that gather all your select images all images taken in the last week and all images taken in the last month When you click the Library disclosure triangle you see the list of Smart Albums created for you Select a Smart Album to see its contents in the Browser All Projects ty y lina Library EEEE ES lg amp or better lzy Rejected izg In the Last Week ling In the Last Month eg 2006 izg 2005 lng 2004 lug All Images Sonoma County Fair ae Although a Smart Album appears similar to the other projects or albums in the Projects panel the contents of the album are specified by search criteria You don t import master files or versions into a Smart Album You use the Query HUD to specify the image keywords or other criteria that identify the images you want and image versions automatically appear in the album By adjusting the search criteria you change the contents of the Smart Album Part Interface and Acquisition For
80. example after creating an empty Smart Album in the Projects panel you might specify that you want any image that is rated five stars Aperture searches across the Library and displays all the images rated five stars in the Smart Album New images rated five stars are added to the Smart Album automatically x Smart Settings Antartica Selects Library Match any of the following Qr Quick Search V Rating is greater than or equal to In the Query HUD specify the search criteria for images you want in the Smart Album You can work with the photos in the Smart Album just as you can with images in any other album You can make Smart Albums that gather images from across the entire Library or from within a specific project only When you no longer need a Smart Album you can delete it and the contents of the Library remain the same the Smart Album s images are not deleted from the Library For more information about using Smart Albums see Chapter 13 Grouping Images with Smart Albums on page 267 Image Processing You can use Aperture to crop rotate horizontally align and remove red eye from images as well as adjust color and exposure reduce noise and so on Aperture provides controls for performing many types of image adjustments including e RAW image fine tuning e Exposure adjustments Color adjustments e White balance adjustments e Red eye correction Spot and patch corrections e Stra
81. find it convenient to use keyboard shortcuts for most features you use in Full Screen mode For more information about keyboard shortcuts you can use see Using Keyboard Shortcuts in Full Screen Mode on page 174 Part Il Photo Editing Entering and Exiting Full Screen Mode You can quickly switch between Full Screen mode and your workspace layout in the Aperture main window To enter Full Screen mode Click the Full Screen button in the control bar or press F Full Screen button in the control bar a The Aperture main window disappears and your images appear in Full Screen mode To exit Full Screen mode do one of the following m Click the Exit Full Screen button in the filmstrip or press F Exit Full Screen button in the filmstrip Press Escape The workspace layout you were working in before entering Full Screen mode reappears Working with the Filmstrip in Full Screen Mode The filmstrip in Full Screen mode is similar to the control bar in the Aperture main window You can use the filmstrip s controls to move through rotate view and rate your images Query HUD button Images shown in the filmstrip Search field Shuttle control Scroll bar Thumbnail Resize slider Chapter 7 Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode 165 Controls in the Filmstrip The following controls in the filmstrip are used to view images in Full Screen mode Navigation Controls e Shuttle control Click
82. for selected images To delete the previews for selected images In the Browser select the images whose previews you want to delete Choose Images gt Delete Previews Quickly Accessing Commands You can access commands via a shortcut menu as an alternative to using the menu bar at the top of the screen or pop up menus within a window To view the shortcut menu Position the pointer over the Viewer then Control click press the Control key and click Note Although accessing commands from shortcut menus can help you work more quickly keep in mind that not all commands are available in shortcut menus Part Il Photo Editing Viewing Images J in Full Screen Mode Full Screen mode s large viewing space and black background provide an excellent work area for viewing and adjusting your images Full Screen mode provides access to many of the tools and HUDs in Aperture This chapter explains how you can use Full Screen mode s filmstrip and toolbar to move through compare and rate your images and use the Aperture HUDs to crop adjust and add metadata to your images This chapter covers e An Overview of Full Screen Mode p 164 Entering and Exiting Full Screen Mode p 165 Working with the Filmstrip in Full Screen Mode p 165 Working with the Toolbar in Full Screen Mode p 169 Using HUDs in Full Screen Mode p 171 Changing the Display of Metadata in Full Screen Mode p 173 Using Keyboard Shortcuts in Full Sc
83. format here if you choose a Custom Name format enter the name in the field below If you choose a Custom Name format enter your custom name in the Custom Name field 5 When you re ready to export files click Export The files are exported with the name format you specified If none of the preset name formats meet your needs you can create a new name format For example you could create a name format that uses a custom name the index number and the date To create a new name format 1 Select an image in the Browser 2 Choose File gt Export gt Export Version or press Command Shift E 3 Choose Edit from the Export Name Format pop up menu The Naming Presets dialog appears Chapter 15 Exporting Your Images 299 4 Inthe Name list select an existing name format on which to base the new name Select an existing name format in this list Click the Add button format then click the Add button A copy of the selected name format is created 5 Rename the new name format 6 Add or remove name elements by dragging the elements where you want them and The name format example automatically updates as you change the name elements 300 when appropriate entering relevant naming information in the fields provided You can also enter characters directly in the Format field Name elements appear here when their checkboxes are selected Add or remove name elements by selecting or des
84. from the Metadata Format pop up menu Metadata Format pop up menu ai Ta 6 You can unlink a metadata box from its selected image and relink it when necessary To unlink a metadata box In the Pages panel select the page that has a metadata box you want to unlink Select the metadata box you want to unlink Choose Unlink Metadata Box from the Book Action pop up menu To relink a metadata box In the Pages panel select the page that has the metadata box you want to link Command click the metadata box and the photo box you want to link to select them Choose Link Metadata Box from the Book Action pop up menu Hiding or Showing Image Plate Numbers in Books You can turn on or off the display of plate numbers in your books and web galleries Aperture is preset to not display plate numbers for images To turn on the display of plate numbers in a book In the Book Layout Editor choose Enable Plate Metadata from the Book Action pop up menu Part Ill Distribution and Backup Choosing a Text Style You can assign text styles to text and metadata boxes to change the look of your text Aperture master pages come with preset text styles that include designs for important text elements such as cover text subtitles headings and paragraph text You can easily apply these styles to text and metadata boxes as you work To change the text style of a text or metadata box Select the text or metadata box you want to change Cho
85. from the selected theme and fills them with your images You can then change the master page assignments if you wish Chapter 19 Creating Books 373 374 Flowing Unplaced Images When you create a structure of pages to hold your images you can have Aperture flow in unplaced images If more pages are required to hold your images than your book currently has Aperture creates more pages If you ve already placed some images on pages in the book Aperture flows in images beginning with the first empty photo box To have Aperture place unplaced images Choose Autoflow Unplaced Images from the Book Action pop up menu Flowing Selected Images You can select images in the Browser and have Aperture flow them into the current page structure starting with the first empty photo box For example you can select two images in the Browser and have Aperture flow them into the first two empty photo boxes of your book You can thus flow images into a document s page structure little by little as you create a series of pages If you select more images than your current page structure can hold Aperture creates new pages as necessary to hold your images To have Aperture place selected images Select the images you want to place in the book Choose Autoflow Selected Images from the Book Action pop up menu Adding and Removing Pages When you create a book album Aperture automatically sets up default pages laid out for you You can select and change thes
86. galleries 338 in web journal pages 341 on webpages 344 fitting pages onscreen 371 fitting slideshows to music 322 fixed lenses 441 Index flashes 50 441 flat images 442 flowing unplaced images 377 focal lengths 50 228 442 folder name format 103 folder name format presets 103 Folder Naming Presets dialog 104 folders defined 72 75 442 deleting 83 for webpages 351 importing 111 importing images from 98 101 Font Size pop up menu 280 foregrounds in images 442 foreign language characters 106 formats defined 442 See also file formats formatting text 367 391 frames 442 framing images 442 frontlighting 442 f stops 441 full page spreads 371 full resolution display 155 Full Screen button 43 165 Full Screen mode badge overlays 243 defined 442 entering and exiting 22 165 filmstrip 165 keyboard shortcuts 174 metadata display in 173 227 overview 164 shortcut menu 174 stacks in 185 toolbar 169 turning on or off 65 using HUDs in 171 full size slideshows 316 G galleries See web galleries Gallery Pages panel 57 338 342 gamma 442 Gamma Adjust slider 302 307 352 Gamma value slider 280 gamut 154 424 442 gamut mapping 442 generic camera profiles 427 GIF files 20 89 glossary 433 451 graphics cards 416 418 grid lines on book pages 362 grid patterns of images 319 grid view badge overlays 245 entering 121 125 metadata display 226 230 options 142 sorting images in 129 Grid Vie
87. hiding rejected images You can change the Query HUD criteria to show rejected images if you wish nee Aperture E onagni km Se oo Maeczyecao OB aa Specify the search criteria you want Click here to show the Query HUD You can also create special albums called Smart Albums whose contents are derived solely by search criteria For example you might create a Smart Album that searches for and displays all portrait images from the entire Library When you create a Smart Album you use the Query HUD to define criteria for the images that should appear in it For more information about creating and using Smart Albums see Chapter 13 Grouping Images with Smart Albums on page 267 Aperture can locate images based on many types of information associated with the images When you import images into Aperture certain information is automatically assigned to each image including EXIF metadata such as image date photographer camera technical data filename and much more You can also assign your own metadata to images including keywords summaries captions and information used by IPTC fields and then locate your images by searching for the metadata Part Il Photo Editing Select the checkboxes for the items you want to search by Select the Calendar checkbox Select the dates you want to search by The search criteria that you use can be simple or complex For example the following illus
88. images by metadata other than IPTC or EXIF information you use the Other Metadata search options To search for images by metadata In the Projects panel select a project or an album you want to search 2 Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser 3 In the Query HUD choose Other Metadata from the Add Filter pop up menu 4 Select the Other checkbox and specify the search criteria Select the Other checkbox x Match aay of the following Rating Ts greater than or equal to m e Choose how you want to Calendar qualify your search from this pop up menu Enter a metadata New Smart Album New Album With Current images F value here Choose the type of metadata you want to search for 5 Choose any from the Match pop up menu if it s not already chosen The images that match the search criteria are displayed in the Browser To save your search results see Saving Your Search Results on page 265 Chapter 12 Searching for and Displaying Images 263 264 Select the checkboxes for the items you want to search by Searching by a Combination of Criteria You can create complex combinations of search criteria in the Query HUD For example you could search for images that have certain keywords and that were taken ona specific date To create complex searches you can add m
89. images from across the entire Aperture Library Then each time you rate an image as Select Aperture automatically adds it to your Smart Web Gallery Aloum and to a web gallery page You can then update your Mac account with pages of your most up to date select images or post them to your website For more information about creating and using Smart Albums see Chapter 13 Grouping Images with Smart Albums on page 267 Note Smart Web Gallery Albums are only available for web galleries not for web journals To create a Smart Web Gallery Album of your images Do one of the following Choose File gt New Smart gt Web Gallery e Choose New Smart Web Gallery from the Add to Library pop up menu in the Projects panel Enter a name for the new Smart Web Gallery Aloum Click the Query HUD button with a magnifying glass icon to the right of the Smart Web Gallery Album name to show the Query HUD In the Query HUD specify the criteria for the Smart Web Gallery Album The Smart Web Gallery Album is created and filled with the images that meet the search criteria Chapter 18 Creating Webpages 337 338 Gallery Pages panel Detail Images panel Web Gallery Controls in the Webpage Editor The following controls are available for revising web gallery pages and images Metadata Columns Rows Fit images within View pop up value slider value slider pop up menu Site Theme button tii memesa fay aml in T me w
90. in the Browser you may need to determine which images have master files that reside in the Aperture Library and which are referenced images whose master files are located elsewhere on your hard disks You can select a group of images in the Browser and then have Aperture show a list of the referenced images within the selection and where the master files are located To see a list of referenced images in a selection In the Browser select the group of images you want 2 Choose File gt Manage Referenced Files Shows the names of hard disks where referenced master files are located Identifies the hard disk location of the referenced master files Displays the specific image and metadata to help you identify the image ASA Referenced Files In Untitled Project Fie Path Users billgrou Desktop EOS Digital 04 18 1DS test jpg Volume Status files Not Found Volumes fai 0 Macintosh HD Online 1 o Identifies how many master files for referenced images are on the hard disk and how many are not found 04 18 1D5 testjpg 4212K8 1352 x 2032 2004 09 18 15 57 51 0700 Canon EOS 1DS Macintosh HD Users billgrou Deskt 0p EOS Digital 04 18 105 testjpg Mount _ C show Only Files Not Found Update Selection in Browser _Show Reconnect Options Done The Referenced Files dialog appears Part Il Photo Editing Locating a Referenced Image on a Hard Disk At times y
91. in the Webpage Editor differ slightly depending on whether you have selected a web gallery album or a web journal album Web Gallery Controls To work with a web gallery in the Webpage Editor select a web gallery album in the Projects panel and select a page to view from the thumbnail pages on the left side When the selected page appears you can add and arrange images and text ppan LA es d hd Gallery 13 Pages Antarctica B ToT EPEL Ta SS ff reracnon ie i o A Detail Images panel Click the thumbnail image in this panel to see the enlarged version of the selected image B Gallery Pages panel Click a page s thumbnail to see the enlarged version Site Theme button Click this button to choose a theme or layout for your webpages D Metadata View pop up menu Choose a metadata view to use with the webpage images from this pop up menu E Columns value slider Specify the number of columns you want on a page F Rows value slider Specify the number of rows you want on a page G Fit images within Choose how to display images on the webpage pop up menu H Width value slider Specify the width of the images displayed on the page Height value slider Specify the height of the images displayed on the page Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 57 58 Next Page button Click this button to go to th
92. keywords captions copyright information and the photographer s name You can also apply or replace existing metadata associated with an image when you import the image e Adjust the shoot time of images that were shot in a different time zone When connecting your camera directly to the computer make sure that you turn the camera on and set it to the mode for transferring images PC PTP Normal or another mode depending on the type of camera Some cameras automatically select the correct transfer mode when connected to a computer See your camera s manual for specific instructions Chapter 4 Importing Images 91 92 Import panel Import arrow Importing All Images from a Camera or Card Reader You can import all the image files located on your camera or card reader into Aperture at once To import all the images from a camera or card reader into Aperture Connect your camera or card reader to your computer The Import panel and Import dialog appear showing the images on the camera or card Note If iPhoto opens when you connect your camera or card reader quit iPhoto and then in Aperture choose Aperture gt Preferences Choose Aperture from the When a camera is connected pop up menu Disconnect and reconnect your camera to have Aperture open the Import dialog Els Nat manes Time Adjustment None Oat Time Import dialog T o wea EE ee i mor a 206 map we
93. metadata fields Click the Reset button with a curved arrow beside the Add Metadata From pop up menu Creating Stacks Automatically During Import You can automatically create stacks when you import images You can preview the stacks before you import using the Auto Stack slider in the Import dialog For detailed information about working with stacks see Chapter 8 Stacking Images and Making Picks on page 175 Stacks are automatically created based on auto bracketed images and images shot continuously or within short intervals of time You can manually adjust the stacking of images shot within a short period of time by specifying the time interval of images that should be stacked To create stacks automatically If necessary show the Import panel by clicking the Import Panel button in the toolbar Select your camera or card reader or navigate to a folder on your hard disk that holds images you want to import Select the images you want to import Adjust the Auto Stack slider Click these buttons to Drag the Auto Stack Click the Split Stack open or close stacks slider to stack images button to split a stack i 1 i i off 0 15 0 30 0 45 100 Click the Stack button to Click the Unstack All Stacks stack selected images button to unstack all stacks You can adjust the period of time between shots from 1 second to 1 minute When the images appear stacked you can open or close the stacks by clicking the Open
94. metadata for full screen images and the settings for the Browser control the display of metadata for thumbnails in the filmstrip For more information about setting the display of metadata see Chapter 11 Working with Metadata on page 225 Although the menus are not available in Full Screen mode you can change the display of metadata using the same keyboard shortcuts used to change the display of metadata in the Browser and Viewer To turn the display of metadata on or off in Full Screen mode Press Y To switch between sets of metadata for images in Full Screen mode Press Shift Y To hide or show metadata in the filmstrip Press U To switch between sets of metadata in the filmstrip Press Shift U Chapter 7 Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode 173 174 Using Keyboard Shortcuts in Full Screen Mode Here are several useful keyboard shortcuts you can use in Full Screen mode Keyboard shortcut Function Go to next image Go to previous image r P Shuttle filmstrip left Ca m Stop shuttling left or right G Shuttle filmstrip right a Show Adjustments HUD Show Keywords HUD E Show Red Eye HUD o Show Lift amp Stamp HUD a Show Crop HUD k Show Spot amp Patch To find more keyboard shortcuts look in the Aperture menus consult the Aperture Quick Reference document or go to the chapter that covers the task for which you want to find a keyboard shortcut
95. model your new preset on After duplicating the preset and renaming the duplicate you can easily customize your new slideshow preset s settings To create a new slideshow preset 1 Choose Aperture gt Presets gt Slideshow The Slideshow Presets dialog appears 2 Select a preset in the Presets list on which to model your new preset 3 In the bottom left corner of the dialog click the Add button e e Presets Select a preset in the list Click this button to add Dissolve Fade through Black Manual Slow Dissolve 4 Up Slow 4 Up Fast a new preset Chapter 16 Creating Slideshow Presentations 317 A copy of the slideshow preset appears highlighted in the Presets list 4 Enter a name for the new slideshow preset then press Return 5 When you ve finished specifying the slideshow options you want click OK Modifying Slideshow Presets You can modify slideshow presets to create custom slideshows for any presentation To modify an existing preset 1 Choose Aperture gt Presets gt Slideshow The Slideshow Presets dialog appears 2 Select the preset you want to modify in the Presets list 3 Modify the slideshow preset s settings as appropriate 4 When you ve finished modifying the slideshow preset click OK 318 Part III Distribution and Backup Creating a Growing Grid of Images Most slideshow presets are set to replace one image with another You can creat
96. of images you can assign keywords to all the selected images at once To assign a keyword using the Keywords HUD To show the Keywords HUD do one of the following Choose Window gt Show Keywords HUD or press Shift H e Click the Keywords HUD button in the toolbar The Keywords HUD appears 2 Doone of the following If the Browser is in grid view Drag a keyword or keyword group from the Keywords HUD to an image or selected images in the Viewer or Browser x Q Search gt Personal gt Photo specs gt Photojournalism Stock categories Abstract Agriculture Architecture Backgrounds Business Celebrations Documentary a e import Export to an Image Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images 207 208 If the Browser is in list view Drag the keyword from the Keywords HUD to an image in the Browser list The keyword appears in the Keywords column for that image Note Depending on the view options you have set the Keywords column may not appear For more information see Viewing Keywords in the Browser in List View on page 205 The keyword is applied to the image or selection of images to which you dragged it To view keywords applied to images see Viewing Keywords Applied to Images on page 202 To apply multiple keywords using the Keywords HUD To show the Keywords HUD do one of the following Choose Window gt Show Keywords HUD or press Shift H e Click the Keywords HUD
97. or move images to a new location when importing them from a hard disk Click the Import Panel button in the toolbar or press Shift l to show the Import panel Select the disk that holds the image files you want to import All Projects gt im Library gt Indoor Weddings gt Outdoor Weddings The Import dialog appears with the file browser at the top In the file browser navigate to the folder containing the image files you want to import Select the folder of images you want to import When you have selected the folder containing the image files you want to import image thumbnails appear in the Import dialog In the Projects panel do one of the following e Select Library to create a new untitled project or choose File gt New Project or press Command N The Import arrow points at the Library e Select an existing project to hold your images The Import arrow points at the selected project The top left portion of the Import dialog updates displaying where the images are being placed Select the images you want to import Chapter 4 Importing Images 101 6 Choose a location for the imported images by doing one of the following To store imported master image files as referenced images in the Pictures folder on your hard disk Choose Pictures from the Store Files pop up menu e To store imported master image files as referenced images in a location other than t
98. preset select one of these options to specify the number of pages that you want the printed images to occupy or the number of rows and columns of images on the page Metadata pop up menu When you select a contact sheet preset choose a metadata view to specify the metadata you want printed with your images Font Size pop up menu When you select a contact sheet preset choose the font size of the metadata that will be printed Print Resolution Type the dot per inch dpi resolution at which you want to print your image in the DPI field You can also select the Use Best DPI checkbox to allow Aperture to calculate the best print resolution for the images for the selected printer Part Ill Distribution and Backup BW N Border Options e Width controls Drag the slider or enter a value in the value slider to reduce the size of the image in order to create a white border around the image Show crop marks checkbox Select this checkbox to print a cut line Preview Area This area shows how the image or images will print on the selected paper size If there is more than one page you can use the Previous Image and Next Image buttons to navigate through the pages e Save as PDF button Click this button to create a PDF e Preview button Click this button to view a PDF version of your print request in Preview Cancel button Click this button to close the Print dialog e Print button Click this button to send your print job to the
99. print using Apple s print vendor your own print vendor or your own printer This chapter provides instructions for using the selection of book designs and page layouts included in Aperture to create impressive books of your images You can order printed books using Apple s print vendor service which provides excellent printed results and direct delivery to you or your clients You can also print your books on your own color printer or create files that you can hand off to a print vendor With Aperture you can print outstanding portfolios of your works that effectively show your images in their best light This chapter covers e An Overview of Creating Books p 358 Planning Your Book p 363 Creating a Book Album p 365 Controls in the Book Layout Editor p 366 Choosing a Theme p 369 Viewing Pages p 370 Placing Images in a Book p 372 Adding and Removing Pages p 374 Working with Pages p 379 Working with Images p 383 Working with Text p 388 Working with Master Pages p 393 Copying a Book Album p 396 Printing Books p 397 357 358 To display and work with a page in your book click a page thumbnail here Use this pop up menu to m mE ea 20 pages targe hardcover 11 849 j oea ee add pages to your book An Overview of Creating Books Aperture provides options for creating a print book to suit a variety of needs When you select or create a book
100. printer paper and ink bounce lighting Natural and unnatural light sources flash and tungsten redirected toward the subject using a reflective surface to give the effect of natural light as well as fill in shadows See also color temperature fill in lighting white balance bracketing The process of taking three shots of the same image based on the aperture and shutter values recommended by the light meter one shot one stop under the recommended exposure one shot at the recommended exposure and one shot one stop over the recommended exposure You can also narrow the bracketing range to fractions of a stop Bracketing is used in difficult lighting situations to ensure the scene is captured with the correct exposure See also automatic bracketing Browser The part of the Aperture interface that displays the contents of the Library projects or albums The Browser displays images either as thumbnails grid view or by file information list view See also Viewer Glossary Bulb B A manual shutter speed setting on many cameras used for timed exposures When the shutter is set to B the shutter stays open until the photographer depresses the shutter release button See also shutter shutter speed burning The process of exposing a portion of the image longer than the rest of the image the opposite of dodging Burning a portion of the image makes that area darker than the surrounding areas of the image calibration The process of crea
101. project e Project Action pop up menu Add the selected item to a list of favorites or remove it from the favorites list You can create projects at any time although typically you create them when you import images When you import images into the Aperture Library and no project is selected a new project is created to contain those images However you can create a new empty project at any time For more information about importing files and creating projects automatically see Chapter 4 Importing Images on page 87 Chapter 3 Working with Aperture Projects 79 To create a new project 1 Choose File gt New Project or press Command N A new untitled All Projects 2 project appears in the gt lua Library a Projects panel ij Untitled Project 2 Enter the name you want for the project then press Return For information about naming files see Automatically Naming Your Imported Images on page 105 All Projects Ltr The project now has the gt lua Library Q name you entered E Antarctica Opening and Closing Projects To work with your images in Aperture you first select a project in the Projects panel to open it in the Browser and Viewer You can open and work on more than one project at a time When multiple projects are open each project appears in the Browser with its own tab You can click a project s tab to bring it to the front You can also open a project in its own pane to vi
102. project You can use albums in several ways including Albums as events Break a project into a series of albums according to specific events For example a wedding project can be divided into albums for each of the following events Preparation Ceremony and Reception e Albums as days Break a project that spans multiple days into albums for individual days For example a project consisting of a two week trip to Japan can be divided into 14 individual albums corresponding to each day Albums for specific subjects Break a project consisting of multiple photographed subjects into individual albums dedicated to each subject For example a studio photographer may shoot three models for a single project The photographer can create an album for each model Or you might create albums to hold specific image types such as candid shots landscapes or close ups Creating and Naming Projects There are several controls in the Projects panel that you ll use when working with projects Projects pop up menu i All Projects 1 Project Action Disclosure triangle gt is Library a pop up menu Antarctica Add to Library pop up menu e Disclosure triangle Click this to see all items within the Library project or folder e Projects pop up menu Choose to display all projects favorites or recent projects Add to Library pop up menu Choose to add a new item such as a project or Smart Album to the Library or selected
103. return to the Book Layout Editor click the Show Viewer button again Making Adjustments to Images in a Book You can t select and use the Crop Straighten Spot amp Patch and Red Eye tools in the toolbar when using the Book Layout Editor To use these tools to make a change to an image in your book select the image in the Browser then click the Show Viewer button The selected image appears in the Viewer and you can make your changes Click the Show Viewer button again to return to the Book Layout Editor Placing Images Automatically You can have Aperture automatically place your images in a book It s a good idea to set up the page structure of your document first by creating the number of pages needed and assigning the master page layouts that you want Then arrange your images in the Browser in the order in which they should appear in the book and you can have Aperture flow the images into the structure you created You can place all the unplaced images into your book at once or you can select specific images and have Aperture flow them into any empty pages For example you might select several images and have Aperture flow them into the first several pages of your book and then select several more images and have Aperture flow them into the following pages If you prefer you can have Aperture create as many pages as necessary to hold all your images and place them on the pages Aperture creates new pages using master page designs
104. search for images that are referenced images managed images and online or offline images To search for images by file status you use the File Status search options To search for images by file status 1 In the Projects panel select a project or an album you want to search 2 Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following e Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser 3 In the Query HUD choose File Status from the Add Filter pop up menu and select the File status checkbox 4 Deselect any checkboxes that aren t part of your query and choose the search criteria from the File Status pop up menu 6 Match any of the following Rating is greater than or equal to Calendar Select the File status checkbox New Smart Album New Album With Current images Choose the file status you want to search for 5 Choose any from the Match pop up menu if it s not already chosen The images that match the search criteria are displayed in the Browser To save your search results see Saving Your Search Results on page 265 262 Part Il Photo Editing 1 Searching by Other Metadata You can also search for images using the following kinds of metadata e Version name e Aspect ratio e Filename e File size e Master pixel size e Orientation e Camera time zone e Picture time zone Stock ID number To search for
105. see Importing Master Files for Referenced Images into Folders on page 103 Choose whether you want the image files moved or copied to a new location by clicking the Move files or Copy files button Choose a naming convention from the Version Name pop up menu to specify how you want the images named For example choose Master Filename from the Version Name pop up menu to have your files stored using the current master filenames from your camera or card Choose a name format from the Version Name pop up menu to have your images stored using a specified name If you choose a custom name format enter the name you want in the Name Text field You can also apply the name format to the master image as well Choose Edit from the Version Name pop up menu to define a new naming scheme For more information about naming files see Automatically Naming Your Imported Images on page 105 Click Choose Your iPhoto Library is imported into Aperture If you choose to store the photos imported from your iPhoto Library in the Aperture Library Aperture makes a copy of each image file and places it in the Aperture Library This doubles the amount of disk space the image files occupy on your computer To save space import the photos in your iPhoto Library as referenced images You can also delete images from your iPhoto Library after importing them but you will no longer have access to those images within iPhoto If you choose not to delete
106. shipping and pricing If you routinely produce printed albums you can create a book album that you can copy and reuse with each new project After setting up master pages and individual page layouts you can copy the book album to another project and then substitute the new images increasing your publishing productivity greatly You can then customize certain pages such as your cover to provide any unique touches you like Part Ill Distribution and Backup _ Creating a Book Album You can create a book album two ways e Select the images you want in the book and then create a new album holding the selection Create a new book album and then drag the images you want into it To create a book album from a selection of images Select the images you want to use in the book then do one of the following Choose File gt New From Selection gt Book e In the Projects panel choose New Book From Selection from the Add to Library pop up menu e Click the New Book Album button in the toolbar In the dialog that appears specify the following e Theme list Select a theme in the list to see a preview of its design on the right e Book Size pop up menu Choose the physical size of the book When you re ready click Choose Theme A new untitled book album appears in the Projects panel that includes the selected images Rename the book album To create a new empty book album Do one of the following Choose File g
107. size DPI Specify dots per inch dpi the resolution at which the images will be reproduced Gamma Adjust slider Gamma describes how your image distributes brightness Drag the slider to apply a uniform gamma adjustment to your exported images ColorSync Profile pop up menu Choosing a ColorSync profile ensures consistent color reproduction on other systems and in the printed image Aperture provides a large selection of profiles and any custom profiles you ve saved during calibration are also included in the pop up menu To apply a ColorSync profile to the images you ve selected for export choose a profile from the pop up menu hapter 15 Exporting Your Images 307 e Black Point Compensation checkbox Select this checkbox to scale the black and white luminance values to the selected ColorSync profile Activating black point compensation can prevent shadows from appearing as solid black e Show Watermark checkbox To add a watermark to your images select this checkbox After selecting the checkbox you can choose a file to apply as a watermark image and place your watermark with a specified opacity on your image For more information about adding watermarks see Adding a Watermark at Export on page 303 Creating an Export Preset If none of the predefined export presets suit your needs you can create your own export preset An easy way to create a new export preset is to copy an existing preset and then modify the copy To
108. the emulsion is exposed to light a chemical reaction occurs After the film is developed an image appears See also dust and scratch removal film evaluative metering A type of metering that operates by dividing the frame into several small segments taking a reading from each individual segment and processing the average of the total segments to recommend the best exposure value for the overall image See also center weighted metering light meter spot metering EXIF Short for Exchangeable Image File The standard format for storing information such as shutter speed aperture white balance exposure compensation metering setting ISO setting date and time about how an image was shot See also metadata IPTC export The process of formatting data in such a way that it can be understood by other applications In Aperture images can be exported in their native RAW format as well as in JPEG TIFF PNG and PSD formats The EXIF and IPTC metadata associated with an image can be exported as well exposure The amount of light in an image Exposure is controlled by limiting the intensity of light controlled by the aperture and the length of time light comes into contact with the digital image sensor controlled by the shutter Exposure affects the overall brightness of the image as well as its perceived contrast See also aperture contrast digital image sensor shutter exposure meter See light meter extended desktop mode A setti
109. the following Choose View gt Metadata Overlays gt Change Viewer Set or press Shift Y Choose View gt View Options or press Command J select the Set 1 or Set 2 button in the Viewer section then click Done To hide or show metadata in the Browser in grid view do one of the following Choose View gt Metadata Overlays gt Grid View or press U Choose View gt View Options or press Command J select or deselect the Grid View checkbox then click Done Chapter 11 Working with Metadata 231 To switch metadata views in the Browser do one of the following Choose View gt Metadata Overlays gt Change Browser Set or press Shift U Choose View gt View Options or press Command J select the Set 1 or Set 2 button in the Grid View or List View Columns section then click Done To turn image tooltips on or off do one of the following Choose View gt Image Tooltips or press T Choose View gt View Options or press Command J select or deselect the Image Tooltips checkbox then click Done Viewing and Changing Metadata in the Metadata Inspector You can view or change the metadata for a selected image in the Metadata Inspector The selected image s metadata appears in text fields You can change the metadata categories shown in the Metadata Inspector by choosing a different metadata view from the Metadata View pop up menu You can also view keywords EXIF information IPTC information other miscellaneous metadata th
110. the shoot location from the Actual Time Zone pop up menu Verify that the additional settings are correct then click the Import button Aperture automatically updates the capture time of your image files according to the Time Adjustment settings Dragging Files from the Finder to the Projects Panel You can drag image files from the Finder or desktop directly into a project This is useful if you ve received image files from a source other than your camera and you want to use them in Aperture You can also do this if you have image files scattered on your desktop or throughout folders on your system and you want to consolidate them in one place in the Library To quickly import image files from the Finder into a project In the Projects panel create a new project or select an existing project Locate the image file or files in the Finder Select the image files and drag them to the project in the Projects panel All Projects v 2 gt isa Library Q gt Indoor Weddings Outdoor Weddings 7 7S oi L Wedding Album Pa L Wedding Portfolio Drag the selected image files to a project The import process begins and an indicator appears next to the project s name showing the progress of the import Part Interface and Acquisition A WN Importing Folders of Images from the Finder If you ve spent time organizing your images into a meaningful hierarchy on your computer and you want to keep that org
111. this Badges pop up menu Caption Keywords Version Name vietnam20040220 Image Date 8 12 04 3 55 51 PM PDT Aperture f7 1 Shutter Speed 1 60 ISO Speed Rating Focal Length 35mm Focal Length 13mm Pixel Size 2592 x 1944 File Name vietnam2004 0220JPG File Size 2 88 MB Credit O O O O O o Copyright Notice Object Name o i Camera Model Canon PowerShot S60 To view a subset of the image s metadata click the appropriate button Keywords EXIF IPTC Other Archive You can change the combination of metadata that appears in the Metadata Inspector by choosing a metadata view from the Metadata View pop up menu You can also change those metadata items that are editable Click the buttons at the bottom of the inspector to display each button s type of metadata You can also add the actual metadata you want applied to your images to the fields of a metadata view and save it as a metadata preset You can then use that metadata preset to apply combinations of metadata to images as you import them or change them using the Batch Change dialog For example if you have a specific combination of metadata that one of your services always requires you can create a metadata preset specific for that service Then whenever you import images destined for that service or prepare images to send to that service you can apply the metadata you need using the preset you created You can create and manage y
112. to appear in the web journal and create an album Aperture creates a web journal album that contains the images you selected and the Webpage Editor appears above the Browser The Browser contains the selected images which you can then manually place on the webpages To create a web journal album from selected images In the Browser select the images you want to place on your webpages Do one of the following e Choose File gt New From Selection gt Web Journal Choose New Web Journal From Selection from the Add to Library pop up menu in the Projects panel A new untitled web journal aloum appears in the Projects panel Rename the album The selected images appear in the Browser below the Webpage Editor You can then manually add images to your web journal pages Chapter 18 Creating Webpages 339 340 To create a new empty web journal album 1 Do one of the following e Choose File gt New gt Web Journal e Choose New Empty Web Journal from the Add to Library pop up menu in the Projects panel A new untitled web journal album appears in the Projects panel 2 Rename the album 3 Drag the images you want into the new web journal album To make changes to the webpages you use the controls in the Webpage Editor For more information see Web Journal Controls in the Webpage Editor next Web Journal Controls in the Webpage Editor The following controls are available for web journal pages and images
113. to change the image s size Changing the Number of Columns of Text You can change a text box so that it s formatted to hold from one to four columns of text To change the number of text columns in a text box Click the Edit Layout button if it s not already selected Select the text box Choose Text Box Columns from the Book Action pop up menu then choose the number of columns you want from the submenu If necessary resize the text box to better accommodate the changed column layout of the box Removing Text Boxes from a Page After creating a page and applying a master page design you may want to remove one or more text boxes from the page You can choose a different master page design that has fewer text boxes or you can manually select and remove text boxes To remove text or metadata boxes from a page Click the Edit Layout button Select the text or metadata box you want to remove then choose Edit gt Cut or press Delete Part Ill Distribution and Backup Working with Master Pages Master pages supply the initial design of your pages As you create pages you apply master page designs repeatedly throughout a book If you plan to make reusable book albums you can customize the page designs of a selected theme before creating your books You can select a master page and modify it changing the photo text and metadata boxes that appear on the page You can also create new master pages to suit specific layout n
114. to clients or viewers Using one or two large screen displays you can set Aperture to present slideshow images ina variety of ways For example you can present images as a sequence of single images or as multiple images in columns and rows on your screen You can also customize your slideshow by setting the display interval choosing accompanying music using transitional fades changing the background and more You can control the slideshow using the arrow keys on your keyboard or have images appear automatically To create a slideshow you select the images you want to show and choose File gt Slideshow For more information about creating slideshows see Chapter 16 Creating Slideshow Presentations on page 311 Chapter 1 An Overview of Aperture 33 34 Reviewing Images in the Aperture Light Table You can use the Aperture Light Table to freely arrange and organize a group of images visually to see how various combinations of images work together Or you can arrange a combination of images and print them in specific geometric arrangements When viewing a selection of images in the Light Table you can freely drag the images into any position or arrangement you want and resize them to determine how they might look grouped on a page neea Aperture Sede ae ee ao Rae 4 be 6 66 OB ala For more information about using the Light Table see Chapter 17 Using the Light Table on page 323 Pu
115. to organize images by gathering versions based on search criteria See also album soft lighting See diffused lighting source image file See master file source profile The profile of an image file before it undergoes color conversion spectrophotometer An instrument that measures the wavelength of color across an entire spectrum of colors As it can be used to profile both displays and printers the spectrophotometer is preferred for device profiling spot metering A type of metering that operates by metering within a small target that is usually in the center of the frame See also center weighted metering evaluative metering light meter Glossary 449 450 sRGB A common working space designed to represent the average PC monitor Because of its small gamut it is suitable for web graphics but not for print production See also working space stack In Aperture a set of similar images where only one image is intended for use See also alternate pick stopping down The process of changing the aperture or f stop to a smaller opening See also aperture f stop subtractive color Images with color elements derived from the light reflected off the surface of an object CMYK is a common form of subtractive color See also CMYK SWOP Short for Specifications for Web Offset Publications a standard printing press profile Web here refers to a web press not to the Internet tabs In Aperture elements that delineate projects folder
116. up menu The Slideshow Presets dialog appears Do one of the following e Select a slideshow preset to modify Create a new slideshow preset In the Slideshow Presets dialog select the Play slideshow on main display only checkbox Select this checkbox Click OK The Run Slideshow dialog appears Click Start to begin playing the slideshow presentation Part III Distribution and Backup Displaying Your Images to Music Adding music to your slideshow can increase your audience s enthusiasm and participation You can easily add music from your iTunes music library to accompany your slideshow To add music to your slideshow presentation Select a set of images to be displayed in your slideshow Choose File gt Slideshow or press Shift S The Run Slideshow dialog appears Choose Edit from the Slideshow Preset pop up menu The Slideshow Presets dialog appears Do one of the following e Select a slideshow preset to modify Create a new slideshow preset In the Slideshow Presets dialog select the Play music during slideshow checkbox 6 Select a song or playlist from your iTunes music library You can search for a specific song artist or song time by entering it in the search field Chapter 16 Creating Slideshow Presentations 321 322 10 If you want to preview your song choice click the Play button If you want the image display time to be adjusted so that your slideshow is the same
117. web gallery or web journal album Aperture displays the stack pick If you drag a stacked image that is not the stack pick into the book or web gallery or web journal aloum Aperture reminds you to select the stack pick If you don t want to place the pick in the album but want to use a different version from within the stack select the version you want and then make it the album pick by choosing Stacks gt Set Album Pick Chapter 8 Stacking Images and Making Picks 181 182 Designating an Album Pick for a Stack The same stack may appear in several albums Depending on the purpose of the album you may want a different pick image for each album For example a stack in a web gallery album may have one pick image and the same stack in a book album may have a different pick image adjusted for printing You can designate a specific image in a stack to be an album pick the pick for the stack within a specific album Each album can have a different album pick for the stack An album pick appears with the Album Pick badge E Album Pick badge To select an album pick for a stack that appears in multiple albums Select an image in the stack then choose Stacks gt Set Album Pick or press Command Shift Backslash Arranging Images in a Stack It can sometimes be difficult to decide which image in the stack should be the pick In many cases images are so similar that more than one of them merit the pick position For this reason
118. within a project See also folder Library project version alternate The image immediately next to the pick in a stack Alternate images are useful when more than one image in a stack merit the pick position See also pick stack ambient light The lighting characteristics that already exist in the scene indoor or outdoor without any additional light supplied by the photographer analog to digital conversion The process of transforming light energy voltage values captured by the camera s digital image sensor into binary digital numbers for processing and storage See also digitization quantization angle of view The area of the scene displayed within the frame Determined by the focal length of the lens aperture An adjustable iris or diaphragm in the lens through which light passes Measured in f stops See also f stop aperture priority A setting on certain cameras that automatically sets the shutter speed for a correct exposure based on the aperture setting provided by the photographer See also exposure shutter priority archive The process of storing image data on a permanent medium such as optical media CD or DVD 433 434 aspect ratio The ratio of height to width of the photograph Common North American aspect ratios are 3 5 x 5 4 x 6 5 x 7 11 x 14 and 16 x 20 inches auto focus The system within the camera that automatically focuses the lens on a specific portion of the subject or scene automatic brac
119. your images as they re imported choose a metadata preset from the Add Metadata From pop up menu For more information about setting up and using metadata presets see Working with Metadata Views on page 235 9 When you are satisfied with your image selection click the Import arrow or the Import button in the lower right corner of the dialog As the images appear in the Browser you can begin working with them Note If the folder contains subfolders of images and you want those imported too choose File gt Import gt Folders as Projects as described in Importing Folders of Images from the Finder on page 111 Chapter 4 Importing Images 99 100 Changing the Location of Images When You Import Them When you import images stored on a hard disk you can copy or move those images to a new location You specify a new location for the moved or copied files by choosing a destination folder from the Store Files pop up menu in the Import dialog Image Information File Name No selection Adjusted File Name No Selection File Date No select Type Size No Dimensions o Store Files Choose a folder aie ae 7 Bo destination for the files Subolders No folder you are moving or ir copying using this mee ee gt pop up menu Name Text Apply to Master filenames You specify filenames used within Aperture by choosing a name format from the Version Name pop up menu You can also have Aperture change
120. your personal information into the sample path http homepage mac com membername sitename About Updating Web Galleries and Web Journals When you update the images in a web gallery or web journal already posted to Mac Aperture first checks to determine which images in a web gallery or web journal are new or changed and then exports only those images to temporary storage for transfer to Mac saving time when updating large web galleries or web journals Exporting Webpages as HTML Files Integrating your Aperture webpages into your business s website requires you to thoroughly understand your website structure and web server With some planning you can modify your home or access pages to provide links to your Aperture webpages You can also open your webpages in a standard HTML editor and make the changes required for them to work in your site You can add and revise the HTML code that creates the page structure You can plan how the pages link to the structure of your website and provide additional items such as navigation buttons or links that normally appear on your webpages If you use a web design service to create and maintain your site you can supply your Aperture files to your service as a folder and allow them to integrate your Aperture webpages If you are your own webmaster you can transfer your Aperture web files to your web server or Internet service provider using a copying method such as FTP or using the transfer features of
121. 06 limits in IPTC data 201 limits in metadata 242 Charged Coupled Devices CCDs 435 455 456 CIE Commission Internationale de I Eclairage 425 437 CIE color spaces 425 cities city based web journal pages 347 metadata character limits 242 names in metadata 229 Clear Compare Item command 150 Close All Stacks button 109 170 close button 63 206 252 close ups 435 closing projects 80 141 stacks 109 170 176 181 CMM color matching method 436 CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor 437 CMS color management systems 436 CMYK color space 425 435 color channels 436 color corrections 324 color depth 436 color display proofing profiles 156 color gamut See gamut colorimeters 436 colorimetry 436 color interpolation 436 color management calibration 278 421 428 camera profiles 427 color spaces 156 425 ColorSync utility 425 device profiles 426 gamut 154 424 overview 423 printer calibration 430 color management systems CMS 436 color matching methods 426 436 color of book covers 380 color spaces 156 425 427 ColorSync 426 436 ColorSync Profile pop up menu 280 307 352 ColorSync profiles 280 292 302 ColorSync Utility camera profiles 427 color spaces in 425 defined 436 overview 425 columns of images in slideshows 316 319 in metadata display 230 in text boxes 392 in web galleries 338 in web journals 341 in webpages 343 Columns slider 316 319 Index Columns value slider 57 58 338 341
122. 1 002 003 e Current Date Current Time e Current Year e Current Month e Current Day Folder Name e Project Name You can specify a combination of name elements to create the custom folder names you want You can also create a hierarchy of folders within folders For example you can specify that Aperture place your images in a subfolder named Date and within that folder you can create subfolders identified by the time the image was taken To create the folder name format you drag the elements you want into the Format field and drag the forward slash element between the elements where a subfolder should be created Part Ill Distribution and Backup To create a folder name format 1 In the Export dialog choose Edit from the Subfolder Format pop up menu The Folder Naming Presets dialog appears Untitled Date Name Year Month Day Month Day CIE Folder Naming Presets Example Name 2006 01 01 Format Version Name Image Date Customize the format by dragging elements below into the text above You can also edit the text above to add or remove characters such as spaces Note Including forward slashes in the format will cause folders to be created image Year CustomName Current Month Cimage Month C Counter Current Day CmageBay Cr Custom Name O incrementing counter starting at 1 of digits Asto 3 Gest C
123. 147 151 171 low resolution images 278 luminance 444 LZW compression 444 M Mac accounts exporting webpages to 335 348 linking webpages to homepages 349 publishing to 339 341 Mac OS display configuration 419 421 macro lenses 444 magnifying full resolution view 155 images on webpages 342 images with Loupe 147 151 images with Zoom Viewer 167 view in Light Table 330 view of pages 368 371 Mail pop up menu 305 maintaining previews for all projects 161 main window 40 managed image files location 115 managed images 72 76 Manual slideshow preset 312 314 master digital files See digital master files Master File Name format 105 master page layouts 359 367 369 master pages adding pages based on 377 copying 394 creating 394 displaying 394 editing 394 left hand and right hand 395 overview 393 saving 395 selecting 381 themes 369 unifying and splitting 395 updating 395 updating book pages with changes 396 master pixel size 140 262 263 matching colors 426 matching search criteria 252 256 Match pop up menu 252 256 mathematical operators 106 Maximize Browser workspace layout 64 Maximize Viewer workspace layout 64 megapixels 444 memory cards 444 memory for processing 415 metadata adding during import 108 applying to multiple images 241 badges 243 in book indexes 379 on book pages 367 389 boxes See metadata boxes Browser display 230 categorizing web journal pages with 347 character limits 242 customized fields 23
124. 173 174 174 175 175 177 180 186 Dragging Images into Different Projects and Albums Working with Referenced Images Working with Two Projects Open Displaying Specific Metadata with Your Images Displaying Images in the Viewer An Overview of the Viewer Showing or Hiding the Viewer Changing the Viewer Background Changing the Number of Images in the Viewer Comparing Images Viewing Stacks Viewing Images with the Loupe Using the Color Meter Showing Hot Areas in Your Images Viewing Images at Full Resolution Viewing Master Images Setting Up the Viewer for Onscreen Proofing Viewing Images on Multiple Displays Displaying Metadata Associated with Images Selecting Image Preview Options Quickly Accessing Commands Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode An Overview of Full Screen Mode Entering and Exiting Full Screen Mode Working with the Filmstrip in Full Screen Mode Working with the Toolbar in Full Screen Mode Using HUDs in Full Screen Mode Changing the Display of Metadata in Full Screen Mode Using Keyboard Shortcuts in Full Screen Mode Quickly Accessing Commands Stacking Images and Making Picks An Overview of Stacking Images Creating Stacks Working with Stacks Keyboard Shortcuts for Working with Stacks Contents Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 187 188 190 192 194 195 197 199 200 202 206 213 218 222 223 223 224 225 226 228 231 232 235 238 241 242 243 247 248
125. 2000 PNG e PSD RAW files from a variety of supported digital cameras TIFF Note For a list of supported digital cameras go to http www apple com aperture For more information about importing images see Chapter 4 Importing Images on page 87 Photo Editing with Aperture Aperture allows you to easily view and work with your images onscreen It provides easy to use tools and controls as well as efficient methods for rating images searching for images and comparing and adjusting them Viewing and Working with Images in the Browser and Viewer To work with your images you select a project in the Projects panel and Aperture displays that project s images in the Browser You use the Browser to review organize and select images Part Interface and Acquisition When you select a thumbnail image in the Browser the image appears in the Viewer The Viewer displays the selected image Select images here A selected image appears with a white outline The Browser can show your images as thumbnails arranged in a grid You can click an individual image to select it and a white border appears around the image To quickly move to and select other images press the arrow keys You can drag images to rearrange them in the Browser or drag them into different projects or albums You can also display your images as a list of files Chapter 1 An Overview of Aperture 21 You can also view y
126. 3 Grouping Images with Smart Albums on page 267 New Album With Current Images Click this button to create a new album containing images that match the current search criteria Query HUD Action pop up menu Create a new Light Table book web gallery Smart Web Gallery or web journal album containing images that match the current search criteria Part Il Photo Editing Searching Across the Entire Library At times you may want to search for images that reside in many different projects For example you might want to locate all your select photos for an entire year or for a particular month To search across the Library you click the Query HUD button beside the Library name Nee Aperture SiO am d f All Projects v j a Smart Settings Library Click the Query HUD gt i Library Match Bay of the following Qr Quick Search button next to the E Sonoma County Fair Rating is greater than or equal to x a r v Vietnam Library name to search E New Vietnam across the entire Library g stack grouping New Smart Album New Album With Current images To search for images across the entire Library 1 Select Library in the Projects panel 2 Click the Query HUD button beside the Library name 3 When the Query HUD appears enter or select the search criteria you want The results of your search appear in the Browser Tip You can further refine the results of the Library search by clicking the Qu
127. 343 Commission Internationale de l Eclairage CIE 425 437 compare items 123 150 195 comparing images Light Table review 34 to originals 156 overview 27 rating process and 195 selecting compare items 123 150 in stacks 178 in Viewer 146 complementary metal oxide semiconductor CMOS 437 compositing 437 composition 437 compression defined 437 exporting compressed images 305 image quality 307 printing and 278 web exports 352 cones 437 connecting multiple displays 418 contact sheets 279 282 437 continuing slideshows after pauses 315 continuous play slideshows looping 316 contrast 437 control bar 43 copies to print 279 Copy Content command 386 copying book albums 396 digital master files 293 duplicating images 134 duplicating versions 169 image adjustments 170 images from projects or albums 134 images from Smart Albums 272 keywords 218 220 Library 407 page designs 381 394 photo box contents 386 pixels 170 print presets 285 copyright data on webpages 345 metadata 50 89 228 metadata character limits 242 watermarks 303 counters in filenames 104 105 108 295 countries metadata character limits 242 names in metadata 229 cover buttons 56 covers for books 368 380 created date metadata 242 Create Index command 379 Create new versions when making adjustments checkbox 68 creation dates 257 credits in metadata 228 242 crop marks 281 cropping images 170 384 437 Crop tool 47 170 Crop tool HUD 62 Cros
128. 5 backing up and 114 from cameras or card readers 91 96 defined 443 dragging files into projects 110 file formats 89 finding images imported during same session 261 folders of images 111 import buttons 46 import groups 236 237 Import Panel button 52 from iPhoto Libraries 112 large numbers of images 111 locations of imported images 115 metadata and 108 options 19 organizing imports 90 overview 88 selected images 95 into stacks 109 177 stored on computers 97 time stamps 110 transferring projects 114 trial imports 90 importing keyword lists 224 importing projects from other computers 114 408 Import panel displaying 65 functions 52 hiding 65 Index opening 16 92 Import Panel button 46 Include Metadata checkbox 307 352 Increase Diameter command 152 Increase Rating button 44 167 190 increasing ratings 44 167 190 196 incremental versions 131 indexes in books 367 378 ink types 430 inkjet printers 443 inserting pages 375 376 377 378 Inspectors displaying 65 displaying adjustments 49 displaying metadata 51 hiding 65 overview 24 Inspectors button 49 51 instructions in metadata 229 242 interface elements 39 40 International Press Telecommunications Council data See IPTC metadata iPhoto disabling for cameras or cards 92 importing images from 20 90 importing Library 112 IPTC button 236 IPTC metadata adding during import 108 adding fields to metadata sets 236 assigning keywords 29 character length 201 cha
129. 6 Match aay of the following Rating is greater than or equal to Calendar Query HUD Action or more of the following pop up menu New Smart Album New Album With Current Images All images that match the search criteria are placed in the new album you created Chapter 12 Searching for and Displaying Images 265 Grouping Images 1 with Smart Albums When you need to group certain types of images either temporarily or permanently you can use a Smart Album to gather the images This chapter provides instructions for using the Aperture Smart Album feature You can create a Smart Album and specify search criteria that identify the images you want and Aperture will automatically search for and display them in the new album Whenever an image meets the search criteria later it s automatically added to the Smart Album This chapter covers e An Overview of Smart Albums p 268 e Collecting Images in a New Smart Album p 270 e Searching Within a Smart Album p 271 e Revising the Contents of a Smart Album p 272 Transferring Smart Album Images to Another Project or Album p 272 e Deleting a Smart Album p 273 267 268 Disclosure triangle A Library Smart Album An Overview of Smart Albums Unlike a standard project into which you import images a Smart Album s contents are controlled by the criteria you specify in the Smart Album s Query HUD When you change a Smart Album s
130. 6 377 378 381 394 Duplicate Version button 47 131 169 duplicating See copying Duration slider 316 dust and scratch removal 439 DVI ports 418 dye sublimation 440 E Edit Button Sets window 216 Edit Content button 55 362 366 388 Edit Current Set command 236 editing badge overlays on images 243 book page layouts 362 changing files outside of Aperture 115 contents of Smart Albums 272 export presets 309 images 20 26 440 master pages 394 metadata 232 241 metadata sets 236 photo layout in books 385 print presets 285 slideshow presets 318 web export presets 353 webpage themes 342 Edit Layout button 55 362 366 385 389 Edit Link button 349 effects 440 Eject button 406 ejecting cards from readers 94 hard disks 406 electromagnetic radiation 440 Email button 46 Email Export Preset pop up menu 67 305 Email images using pop up menu 67 emailing images 305 embedded profiles 440 empty projects 93 95 emulsion 440 erasing cards in readers 94 evaluative metering 440 evenly distributing images in Light Table 329 event based organization 79 Exchangeable Image File data See EXIF Exchangeable Image File metadata EXIF Exchangeable Image File metadata adding fields to metadata sets 236 date information 256 defined 440 displaying 50 142 158 exporting 292 fields in 228 finding images with 260 EXIF button 236 Exit Full Screen button 167 Export button 63 Export dialog 293 Exported Master Name Format pop up menu 293 E
131. 6 dates in 257 defined 445 deleting categories 236 descriptions of fields 242 displaying 50 142 158 228 232 361 367 editing 232 EXIF metadata 229 exporting 292 304 352 export presets 307 in filenames 89 finding images with 259 260 formatting text in books 391 Full Screen mode display 173 hiding 143 231 image tooltips 231 Inspector See Metadata Inspector IPTC metadata 29 201 keyboard shortcuts for copying 220 keywords in 200 labels for 230 Light Table display 331 overview 226 positioning display 228 preset displays 158 Query HUD and 250 searchable data fields 140 262 263 sets of See metadata sets switching sets 231 Viewer display 230 in web galleries 338 in web journals 340 webpage display 344 Metadata Action pop up menu 51 227 235 238 metadata boxes deleting 392 linking to images 390 moving 392 on book pages 389 metadata buttons 55 Metadata display buttons 51 Metadata Format pop up menu 55 367 379 Index Metadata Inspector applying keywords with 222 displaying metadata in 232 editing metadata in 232 functions and controls 50 illustrated 24 keyword display 204 metadata sets in 227 opening 204 227 Metadata pop up menu 51 233 280 metadata preset 108 metadata sets adding categories 236 applying to multiple images 241 badge display and 244 creating 235 238 customized fields 236 deleting categories 236 displaying 233 editing 236 fields and character limits 242 in Metadata Inspector 227 overv
132. 71 Actual Time Zone pop up menu 110 adapters graphics cards 418 ADC ports 418 Add Adjustments pop up menu 49 61 Add Filter pop up menu 252 254 257 258 264 Add gaps between Sort Groups checkbox 68 additive color 433 Add Keyword button 63 207 210 Add Keyword field 45 214 Add Metadata Box button 55 363 367 389 Add New Page command 375 Add Page button 58 340 347 Add Pages pop up menu 54 367 Add Photo Box button 55 363 367 383 Add Subordinate Keyword button 63 207 211 Add Text Box button 55 58 341 346 363 367 389 Add to Favorites command 82 Add to Library pop up menu 41 79 Add Vault dialog 404 adjusting Light Table view 330 Adjustment Actions pop up menu 49 61 adjustments See image adjustments Adjustments HUD controls 32 functions and controls 61 opening 172 Adjustments HUD button 171 Adjustments Inspector 24 49 51 adjustment tool HUDs 173 adjustment tools 47 170 Adobe RGB color profile 433 Album Pick button 170 Index albums album picks 182 copying albums 396 copying images from 272 creating 252 defined 72 433 deleting albums 83 deleting images from 82 132 dragging images into 134 importing folders of images as 112 importing from iPhoto Libraries 113 Light Table albums See Light Table marking picks 170 moving images into 134 organizing projects with 79 planning books 364 saving for slideshows 314 saving search results as 265 searching for images 249 Smart Albums See Smart Albums stack
133. 81 toolbar 66 retouching images 170 448 return characters 106 revealing images in Light Table 329 reverse order in slideshows 315 RGB color space 425 448 right aligning images 384 right hand pages 395 RIPs raster image processors 447 rods 448 rolls from iPhoto Libraries 113 Rotate buttons 167 Rotate Clockwise command 130 Rotate Counterclockwise command 130 Rotate Left and Rotate Right buttons 44 130 167 Rotate Left and Rotate Right tools 47 130 170 rotating images in Browser 130 in filmstrip 167 tools 170 rotating workspaces 65 rows of images in slideshows 316 319 in web galleries 57 338 in webpages 343 Rows slider 316 319 Rows value slider 57 338 343 Run Slideshow dialog 312 314 S saturation 448 Save As button 279 Save as PDF button 281 283 Save button 279 saving books as PDFs 283 page designs as master pages 395 print presets 279 search results 265 slideshows 314 Scale to Fit All Items button 60 330 Scale to Fit button 56 368 371 Scale To pop up menu 280 screen displays See displays dual displays scroll bar 43 120 166 search criteria combining 140 262 263 264 filtering by 252 matching 252 multiple criteria 258 options 252 Smart Albums and 272 search field 63 120 127 166 206 252 searching 140 262 searching for images See finding images secondary Viewer 148 157 Select 82 Select button 44 167 190 Select Compare Item command 150 Select Destination command 409 selecting images a
134. 83 tips for quickly creating 180 toolbar buttons 169 unstacking 179 stamping 48 170 219 220 Stamp tool 48 170 219 Stamp tool HUD 62 star ratings 188 state names in metadata 229 242 stock ID numbers 140 262 263 stopping down 450 stopping slideshows 315 storage space 402 403 415 straightening images 47 170 Straighten tool 47 170 subfolder organization 100 subfolders 112 subject based organization 79 subordinate keywords 211 subtitles on pages 345 subtractive color 450 switching between projects 81 to Full Screen mode 165 metadata sets 228 231 232 themes 369 workspaces 64 65 SWOP 450 symbols in filenames 106 synchronizing vaults and backup files 78 system setup 414 419 T tab delimited keyword lists 224 tabs 450 target files 450 telephoto lenses 450 templates books 359 header styles 347 web journal templates 340 terms glossary of 433 451 text adding to books 362 adding to web journals 341 on book covers 380 in books 361 366 boxes See text boxes buttons 55 columns in 392 on contact sheets 280 deleting 347 formatting 367 391 keyword lists 224 lost after switching themes 369 moving on pages 392 searching for images by 253 on web gallery pages 345 on web journal pages 346 See also metadata Text Box Columns command 392 text boxes adding boxes to pages 367 389 Index adding text to 388 columns in 392 deleting 392 moving 392 text buttons 55 text files 224 Text Style pop up menu 55 367
135. 9 Keywords assigned to an image You can use the Query HUD to quickly locate images by their keywords and use Smart Albums to automatically group images that have specific keywords For example you can create a Smart Album at the Library level named Purchased which automatically groups all images with the keyword Purchased If you want to quickly review the images your clients bought over time all you have to do is open the Smart Album named Purchased You can also apply keywords to images based on your future intentions For example you could create a Smart Web Gallery Album that gathers images that have a For web keyword applied As you re reviewing your images apply the keyword For web to any image you think is worthy of being published on your website All images with the keyword For web are now collected in the Smart Web Gallery Album If you later change your mind about publishing an image on your website you can always remove the keyword As soon as you remove the keyword the image is removed from the Smart Web Gallery Album Part Il Photo Editing If you sell your images to image libraries you can export the keywords assigned to your images as IPTC data During export Aperture embeds your keywords individually in the image file as IPTC compliant keyword fields The more keywords you apply to your images the more likely it is that your images will be located by potential customers For more information see Chapter 15 Ex
136. All Stacks and Close All Stacks buttons If you want to divide a stack you can select an image within a stack and click the Split Stack button and a new stack appears holding your selected image and stacked images after it You can also unstack your images by clicking the Unstack All Stacks button If you are not satisfied with how the images are stacked drag the slider to the Off position You can also manually select and stack images in the Import dialog in the same way you can in the Browser For more information about stacking images see Chapter 8 Stacking Images and Making Picks on page 175 Chapter 4 Importing Images 109 110 N U A w N A 1 2 3 Adjusting the Image File s Time When Importing On a trip it s easy to forget to update your camera s clock to match the local time zone If you didn t synchronize your camera time to the new location Aperture makes it easy to correct the time assigned to the image file by whole hours when importing To adjust image file capture time when importing If necessary show the Import panel by clicking the Import Panel button in the toolbar Select your camera or card reader or navigate to a folder on your hard disk that holds images you want to import Select the images you want to import In the Import dialog select Adjust Time Zone Choose the time zone that matches the camera s time setting from the Camera Time Zone pop up menu Choose the time zone of
137. Aperture Apple Computer Inc 2006 Apple Computer Inc All rights reserved The owner or authorized user of a valid copy of Aperture software may reproduce this publication for the purpose of learning to use such software No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted for commercial purposes such as selling copies of this publication or for providing paid for support services Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors Because Apple frequently releases new versions and updates to its system software applications and Internet sites images shown in this book may be slightly different from what you see on your screen The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc registered in the U S and other countries Use of the keyboard Apple logo Option Shift K for commercial purposes without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws Apple the Apple logo Apple Cinema Display ColorSync FireWire iPhoto iTunes Mac Macintosh Mac OS and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc registered in the U S and other countries Aperture Finder and MacBook are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Mac is a service mark of Apple Computer Inc Adobe Adobe RGB Photoshop and PostScript are trademarks or
138. Aperture application If you move or accidentally change the files stored in the Aperture Library file Aperture may not be able to locate your project and images later Making a change to a managed file in the Finder such as renaming it creates changes that the application cannot track Chapter 4 Importing Images 115 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Part Il Photo Editing This section explains the Aperture features used for photo editing and working with your images Working with Images in the Browser Displaying Images in the Viewer Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode Stacking Images and Making Picks Rating Images Applying Keywords to Images Working with Metadata Searching for and Displaying Images Grouping Images with Smart Albums Working with Images in the Browser After a shoot you may need to sort through hundreds or even thousands of images in a project Aperture provides efficient methods for increasing your productivity when working with large numbers of images This chapter provides information about using the Browser to select and organize images in a project The Browser works together with the Viewer to provide the principal views of your images You can quickly search for an image in a project reorder and sort images rotate images to portrait or landscape orientation create new versions and delete images This chapter covers
139. Command Left Arrow or Command Right Arrow to slide the current selection over by one image For example you can move a three image selection left or right by one image at a time Select the next stack e With a stack selected press Option Page Up or Option Page Down Select or set a compare item e Select the image then press Return Deselect the compare item e Press Command Return Select a different compare item Select the image you want as a compare item then press Return Select all images in the Browser Choose Edit gt Select All or press Command A Select only the primary image Choose Edit gt Reduce Selection or press Shift E deselecting all others Deselect all images in Click the gray background of the Browser or Choose Edit gt the Browser Deselect All or press Command Shift A Deselect the current selection Choose Edit gt Invert Selection or press Command R and select all unselected images Chapter 5 Working with Images in the Browser 123 124 Working with a Selection of Images At times when you select a group of images you may want to apply a change to only the last image selected and not change all the other selected images Aperture provides a Primary Only button in the control bar that gives you the option of applying changes to the primary image in a group of selected images leaving the rest of the selected images unchanged The primary image in a selected group of ima
140. Current Year e Current Month e Current Day e Folder Name e Project Name You can also create a hierarchy of folders within folders For example you can specify that Aperture place your images in a subfolder named Date and within that folder you can create subfolders identified by the time the image was taken To create the folder name format you drag the elements you want into the Format field and drag the forward slash element between the elements where a subfolder should be created Chapter 4 Importing Images 103 104 1 ao uu A WwW To create a custom folder name preset In the Import dialog choose Edit from the Subfolders pop up menu is Folder Naming Presets Date Version Name Example Name 2006 01 02 Untitled Version Name Image Date Date Name Format Ceman Mame Date stomize the format by dragging elements below into the text Year Month Day above You can also edit the text above to add or remove characters Month Day such as spaces Note Including forward stashes in the format will cause folders to be created Include _VersionName _ ImageDate _ CurrentDate Master Filename Image Time _ Current Time seer Cex orem Year O Image Year Custom Name Current Month gt image Month Counter Current Day__ C imageDay FolderName __ProjectName_ D Custom Name incrementing counter starting at 1 of digits Auto
141. Displaying Your Images to Music Contents Chapter 17 Chapter 18 Chapter 19 323 324 325 326 327 328 330 331 331 332 332 333 334 336 339 341 342 345 346 348 351 357 358 363 365 366 369 370 372 374 379 383 388 393 396 397 Using the Light Table An Overview of the Light Table Creating a Light Table Album Placing and Viewing Images in the Light Table Moving and Resizing Images in the Light Table Aligning and Arranging Images in the Light Table Adjusting the Light Table View Setting View Options for the Light Table Transferring Images from the Light Table Printing a Light Table Arrangement Deleting a Light Table Album Creating Webpages An Overview of Creating Webpages Creating Web Galleries Creating Web Journals Viewing and Navigating Through Webpages Choosing and Modifying Themes Working with Web Gallery Pages Working with Web Journal Pages Exporting Webpages Working with Web Export Presets Creating Books An Overview of Creating Books Planning Your Book Creating a Book Album Controls in the Book Layout Editor Choosing a Theme Viewing Pages Placing Images in a Book Adding and Removing Pages Working with Pages Working with Images Working with Text Working with Master Pages Copying a Book Album Printing Books Contents Chapter 20 Part IV Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Glossary Index 399 400 401 402 404 405 406 406 407 407 409 413 414
142. EG Fit within 1024 x 1024 JPEG Fit within 640 x 640 TIFF Original Size 8 bit TIFF Original Size 16 bit TIFF 50 of Original Size TIFF Fit within 1024 x 1024 Original Size 50 of Original Size Fit within 1024 x 1024 Fit within 640 x 640 Original Size 16 bit PSD 50 of Original Size 16 bit Email Small JPEG Email Medium JPEG Email Original Size JPEG 32225 Export Presets Image Format JPEG p i include Metadata Image Quality q 10 size To orams 2 Dpt 72 Gamma Adjust G 100 Colorsyne Protte Black Point Compensation Show Watermark postion Got 7 The right side of the dialog shows the settings for the selected preset Opacity _g 09 ze The Export Presets dialog includes these controls C Image Format pop up menu Choose an image format for the exported files such as JPEG or TIFF Include Metadata checkbox Select this checkbox to include EXIF and IPTC metadata in the exported files Image Quality slider Choose how much to compress your files by dragging the slider Setting the slider to 12 applies the least compression and results in a higher quality image setting the slider to 0 zero applies the most compression and results in a lower quality image Size To pop up menu Export your images at their original size or specify image dimensions or a percentage of the image s original
143. Editor field 67 Extract Item command 183 F facing pages 368 Fade through Black slideshow preset 312 314 Fade Time slider 317 favorite projects 82 field computers 407 file formats 67 89 307 352 filenames assigning automatically 89 105 customized filenames 103 107 294 in metadata 228 459 460 in Metadata Inspector 50 renaming images 127 298 searching for images by 140 253 262 263 selecting for exported images 293 sorting by 129 times and dates in 85 files changing outside Aperture 115 naming 106 size in Metadata Inspector 50 file size backup storage space and 402 for emailed images 306 in metadata 228 searching for images by 140 262 263 sorting by 129 file status 140 262 fill in lighting 441 film 441 filmstrip 164 165 168 185 441 filtering search criteria 252 254 258 264 filters applying to book images 367 applying to images 387 defined 441 Finder 115 441 finding images in Browser 120 127 with combinations of criteria 140 262 263 264 by date 256 by EXIF data 260 in filmstrip 166 by import session 261 in Library 253 by IPTC data 259 by keywords 255 by names or text 253 in Query HUD 248 252 by ratings 258 refining search results 253 saving search results 265 search criteria See search criteria Smart Albums and 271 272 stacks and 176 finding keywords 206 209 finishing process 441 FireWire 408 415 441 Fit images within pop up menu 57 59 338 341 344 fitting images in web
144. Eh Drag photo boxes to different positions 36 pages large hardcover 11 x 8 47 Print tay took e To add text and images to your pages without changing the page layout click the Edit Content button You can then add images and text to the page but you can t move or resize the boxes on the page which helps prevent unintended formatting changes Edit Content button E You can also add photo text or metadata boxes to a page when you need them Text box added to page 362 Part III Distribution and Backup Click the Edit Layout button and then click the Add Text Box Add Metadata Box or Add Photo Box button to add a new box to the page When a box appears you can resize and reposition it Add Metadata Add Photo Box Box button button Add Text Box button l g gD ga E w The Book Layout Editor also allows you to create covers indexes and blank pages use automatic page numbers and create or modify master page designs When your book is complete you can purchase printed copies from the Apple print vendor for a fee Cover coer ma Quantity 0 2 Sie Oven youre testo ee Hardcover Book Feats dean ha oper Gite HZ ehen 215 em REO Pe Usea coupon sec sawo PI inte r tain yon ten Al tian wo Eonar clicking Set Up Account Shipping 0 00 Order Total Note Although you can create books larger than 99 pages there is
145. F Information You can search for and locate images using any EXIF information recorded by your camera for your images For example you might locate any images that were created with a certain camera or at a specific exposure To search for images by EXIF information you use the EXIF search options To search for images by EXIF information In the Projects panel select a project or an album you want to search Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following e Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser In the Query HUD choose EXIF from the Add Filter pop up menu Part Il Photo Editing Select the EXIF checkbox Select the Import Session checkbox Select the EXIF checkbox then choose an EXIF field you want to search by from the EXIF pop up menu x Match any of the following Rating Ts greater than or equal to oder Choose how you want to qualify your search from e this pop up menu Import Session is one or more of the following V exi Focal Length P T Gmm Enter an EXIF value here New Smart Album New Album With Current images F gt Choose an EXIF field to search by Choose an option from the middle pop up menu to qualify your search Enter the EXIF value you want to search by in the EXIF text field Choose any from the Match pop up menu if it s not already chosen The images that match the search criteria are imme
146. Hold down the Shift key while pressing the Up or Down Arrow key to select several keywords Shift click to select adjacent keywords or Command click to select nonadjacent keywords Drag the keywords in the Contents column into the order you want The first eight keywords will be assigned to the keyboard shortcut key combination of Option and a number key 1 through 8 on the keyboard To remove a keyword from the column select it and press Delete or click the Delete button below the column After arranging the keywords in order click OK The new keyword preset group appears in the Keyword Preset Group pop up menu If the keyword preset group has fewer than eight keywords the unassigned keys are inactive Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images 217 _ Applying Keywords Using the Lift amp Stamp HUD If you have images that should share the same keywords you can use the Lift and Stamp tools to quickly apply all or some of the keywords from one image to other images Using the Lift and Stamp tools is an efficient way to apply keywords to large numbers of images The Lift and Stamp tools can also apply adjustments made to images such as cropping straightening exposure changes and other adjustments For more information about using the Lift and Stamp tools to apply adjustments see Performing Image Adjustments in the Aperture Help menu The Lift and Stamp tools have a corresponding HUD you can use in the Browser Viewer a
147. Images p 292 Exporting Copies of Digital Master Files p 293 e Exporting Image Versions p 296 e Working with Export Presets p 306 291 292 An Overview of Exporting Images Using Aperture you can export copies of digital master files as well as versions that you ve created When you export versions you can export them in JPEG TIFF PNG and PSD file formats At export you can rename files resize and adjust images and include metadata such as EXIF information IPTC information and keywords You can also apply ColorSync profiles and watermarks to the versions you re exporting You can export separate lists of metadata for selected images as a file You can also export digital master files with IPTC data stored in XMP sidecar files that can be used in other applications such as Adobe Photoshop Before exporting your images to another application a printing service a client or a website you need to know what file types the receiver can use You should also check with the receiver about other important information including file size limitations required image dimensions and naming conventions The key to successful file transfer is anticipating and avoiding anything that can prevent the receiver from opening your files The easiest way to export images is to use one of the Aperture export presets Presets or groups of export settings allow you to easily export your images If the presets included with Apertu
148. Images 301 302 A WwW N N QA U To adjust images at export you create a new export preset in the Export Presets dialog and then adjust the Image Quality Gamma Adjust ColorSync Profile and Black Point Compensation settings as appropriate Export Preset Name JPEG 50 of Original Size JPEG Fit within 1024 x 1024 JPEG Fit within 640 x 640 TIFF Original Size 8 bit TIFF Original Size 16 bit TIFF 50 of Original Size TIFF Fit within 1024 x 1024 PNG Original Size PNG 50 of Original Size PNG Fit within 1024 x 1024 PNG Fit within 640 x 640 PSD Original Size 16 bit PSD 50 of Original Size 16 bit Email Small JPEG Email Medium JPEG Email Original Size JPEG oc Export Presets image romat IPE include Metadata Image Quality gq 10 Size To Original Size Dpt 72 Gamma Adjust i00 Colorsyne Protte Black Point Compensation C Show watermark Position Top Left g Opacity _g 0 0 Use these options to adjust images when they are exported Cars D Gamma adjustments applied at export are applied on top of gamma adjustments previously applied to image versions Before exporting verify that you are not doubling any gamma adjustments previously applied to your images When you export select the preset that includes the adjustments you want to make For information about c
149. Personal gt Photo specs Photojournalism Arts Conceptual Environment Feature Magazine Nature News Newspaper Personality Photo essay Portrait For more information about using the Keywords HUD see Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images on page 199 Adjustments HUD Use the Adjustments HUD to remove image flaws like red eye noise and dust adjust exposure levels and white balance and straighten and crop your images For more information about adjusting images see Performing Image Adjustments in the Aperture Help menu To show the Adjustments HUD Press H Exposure Part Il Photo Editing Tools HUDs Many of the adjustment tools work in conjunction with HUDs and you can use all of them in Full Screen mode To open any of the adjustment tool HUDs Show the Full Screen mode toolbar by moving your pointer to the top of the screen on your main display Select an adjustment tool in the toolbar If the tool you selected has a HUD that HUD appears For more information about using any of the adjustment tools and their HUDs see Performing Image Adjustments in the Aperture Help menu The Crop HUD appears when you select the Crop tool in the toolbar Changing the Display of Metadata in Full Screen Mode The metadata display settings you have chosen for the Viewer and Browser also apply to images displayed in Full Screen mode and in its filmstrip The settings for the Viewer control the display of
150. Red eye is caused by the close proximity of the flash to the lens especially built in flash In Aperture Red Eye is an adjustment that replaces red pixels with black eliminating the red eye effect See also external flash Reject In Aperture a negative rating applied to an image as part of the photo editing process See also photo edit rating Select Glossary 447 448 relative colorimetric A rendering intent suitable for photographic images It compares the highlight values of the source color space to that of the destination color space and shifts out of gamut colors to the closest reproducible color in the destination color space See also rendering intent rendering intent The method by which colors that are out of gamut for a selected output device are mapped to that device s reproducible gamut resolution The amount of information a digital image is capable of conveying Resolution is determined by the combination of file size number of pixels bit depth pixel depth and dpi dots per inch See also bit depth dots per inch dpi pixel retouching The process of altering an image to add or remove details See also burning compositing dodging effects filters RGB Short for Red Green Blue A color space commonly used on computers in which each color is described by the strength of its red green and blue components This color space directly translates to the red green and blue elements used in computer displays
151. Screen mode To set the Viewer to automatically open and compare the images in stacks do one of the following Choose View gt Main Viewer gt Stack or press Option T Choose Stack from the Viewer Mode pop up menu in the control bar For more information about using stacks see Chapter 8 Stacking Images and Making Picks on page 175 Viewing Images with the Loupe You can use the Loupe to examine parts of an image You position the small ring of the Loupe over the portion of the image you want to see and the large ring shows a magnified view It s useful for making quick checks for dust specks flaws fingerprints or other issues You can use the Loupe on any image or thumbnail in the Aperture Library e288 Aperture 2 MMe aw ee ow Moen bheo oe QO wa The Loupe shows a magnified view of whatever is beneath it TARA ojas For information about the latest enhancements to the Loupe see New Features in the Aperture Help menu Chapter 6 Displaying Images in the Viewer 151 To show the Loupe do one of the following Choose View gt Loupe or press the grave accent key Click the Loupe button in the toolbar To hide the Loupe do any of the above again You can also change the size of the Loupe and increase or decrease its magnification level To reduce the size of the Loupe Choose View gt Decrease Diameter or press Option Shift hyphen to decrease t
152. Site Theme button Gi meme ste Columns value slider Metadata Add Text Box View ee button Fit images within pop up menu el Jac a ia m Height value slider ST columns 3 gt Journal Pages panel Detail Images panel Journal 1 Page Vietnam Travel Journal Revisiting Vietnam Width value slider This shows how your images will appear on the web gallery page 0378 Vietnamese rivers wind through ancient lands and natural wonders It was with great pleasure that we were able to take part in an informal expedition into the heart of this country Previous Page button Detail Page 1 Add Page button _ Govier remem Next Page button Remove Page button Part Ill Publish to Mac button Export Web Pages pop up menu pop up menu button Site Theme button Click this button to choose a theme or layout for your webpage Journal Pages panel Click here to see a specific page of the web journal Detail Images panel Click here to see the enlarged version of a selected image in a web journal Add Page button Click this button to add a page to your web journal Remove Page button Click this button to remove a selected page from your web journal Page Template pop up menu Use this to choose a page template or layout Page Action pop up menu Choose how to add pages to your web journa
153. The RGB color space has a very large gamut meaning it can reproduce a wide range of colors This range is typically larger than printers can reproduce See also additive color rods A type of receptor in the eye capable of perceiving luminance Rods do not perceive color but only levels of brightness See also cones saturation The intensity of color in an image Saturated colors are perceived to have a ourer look resulting from the absence of the color gray See also adjustment desaturate Select In Aperture the highest rating that can be applied to an image as part of the photo editing process A Select rating is applied when you intend to display or distribute the image See also photo edit rating Reject selective focus The process of isolating a subject by using an f stop that produces a shallow depth of field See also depth of field shadows The darkest areas of a subject or scene See also contrast density highlights shortcut menu A menu you access by holding down the Control key and clicking an area of the interface or by pressing the right mouse button shutter A complicated mechanism usually consisting of a blade or a curtain that precisely controls the duration of time light passing through the lens remains in contact with the digital image sensor See also shutter speed shutter priority A setting on certain cameras that automatically sets the aperture for a correct exposure based on the shutter speed set by t
154. The range of colors an individual color device is capable of reproducing is known as its gamut Because of the differences in gamuts between devices such as a displays and printers these devices are incapable of exactly reproducing the same range of colors In fact two displays of the same model made by the same manufacturer have distinct gamuts Types of ink and paper stock can also affect a printer s gamut Likewise the age of a display and how frequently it s used can affect its gamut Displays and printers cannot reproduce the same colors consistently when their gamuts don t overlap For example displays are capable of showing brighter and more saturated colors than the colors produced by a printer The illustrations below show representations of the range of color and brightness values each device is capable of displaying If you superimpose the printer s gamut on the display s gamut some of the display s colors fall outside the range of the printer s gamut The printer is incapable of reproducing the full range of colors in the image displayed onscreen because of the printer s smaller gamut Color values that are contingent upon the ability of a device to reproduce color are known as device dependent Display s gamut Printer s gamut Part IV Appendixes and Glossary What Is a Color Space When compared to the full spectrum of light the gamut of a display or printer is relatively narrow Because of the small gamuts of the
155. Time Zone Camera s Time Zone US Pacific Actual Time Zone US Pacific Version Name Format Example File Name vietnam2004 0040 Add Metadata From Append O Replace 3 In the Batch Change dialog choose a metadata preset from the Add Metadata From pop up menu to select a preset template of metadata to be applied You can click the Append button to add the metadata to that already applied to the selected images or click the Replace button to add the metadata replacing any previously assigned metadata 4 Enter any metadata you want applied in the metadata fields 5 Specify any other metadata options you want to change then click OK Chapter 11 Working with Metadata 241 242 More Information About IPTC Metadata If you intend to export your keywords as IPTC metadata make sure each keyword entry is no more than 64 characters long Keyword entries longer than 64 characters may not be displayed properly in other IPTC editors or operating systems Here are some examples of common character limits for IPTC fields IPTC field and character limit Description and example Caption A long form description of the subject and related information in a 2000 characters natural language caption Example Mayor Alvarado addresses a crowd at the first soccer match of the season Keywords A list of words describing the subject in discrete words or phrases 64 characters Example Politician Mayor Futbol S
156. To rearrange the order of metadata views drag them to new locations in the Metadata Views list I Metadata views can be rearranged renamed duplicated and deleted below Metadata Views General Name Only Caption Only Name amp Ratings Name amp Caption Ratings Rating2 Caption amp Keywords Caption amp Credits File Info 4 Photo Info EXIF CA D CD You can also rename add or delete metadata views in this dialog To rename a metadata view Double click the metadata view name then type a new name in the field that appears To add a duplicate metadata view Select a metadata view then click the Add button To delete a metadata view Select a metadata view then click the Delete button Chapter 11 Working with Metadata 237 238 Working with Metadata Presets You can create your own preset combinations of metadata that you want applied to images You create a preset by first choosing a metadata view that displays the types of metadata you want to apply You can also create a custom view if you want You then add the metadata you want to apply to the view s metadata fields and save the information as a metadata preset Your metadata preset is then available to be chosen when you import images batch change images or modify an image s metadata in the Metadata Inspector Aperture also provides easy methods of managing your presets Creating Metadata Presets You can cr
157. To view images in the Light Table you first create a Light Table aloum You can create a new empty album and drag or import images into it or select images in a project and create a Light Table album to hold them To create a new empty Light Table album In the Projects panel select Library or the project where you want the new Light Table album to appear Do one of the following Choose File gt New gt Light Table e Control click in the Projects panel then choose New gt Light Table from the shortcut menu Choose New Empty Light Table from the Add to Library pop up menu in the Projects panel A new untitled Light Table album appears Enter a new name for the Light Table album Now you can drag or import images into the new Light Table album To create a Light Table album that holds a selection of images In the Browser select the images you want in the Light Table album Do one of the following Choose File gt New From Selection gt Light Table e Control click in the Projects panel then choose New From Selection gt Light Table from the shortcut menu e Click the New Light Table Album button g Ez ia is ied Ez l Click this button to create a new Light Table album e In the Projects panel choose New Light Table From Selection from the Add to Library pop up menu Anew untitled Light Table album appears with the selected images in it Enter a new name for the Light Table album You can now be
158. You can modify existing print presets create new print presets and delete print presets you no longer use When changing your print presets remember that modifying an existing preset deletes its original settings creating a new preset on the other hand does not delete any existing settings Before you print your images you can proof them onscreen using the onscreen proofing feature Printing Tips Here are a few suggestions to help you with the printing process e Use the highest resolution image possible It s preferable to work with images imported directly from your camera However even images imported directly from your camera or card reader can be low resolution low quality images This is why it s important to shoot with the highest resolution settings available on your camera Compression settings applied during image capture may be apparent when you print Consider shooting RAW files if the setting is available and shoot at the highest bit depth possible If you ve imported an image that was reduced or compressed in another application Aperture cannot increase the resolution of the file In other words Aperture cannot replace image information that was previously removed during the compression process If possible locate the original full resolution image file use the Lift and Stamp tools to apply the adjustments you ve made to the low resolution file and print the higher resolution image file e Color calibrate your Aper
159. You can select master pages in the Master Pages panel to display and work on them You can drag the border between the Master Pages panel and the Pages panel to resize the panel display To hide master pages Choose Hide Master Pages from the Book Action pop up menu Creating and Modifying Master Pages You can create new master pages or you can duplicate existing master pages and modify them For example if you decide to customize a two photo layout from an original master page design you can save the customized version and have multiple two photo layouts that you can choose Once you create a new master page the master page name appears in the Set Master Page pop up menu where you can choose it to apply the design to pages in your book To create a new master page design Choose Show Master Pages from the Book Action pop up menu Click a master page in the Master Pages panel Choose Add New Page from the Add Pages pop up menu Rename the page if you wish Select the new master page and make your changes To duplicate and modify a master page design Choose Show Master Pages from the Book Action pop up menu Select the master page you want to duplicate in the Master Pages panel Choose Duplicate Page from the Add Pages pop up menu Rename the page if you wish Select the new master page and make your changes You can also change the design of a page in your book and save the changes to create a new master page Part Ill Distribu
160. You might also order the images by date or time You choose the grid view sort property from the Sorting pop up menu Choose the sort property you want here a To change the displayed order of images in the Browser Choose a sort property from the Sorting pop up menu Chapter 5 Working with Images in the Browser 129 130 Rotating Images When images are imported into a project some may appear in an incorrect orientation requiring you to rotate them right side up The control bar provides rotate buttons for rotating selected images and the toolbar contains rotate tools You can rotate images individually or select a group and rotate them all at once You can also conveniently select images and quickly rotate them using keyboard shortcuts To rotate images counterclockwise do one of the following Select an image or group of images then choose Images gt Rotate Counterclockwise or press the left bracket key Select an image or group of images then click the Rotate Left button in the control bar Rotate Left button wy w Rotate Right button Select the Rotate Left tool in the toolbar then click an image Rotate Left tool DEEE EE Rotate Right tool To rotate images clockwise do one of the following Select an image or group of images then choose Images gt Rotate Clockwise or press the right bracket key Select an image or group of images then click the Rotate Right button in the contr
161. Z Profile SRGB Profile cd yComputer Black amp White Blue Tone gt Displays Gray Tone Lightness Decrease Lightness Increase gt Xerox Sepia Tone Web Safe Colors VGA Display Calibrated gt Other Once your display and printer have up to date custom profiles you can begin to make accurate color adjustments to your digital images in Aperture Aperture uses the ColorSync CMM or color matching method to translate and transfer the color data from your camera to your display and then to your printer Although the gamuts of the devices are very different ColorSync knows the exact parameters of their gamuts because of their custom profiles The ColorSync CMM allows you to preview how the color in an image changes when you make color adjustments in Aperture As long as you have current profiles of your display and printer the printed image will closely match the image on the screen Part IV Appendixes and Glossary Calibrating Your Camera Creating an accurate profile for your digital camera is not easy Unless you re using your camera in a strictly controlled lighting situation such as a studio the variable lighting conditions from one scene to another make profiling a digital camera difficult This leaves you with three options shoot RAW files painstakingly profile the camera with the best profiling package you can afford or use a generic profile such as sRGB Shooting RAW Files Requires No Camera Profile Whether you n
162. a 99 page limit for books ordered through the Apple print vendor When you try to order the book a dialog warns you that there are too many pages If you plan to print a book using the Apple print vendor make sure to keep the number of pages at or below the 99 page limit If you prefer to print your books yourself you can print your book using your own office printer or export your book as a PDF file that you can send to a print shop for printing Planning Your Book The amount of planning and work involved in creating a book varies with the type of project If you re creating wedding photo albums you may be primarily concerned with creating a reusable book design into which you can quickly place images that tell the wedding story The end result may be one or several printed copies per project Chapter 19 Creating Books 363 364 N QO wu A 10 12 13 14 On the other hand producing a large book such as a coffee table book may require a good deal of planning writing design page composition proofing and production work In addition you ll want to look ahead and decide how the manuscript should be printed and bound the number of copies for the print run and what copyright and permissions information your book should include For relatively simple books here are some of the typical steps in the publishing process Gather your initial selection of images in the Light Table and arrange them to tell the story you want Rough
163. accurate color from image acquisition to image manipulation and display to publishing ColorSync is used consistently by all devices and applications in your workflow Appendix B_ Calibrating Your Aperture System 425 426 WUser A custom device profile What Is a Device Profile ColorSync and other color management systems use device profiles to identify and transfer color data from one device dependent color space such as a camera to another device dependent color space such as a printer Device profiles contain data about the unique color characteristics of a device A device s profile includes information about its gamut color space colorants and modes of operation Many types of hardware and software have generic ICC profiles available in ColorSync Utility You can also use ColorSync Utility and a color measurement device such as a spectrophotometer to accurately create your own custom device profile When you profile a color device an ICC profile is created and placed in Users username Library ColorSync Profiles 00e Profiles Profile First Aid Profiles Devices Filters Calculator Installed ColorSync profiles Profile Information Profile Tl Name 2_Monitor_1 01 06_1 F Path Library ColorSync Profiles 2_Monitor_1 01 06_1 icc Wsystem Adobe RGB 1998 Class Display Generic CMYK Profile Space RGB Generic Gray Profile PCS XYZ Generic Lab Profile or ee a reate Generic RGB Profile Bees bas eae Generic XY
164. adata such as applied adjustments rating and keywords appear in the Lift amp Stamp HUD Deselect the metadata checkboxes except for Keywords 5 Click the Stamp Selected Images button In many cases you do not want to copy all keywords from one image and paste them onto another For this reason you can select specific keywords that apply to the image you want to stamp them on Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images 219 220 Click the disclosure triangle to reveal all keywords applied to the selected image To stamp a reduced selection of keywords on an image or group of images Select the Lift tool or press O The Lift amp Stamp HUD appears Select an image In the Lift amp Stamp HUD deselect all image information checkboxes except for Keywords Click the Keywords disclosure triangle to reveal the keywords from the selected image Day Girl Holiday Nature Outdoor Personal Portrait Vacation Woman Stamp Selected Images Remove any keywords you don t want to stamp on an image or group of images by selecting each unwanted keyword in the list and pressing the Delete key Select the keywords you don t want to stamp then press Delete Stamp Selected Images Use the Stamp tool to select an image or group of images to which to apply the keywords The reduced selection of keywords is applied to the selected image or group of images You can quickly lift and stamp the keywords and all other met
165. adata and adjustments from one image to another using keyboard shortcuts Part Il Photo Editing Deselect the RAW Fine Tuning checkbox To quickly lift and stamp image metadata Select an image then press Command Shift C to lift the metadata from the image Select an image or group of images then press Command Shift V to stamp the metadata on the selected images You can also lift RAW Fine Tuning parameter values from one RAW image and stamp them on another RAW Fine Tuning adjustments are included in lift and stamp operations by default If you don t want to lift and stamp RAW Fine Tuning adjustments you must deselect them in the Lift amp Stamp HUD To exclude RAW Fine Tuning adjustments from lift and stamp operations In the toolbar select the Lift tool or press O The pointer changes from the Selection tool to the Lift tool Click the RAW image that has the adjustments metadata or keywords you want to copy The Lift amp Stamp HUD appears showing the RAW Fine Tuning parameter values adjustments IPTC metadata and keywords applied to the image Deselect the RAW Fine Tuning checkbox to prevent Aperture from copying the RAW Fine Tuning parameter values from one image to another Lift amp Stamp kem Details Adjustments 1 adjustment IPTC 6 items Keywords Architecture Stock categorie Custom litem Stamp Selected Images In the toolbar select the Selection tool then do one of the following e Drag a
166. age When the image file is imported into Aperture ColorSync manages the color in the image according to the generic color space and accurately displays it on the screen Note Digital cameras that don t have the ability to change generic profiles shoot in the sRGB color space You cannot create a custom profile for these cameras Appendix B_ Calibrating Your Aperture System 427 428 Calibrating and Profiling Your Display To color calibrate your display you must use a third party color management system Calibrating and profiling your display with a color management system is fairly easy Today color management systems do most of the work for you Color calibration systems often come with an optical device that you place over the screen to read the display s output To calibrate and profile your display Install the software that came with your color management system Open the color calibration software application Attach the optical device to your display and follow the instructions that came with your color management system Apple Cinema Display Color calibration device When the application has finished calibrating your display it asks you to save the custom ICC profile created during the calibration process This profile is saved at Users username Library ColorSync Profiles Now your display is calibrated If you have a second display you can calibrate it as well Part IV Appendixes and Glossary T
167. age 163 Metadata Inspector The Metadata Inspector displays an image s caption text keywords version number filename and file size You can also view EXIF Exchangeable Image File and IPTC International Press Telecommunications Council data associated with your image EXIF metadata is embedded with an image file by the digital camera and includes camera settings such as shutter speed date and time focal length exposure metering pattern and flash information IPTC information can be embedded in a digital image with most software programs used to edit photos and can include a caption the place and date a photo was taken and copyright information To show the Metadata Inspector do one of the following Choose Window gt Show Inspectors or press I to open the Inspectors panel Double click an image in the Browser to open the Inspectors panel Part Interface and Acquisition Choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D A Metadata display buttons B Metadata View pop up menu Click a button to select the type of metadata to display Choose the metadata view being displayed from this pop up menu C Metadata Action pop up menu Choose options for editing and arranging your metadata views and for creating metadata presets from this pop up menu Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 51 52 Import Panel The Import panel displays a list of connected cameras card readers and external har
168. age Template pop up menu Chapter 18 Creating Webpages 347 348 Deleting Pages from a Web Journal When you no longer need a page you can delete it from the web journal To delete a page from a web journal Select the page you want to delete in the Journal Pages panel Click the Remove Page button to delete the page Reordering Pages in a Web Journal You can change the order of web journal pages when necessary To move a page up or down in the page order of a web journal Select the page you want to move in the Journal Pages panel Choose either Move Current Page Up or Move Current Page Down from the Page Action pop up menu Exporting Webpages After you ve created your webpages you can post them to your Mac account or your website so that others can access them via the Internet Your Aperture webpages are composed of numerous files including image files and thumbnail images HTML webpage files and additional web formatting files All of these files are linked together to compose your webpages and they must be transferred intact to the website in a manner that preserves the links and relationships between files You can post your webpages to the Internet in these ways e Set up Aperture to automatically post pages to your Mac account e Export your pages as HTML files and images and then integrate them into your website Exporting to Mac The easiest way to transfer files to the Internet is to have Aperture automatical
169. age in the Journal Pages panel where you want the new page to appear The new page will appear after the selected page Click the Add Page button to add a new page Adding Pages by Metadata Category You can have Aperture create pages in your journal to hold images that have a type of metadata such a specific rating keyword or image date For example you can have Aperture create a page for each keyword assigned to the album s images and place images that have certain keywords on the correct pages automatically Or if your album holds images with four and five star ratings you can create a page that automatically holds the five star images and another that holds the four star images You can have Aperture add pages for images based on Day Keyword Rating Byline e City Category To add a new page based on a metadata category Select a page in the Journal Pages panel where you want the new page to appear The new page will appear after the selected page Choose an option for the type of page you want from the Page Action pop up menu Choosing a Header Style for a Web Journal Page Depending on the theme you choose you can change the look of web journal pages by choosing a style that displays either a heading followed by text or a heading followed by an image To choose the header style for a web journal page Select a page in the Journal Pages panel Choose either Header with Text or Header with Image from the P
170. ame If you choose a custom name format enter the name you want in the Name Text field You can also apply the name format to the master file as well Choose Edit from the Version Name pop up menu to define a new naming scheme For more information about naming files see Automatically Naming Your Imported Images on page 105 To add metadata to your images as they re imported choose a metadata preset from the Add Metadata From pop up menu For more information about setting up and using metadata presets see Working with Metadata Views on page 235 With no images selected in the dialog click the Import arrow or the Import button in the lower right corner of the dialog If you select images only the selected images are imported To reset the image selection so that no images are selected click in the background beside a thumbnail All Projects v ty Be gt a Library a x Indoor Weddings gt Anderson amp Reyes gt Carreon amp Golafsar When you re ready to import gt Holger amp Thoss wedding lt amp j _ click the Import arrow gt McKee amp Watanabe n79 The import process begins and an indicator appears next to the project s name showing the progress of the import When images are imported a dialog appears Click Eject Card Erase and Eject Card or Done As the images appear in the Browser you can begin working with them Images may tem
171. ame pop up menu to define a new naming scheme For more information about naming files see Automatically Naming Your Imported Images on page 105 6 Click Open The top level folder is converted to a project If the folder you imported contains a hierarchy of subfolders and images the subfolders appear as albums You can select multiple folders to import by Shift clicking them When you drag folders into the Projects panel Aperture uses the last import settings you specified to determine how the folders are imported and where they are stored To drag folders into Aperture 1 In the Finder locate the folder containing the images you want to import 2 Drag the folder to the Projects panel The top level folder is converted to a project If the folder you imported contains a hierarchy of subfolders and images the subfolders appear as albums Importing Your iPhoto Library When you first open Aperture a dialog appears that enables you to import your iPhoto Library You can import your iPhoto Library copying it into the Aperture Library or you can simply allow Aperture to access the iPhoto Library as referenced images without storing it in the Aperture Library The organization of your iPhoto images and albums is maintained as projects in the Projects panel Each image s name EXIF information keywords rating and any applied adjustments are maintained as well You cannot import slideshows books and Smart Albums from your iP
172. amera manufacturers including Canon and Nikon Flexible image management A new open Library structure lets you store photos anywhere you want You can have Aperture either store image files in the Library or simply link to image files in their current locations You can also have Aperture link to your iPhoto Library without copying the images into the Aperture Library Aperture can work with photos stored on any number of hard disk drives and other storage media You can catalog and search for images that are stored on multiple hard disks including offline volumes CDs and DVDs Professional project management Aperture allows you to manage thousands of projects and provides flexible organizational tools comprehensive metadata support and powerful search tools that let you find files instantly Nondestructive image processing Designed to protect your images from the moment they re imported Aperture identifies your original images as digital master files and it has built in safeguards to help ensure that you don t accidentally overwrite or modify them Versatile printing and publishing Working directly with your RAW images you can create color accurate prints custom contact sheets stunning websites and unique bound books with tools that are intuitive and powerful Preface With Aperture you can efficiently import digital images perform a photo edit adjust and retouch images publish images for the web or print and bac
173. ample if the white in an image is too yellow because of incandescent lighting white balancing adds enough blue to make the white appear neutral See also color cast color temperature kelvin K white point The color temperature of a display measured in kelvins The higher the white point the bluer the white is the lower the white point the redder the white The native white point for a Macintosh computer is D50 5000 kelvins for a Windows PC it is D65 6500 kelvins See also color temperature kelvin K wide angle lens A lens with a short focal length that takes in a wide view The focal length of a wide angle lens is smaller than the film plane or digital image sensor See also digital image sensor lens workspace The arrangement of the Browser Viewer Projects panel and inspectors In Aperture there are multiple workspaces See also Browser Viewer working space The color space in which you edit a file Working spaces are based either on color space profiles such as Apple RGB or on device profiles zoom lens A lens that has the mechanical capacity to change its focal length also known as an optical zoom lens See also lens Glossary 451 Index 2 page spreads 371 2 3 portrait aspect ratio 385 3 2 landscape aspect ratio 385 3 4 portrait aspect ratio 385 4 Up Fast or Slow slideshow preset 312 314 4 3 landscape aspect ratio 385 100 view 330 A Actual Size button 56 368 371 actual size display 56 368 3
174. an create your own custom email export preset You can also have Aperture transfer an image directly to your email application To specify that Aperture use a specific email application to send your images choose the email application you want to use in the Preferences window You can also specify the email export preset used to prepare the images To specify an email application and email export preset for Aperture to use Choose Aperture gt Preferences or press Command comma In the Preferences window choose the email application you want from the Email images using pop up menu To specify an export preset for Aperture to use when preparing images for email transfer choose the preset you want from the Email Export Preset pop up menu If none of the presets meet your needs click Edit and create a new export preset For more information about creating export presets see Creating an Export Preset on page 308 Chapter 15 Exporting Your Images 305 306 AO uu A WwW N To send an image directly to your email application Select the image you want to send Choose File gt Email or press Option E The image is exported directly to your email application Note Before you attempt to email an image find out the maximum file size your email client supports If your exported images exceed this maximum file size consider using FTP software or another file sharing technique to deliver your images To export an imag
175. and Showing the Toolbar You can choose to hide the toolbar completely To hide the toolbar Choose View gt Hide Toolbar or press Shift T To show a toolbar that has been hidden Choose View gt Show Toolbar or press Shift T Tip You can also quickly hide or show the toolbar by clicking the Toolbar button a gray oblong button in the top right corner of the Aperture main window Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 65 66 Customizing the Toolbar Buttons Aperture provides a simple drag and drop interface for adding deleting and rearranging the toolbar buttons To customize the toolbar Do one of the following Choose View gt Customize Toolbar e Control click the toolbar then choose Customize Toolbar from the shortcut menu A dialog appears showing icons for toolbar buttons and tools Configure the toolbar by doing any of the following To add tools to the toolbar Drag their icons from the dialog to the location where you want them to appear in the toolbar To remove items from the toolbar Drag them out of the toolbar or Control click the item you want to remove and choose Remove Item from the shortcut menu To change the order of the items in the toolbar Drag each item to its new position To control whether each tool s icon and text appear in the toolbar Choose Text Only Icon Only or Icon amp Text from the Show pop up menu in the lower left corner of the dialog or Control click the toolb
176. anization you can import a folder of images as a project or drag it directly into the Projects panel When you import a folder of images or drag it into the Projects panel the folder becomes a project and any subfolders become albums within the project Warning When importing folders of images into Aperture carefully plan how you want your images organized before you begin The top level folder containing images becomes a project containing all the images in the subfolders as well This means that if you import a folder with thousands of images contained within its subfolders Aperture will create a project with thousands of images You can import a maximum of 10 000 master images into a project If you have over 10 000 images to import into Aperture consider importing the subfolders individually instead Each subfolder will then become its own project To import a folder of images from the Finder using the Import command In the Projects panel select Library Choose File gt Import gt Folders into a Project Select the folder of images that you want to import Choose a location for the imported images by doing one of the following To store imported master image files in the Aperture Library Choose In the Aperture Library from the Store Files pop up menu To import the files as referenced images stored in their current locations on your hard disk Choose In their current location from the Store Files pop up menu
177. anization of your images Eventually your image library may contain many thousands of images that you ll want organized in a flexible and easy to manage system It s important to take a long term view of what makes for an effective and efficient organization of your projects based on your specific type of photography You may already have a large digital portfolio that you eventually want to import into the Aperture Library As an import strategy it s best to try out importing images in a series of steps Open and use the sample project as you explore Aperture features If you have an iPhoto Library you can import it so that you can use your images in Aperture For more information about importing your iPhoto Library see Importing Your iPhoto Library on page 112 Make trial imports of a small group of images directly from your digital camera or card reader Learn about the filenaming and automatic metadata features of Aperture For information about importing from your digital camera or card reader see Importing from Your Digital Camera or Card Reader next Plan how you want to import your legacy digital images Because you may have many thousands of images previously stored on disk you need to decide whether you ll store newly imported images in the Aperture Library or store them as referenced images leaving them in their current hard disk locations You can also copy or move images to a different hard disk location when imp
178. aperture and shutter are one assembly that is usually irremovable from the camera See also camera digital single lens reflex DSLR camera digital single lens reflex DSLR camera An interchangeable lens camera where the image created by the lens is transmitted via a reflexing mirror through a prism to the viewfinder and the viewfinder image corresponds to the actual image area The mirror reflexes or moves up so as not to block the digital image sensor when the shutter is open See also camera digital point and shoot camera digitization The process of converting an analog voltage value to a digital value digitize A term often used by photographers for converting images captured on film into a digital format such as TIFF using a film scanner disclosure triangle A small triangle you click to show or hide details in the Aperture interface display The computer s monitor distort Performing an adjustment that changes the shape or composition of an image See also effects dodging The process of limiting the exposure of a specific portion of an image the opposite of burning in Dodged areas in an image appear brighter than if they were exposed for as long as the rest of the image See also burning effects exposure dot gain A printing press term used to describe the enlargement of half tone dots as ink is absorbed into paper Dot gain can affect the quality of an image s appearance by reducing the amount of white reflected off
179. ar and choose Text Only Icon Only or Icon amp Text from the shortcut menu Click Done when you have finished configuring the toolbar To reset the toolbar To return the toolbar to its default state drag the default toolbar up from the bottom of the dialog and into the toolbar area Part Interface and Acquisition Setting Aperture Preferences You can use the Preferences window to specify settings in Aperture By taking time to specify your preference settings you can speed up your workflow To open the Preferences window Choose Aperture gt Preferences or press Command comma The Preferences window appears A Email Export Preset pop up menu Choose an export preset to use when exporting images to your email client If you want to create a custom export preset click Edit and create a new preset in the Export Presets dialog B Email images using pop up menu If you want to export images to an email client choose the email application from this pop up menu C External Editor File Format pop up menu Choose a file format in which to export an image to an external editor from this pop up menu You can also specify the dot per inch dpi resolution of the image in the dpi field D External Image Editor field You can use an external editor to make adjustments to your images To identify an external image editor click Choose and select an application To open an image in the external
180. at appear in the metadata view To add or remove categories of metadata that appear in the metadata view do any of the following e To add or remove a keywords field Click the Keywords button and select or deselect the Include in Summary checkbox To add or remove EXIF fields Click the EXIF button and select or deselect the checkboxes for the EXIF fields you want to add or remove To add or remove IPTC fields Click the IPTC button and select or deselect the checkboxes for the IPTC fields you want to add or remove Part Il Photo Editing To add or remove other fields Click the Other button and select or deselect the checkboxes for the fields you want to add or remove You can also create new metadata fields by entering text in the New Custom Metadata and Metadata Value fields and then clicking the Add button The new metadata field appears in the Name list and you can select its checkbox to add it to the metadata view To add or remove information about where and when an image was backed up in a vault Click the Archive button and select or deselect the Include in Summary checkbox Managing Metadata Views You can make changes to the list of metadata views that appears in the pop up menus in the View Options window and Metadata Inspector To arrange the metadata view list 1 To show the Metadata Inspector choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D 2 Choose Manage Views from the Metadata Action pop up menu 3
181. at you specify and backup location information by clicking the buttons at the bottom of the inspector Choose a metadata view from the Metadata View pop up menu Metadata View General Berens aia i Rating Badges Capio SSS Keywords Version Name vietnam20040220 Image Date 8 12 04 3 55 51 PM PDT Aperture 7 1 Shutter Speed 1 60 Exposure Bias Oev ISO Speed Rating Focal Length 35mm Focal Length 13mm Pixel Size 2592 x 1944 File Name vietnam2004 0220JPG File Size 2 88 MB Credit O CopyrightNotice S i Object Nam S Camera Model Canon PowerShot S60 To view a subset of the image s metadata click Keywords EXIF IPTC Other Archive the appropriate button Part Il Photo Editing To view and change metadata in the Metadata Inspector Select an image To show the Metadata Inspector choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D Choose a metadata view from the Metadata View pop up menu Choose a metadata view from this pop up menu Tooltips Pras To change the metadata in an editable text field click in the text field to make it active then enter the text you want Working with the AutoFill List Editor As you enter metadata in the Metadata Inspector s fields Aperture checks for previous entries and if it locates a match it completes the entry for you For example if you used the keyword Landscape previously and you type the first few lette
182. ater than or equal to New Album With Current images Only images with a rating of one star or better remain visible in the Browser In the next rating pass assign a rating of two stars or better to any images that are better than one star Change the search criteria in the Query HUD to show only those images that are rated two Stars or better In the next rating pass assign a rating of three stars or better to your images 7 Change the search criteria in the Query HUD to show only those images that are rated three stars or better In the next rating pass assign a rating of four stars or better to your images 9 Change the search criteria in the Query HUD to show only those images that are rated four stars or better Part Il Photo Editing 10 In the next pass assign a rating of five stars or Select to your best images 11 Specify a rating that is equal to five stars in the Query HUD The compare image has a yellow border x Match any of the following V Rating E Calendar New Smart Album New Album With Current Images Only the images rated Select remain visible in the Browser Comparing and Rating Images For those really tough decisions Aperture allows you to compare and rate a select image against close alternates This is particularly useful when you are trying to choose an image from a small group of similarly composed images For example choosing the best image from a series of h
183. atest articles about technical issues and solutions go to the Aperture Support website available from the Aperture Help menu Preface Introducing Aperture Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Part Interface and Acquisition This section provides introductory information about the application and its interface It also explains how to set up your image management system and import images into it An Overview of Aperture The Aperture Interface Working with Aperture Projects Importing Images An Overview of Aperture 1 Aperture is designed to be the center of your digital photography workflow from capturing new images to the final delivery of professional quality photographs This chapter provides an overview of how Aperture works and what you can do with it If you re new to Aperture this chapter is for you If you re familiar with the Aperture features and interface feel free to skip this chapter The chapter doesn t provide all the detailed information and instructions needed to perform work on your images Once you re familiar with Aperture you ll find in depth explanations and instructions in later chapters This chapter covers A First Look at Aperture p 16 Creating Projects and Importing Your Photos p 17 e Photo Editing with Aperture p 20 e Image Processing p 31 e Distribution p 32 16 A First Look at Aperture When you first open Aperture you see the following areas
184. ating for the image itself Click the Query HUD s close button Transferring Smart Album Images to Another Project or Album You can transfer images from a Smart Album to another project or album including web gallery albums web journal albums and book albums You transfer images by selecting the images in the Smart Album and dragging or copying them into another project or album To transfer images from a Smart Album to another project or album Select a project or album to hold the images or create a new project or album Select the Smart Album then select the images you want Drag the images into the project or album you want You can also select the images in the Smart Album and have Aperture automatically create a new album to hold them Part Il Photo Editing To transfer images from a Smart Album to a new album Select the images you want in the Smart Album Click the Query HUD button in the Browser Click the New Album With Current Images button to create an album or choose the type of album you want from the Query HUD Action pop up menu in the bottom right corner of the Query HUD x Filter Selects Smart Album Vietnam Match EIT of the following Qe Quick Search gt Click the New Album with V Rating Ts greater than or equal to m nrate Current Images button or choose Calendar a type of album from the Query HUD Action pop up menu ion is one or more of the following New Album With Current Ima
185. ation about importing your photos see Chapter 4 Importing Images on page 87 After Aperture imports and stacks your images you can review each stack to determine if the automatic stacking meets your approval If you prefer you can also automatically stack images after importing them To stack images after they are imported In the Projects panel select a project or album that contains images you want to stack Choose Stacks gt Auto Stack or press Command Option A In the Auto Stack Images HUD drag the slider to specify the maximum interval between successive shots x Auto Stack images g er Move the slider to indicate the maximum interval between shots Of 0 15 0 30 O45 1 00 As you drag the slider the images in the Browser are stacked according to the interval of time specified For example if you typically shoot a series of related images in 1 second intervals set the slider to 1 second Inspect the stacks to determine if the time interval should be shortened or lengthened Comparing Images in Stacks To help with the photo editing process you can set the Viewer and Browser to automatically open a selected stack and set up the stacked images for comparison The pick of the stack is set as the compare item This stack viewing feature also works in Full Screen mode To set the Viewer to automatically open and compare the images in stacks do one of the following Choose View gt Main Viewer gt Stack
186. avigate through your pages TE Theme stock Columns 4 Rows 3 Fit images within Rectangle 2 f 7 175 7 E4 100 gt Gallery 13 Pages Antarctica Under The Ice 123456 N OFS Stock Image 11 Stock Image 12 5 Previous Page button ANTI33 ANT132 covers ameme Next Page button Chapter 18 Creating Webpages 341 342 To view a particular webpage do one of the following Use the scroll bar in the Gallery Pages panel for a web gallery or the Journal Pages panel for a web journal to locate the page then click the page Click the Previous Page or Next Page button to display a different page When someone clicks an image on a web gallery or web journal page in your website a page showing an enlarged view of the image appears You can view these enlarged images in the Webpage Editor To see an enlarged image from a webpage do one of the following Position the pointer over the image then click the Detail button with a curved arrow Click the up or down arrow buttons on the side of the Detail Images panel to navigate through detail pages for the images in a web gallery or web journal To return to the page view after viewing an enlarged image Click a page in the Gallery Pages panel for a web gallery or the Journal Pages panel for a web journal Choosing and Modifying Themes Aperture provides a variety of themes that you can choose
187. blishing Your Images in Web Galleries and Web Journals To provide clients or the public the convenience of an online review you can use Aperture to create webpages and websites With Aperture you can easily post your webpages to your Mac account or you can post them to your own website server and then provide the Internet address to clients or other reviewers Part Interface and Acquisition Aperture provides ready made themes and webpage layouts that you can quickly choose for the design of your pages D Columns lt 4 gt Rows 3 Fit images within Rectangle 4 4 175 ft 7 100 7 Antarctica Under The Ice 123456 EZ 9 Stock Image 3 ANT53 Stock Image 4 ANTIO6 Stock Image 8 ANTI21 Stock Image 1 ANTI Stock Image 5 ANTIOO Stock Image 2 ANTIZ an Stock Image 7 ANTBS Stock Image 6 ANTII7 rw Se ee Stock Image 11 ANTI33 Stock Image 10 Stock Image 12 ANTI23 ANTI32 Stock Image 9 ANTI18 7 p Doon Web Pee tution oaae eae To create webpages that present a gallery of your images you create a web gallery album and use the Webpage Editor to design your pages When you place images in the album Aperture automatically populates your web gallery with your images 288 o rE ero Ae Se aa RA FHR 646 OF iia i The new album you created appears in the Projects panel Ptimages within
188. button in the toolbar The Keywords HUD appears To select the keywords you want to apply do one of the following e Hold down the Shift key while pressing the Up or Down Arrow key to select several keywords e Shift click a group of adjacent keywords Command click keywords that aren t adjacent The selected keywords are highlighted in the keyword list Drag the keywords from the Keywords HUD to an image or selection of images in the Browser or Viewer The keywords are assigned to the image or selection of images to which you dragged them Part Il Photo Editing Browsing and Searching for Keywords You can browse and search for specific keywords in the Keywords HUD To locate a keyword using the Keywords HUD 1 To show the Keywords HUD do one of the following Choose Window gt Show Keywords HUD or press Shift H e Click the Keywords HUD button in the toolbar The Keywords HUD appears 2 Do one of the following e Scroll up and down to review the keywords and click the disclosure triangles to reveal the keywords in each keyword group x Q Search gt Personal gt Photo specs Click the disclosure Photojournalism e I Arts triangle next to a Caia keyword group to Environment 3 Feature display all the keywords in it Personality Photo essay Portrait Enter a keyword in Q Portrait the search field Photo specs Y Image type Portrait Y Orientation Portrait Photojournalism Portrait
189. ce of glass or plastic designed to be placed in front of a camera lens to change emphasize or eliminate density reflections or areas within the scene See also compositing density effects finishing The process of applying the final adjustments to a digital image just before distribution Finishing may involve applying an additional gamma adjustment upon export or using an external editor to either burn or dodge a portion of the image before sending it to the printer See also export external editor Finder a The part of Mac operating system software that keeps track of files applications and folders and displays the desktop b See viewfinder FireWire The Apple trademark name for the IEEE 1394 standard A fast and versatile interface used to connect external devices to computers FireWire is well suited to transferring large amounts of data and FireWire devices such as hard drives are often used to provide additional storage space Aperture vaults are commonly stored on external FireWire hard drives See also vault fixed lens See prime lens flash A device either on or attached to the camera that emits a brief intense burst of light when the shutter release button is pressed Flashes synchronized with the shutter are used to obtain a correctly exposed image in low light situations See also exposure external flash fill in lighting hot shoe Glossary 441 442 flat The lack of density in an image when the contrast is too
190. chiving of them yourself Although rare mechanical failures and unexpected damage to your computer system can occur And from time to time you may upgrade your equipment and need to move your portfolio to a new system Aperture allows you to easily restore the entire Aperture Library from your backup disks onto your computer or a new system For more information about restoring images and projects see Restoring Your Aperture System on page 409 Part Ill Distribution and Backup As you add to your photo library Aperture automatically tracks which files have been backed up to each vault When there are image files in the Library that are not backed up in a vault the Vault Status button appears red When your vault is up to date the Vault Status button for the vault appears black When you have made image modifications such as image adjustment metadata or keyword changes that have not been backed up in a vault yet the button appears yellow You can update your vaults at any time i Vault 1 83 4GB of 232 8GB available v i E f Vault Status button E Backup Disk Vault 1 al SS Vault 2 83 4GB of 232 8GB o z ez es E Backup Disk Vault 2 E3 c Vault clm s Click the Vaults Panel button to show the Vaults panel Planning Your Backup System As you begin working with Aperture it s important to perform regular backups of your images When you import new images from your camera you should i
191. choose a theme or layout for your webpage F Metadata View Choose a metadata view to use with the webpage images from pop up menu this pop up menu G Add Text Box button Click this button to add a text box to the current webpage H Columns value slider Specify the number of columns you want on a page PartI Interface and Acquisition Fit images within pop up menu Choose how images appear on the webpage from this pop up menu J Width value slider Specify the width of the images displayed on the page K Height value slider Specify the height of the images displayed on the page L Next Page button Click this button to go to the next webpage M Previous Page button Click this button to go to the previous webpage N Publish to Mac button Click this button to publish your finalized webpages to your Mac account For more information see Exporting to Mac on page 348 0 Export Web Pages Click this button to export your webpages For more information button see Exporting Webpages as HTML Files on page 350 P Page Action Rearrange the order of images and choose the conditions for pop up menu automatically adding pages to your web journal from this pop up menu Q Page Template Choose a page template or layout from this pop up menu pop up menu To learn more about creating webpages see Chapter 18 Creating Webpages on page 333 Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 59 60 Light Table
192. ck Done Badge overlays are now visible in the Browser in grid view You can turn off the display of badge overlays in the Browser by turning off the display of metadata For more information see Turning the Display of Metadata On or Off on page 231 To display badge overlays on images in the Light Table do one of the following Choose View gt View Options or press Command J select the Show decorations checkbox in the Light Table section then click Done Choose View gt Metadata Overlays gt Light Table or press Shift G Badges and metadata are now visible in the Light Table To turn off badge overlays in the Light Table do one of the following Choose View gt Metadata Overlays gt Light Table to remove the checkmark Choose View gt View Options or press Command J deselect the Show decorations checkbox in the Light Table section then click Done Press Shift G Badge overlays are now turned off in the Light Table Chapter 11 Working with Metadata 245 Searching for 1 and Displaying Images Aperture allows you to easily search for and gather images in a variety of locations You can perform complex searches and save your search results This chapter provides information about using the Query HUD to search for images using a wide variety of criteria including image name subject keyword photographer caption or text date location EXIF and IPTC information and more This chapter cov
193. clients For more information about setting up two displays see Setting Up Your System with Two Displays on page 417 When your system uses two displays Aperture provides two Viewers in which you can view multiple images These Viewers are called the primary Viewer and secondary Viewer The primary Viewer is used for displaying the Aperture application and the secondary Viewer for viewing images You can set the secondary Viewer to display images in different ways by choosing an option from the Viewer Mode pop up menu in the control bar e Desktop Turns off the dual display function e Blank Sets the secondary Viewer to be a blank screen e Mirror Displays the same images in the primary and secondary Viewers For example if you have the primary Viewer set to display three images the secondary Viewer displays three images as well Alternate Displays the currently selected image in the secondary Viewer The secondary Viewer shows only one image even when you have the primary Viewer set to display multiple images e Span Splits the display of the currently selected images between the primary and secondary Viewers For example if you select seven images to view the primary Viewer shows as many as fit its screen size and the remaining images appear in the secondary Viewer Thus one Viewer might show four images and the other Viewer might show the remaining three of the seven Span is also used if you want to compare images and sh
194. confused with brightness or contrast Changing the value of the gamma affects middle tones while leaving the whites and blacks of the image unaltered Gamma adjustment is often used to compensate for differences between Macintosh and Windows video cards and displays The Mac Standard gamma is 1 8 the PC Standard is 2 2 gamut The range of colors an individual color device is capable of reproducing Each device capable of reproducing color has a unique gamut determined by age frequency of use and other elements such as inks and paper See also device characterization device dependent gamut mapping ICC profile gamut mapping The process of identifying colors outside a device s gamut and then calculating the nearest color within its gamut Gamut mapping is used when receiving color information from another color space See also color space gamut highlights The brightest areas of the subject or scene See also contrast density shadows Glossary hot shoe An apparatus at the top of a camera designed to hold a portable flash When the shutter release button is pressed an electric signal is transmitted through a connection in the hot shoe to activate the portable flash See also external flash flash HUD Short for heads up display In Aperture HUDs are floating tool panels that allow you to work on your image in regular and Full Screen mode You can open and then move a HUD wherever you wish based on your display setup See also Full Scree
195. create a new export preset 1 Do one of the following Choose Aperture gt Presets gt Image Export e With an image selected choose File gt Export Version or press Command Shift E and in the dialog that appears choose Edit from the Export Preset pop up menu The Export Presets dialog appears Export Presets Select a preset on which 4 to base your new preset Click the Add button to JPEG Fit within 1024 x 1024 JPEG Fit within 640 x 640 TIFF Original Size 8 bit TIFF Original Size 16 bit TIFF 50 of Original Size TIFF Fit within 1024 x 1024 PNG Original Size PNG 50 of Original Size PNG Fit within 1024 x 1024 PNG Fit within 640 x 640 PSD Original Size 16 bit PSD 50 of Original Size 16 bit Email Small JPEG Email Medium JPEG Email Original Size JPEG add a new preset Image Format JPEG t Mi include Metadata Image Quality o 10 size To oroms 2 opr 72 Gamma Adjust 1 00 Coorsyn Pronte Black Point Compensation C Show Watermark Opacity g 00 2 Select an export preset on which to base your new preset then click the Add button A new preset appears highlighted in the Export Preset Name list Enter a new name for the preset 4 Change the export settings as required then click OK Part Ill Distribution and Backup Modifying an Export Preset You can
196. ct control CJ Show all C control Show unrated images only control amp Show rejects only DUUE HUU E E control 7 Chapter 9 Rating Images 197 Applying Keywords to Images 1 Adding keywords to your images helps you organize your images and quickly locate specific images This chapter provides information about adding keywords to images and using these keywords to help define and organize your images This chapter covers An Overview of Keywords p 200 Viewing Keywords Applied to Images p 202 Applying Keywords Using the Keywords HUD p 206 Applying Keywords Using Keyword Controls and Keyword Presets p 213 Applying Keywords Using the Lift amp Stamp HUD p 218 Applying Keywords Using the Metadata Inspector p 222 Applying Keywords to Images in the Light Table p 223 Removing Keywords from an Image p 223 Importing and Exporting Keyword Lists p 224 199 200 An Overview of Keywords Keywords are descriptive words assigned to image versions and saved as metadata For example a family portrait may include such keywords as Portrait Family Father Mother Daughter Husband Wife Park Client Select Purchased and more Once you have applied keywords to your images you can have Aperture display an image s keywords in the Viewer and Browser You can also view keywords for selected images in the Metadata Inspector vietnam2004 015
197. d disk drives as well as local hard disks and mounted servers To import images into Aperture you select a device in the panel or connect a camera or card reader and the Import dialog appears This list displays all locations from which you can currently import A Import panel images including internal disks and connected drives B Import Panel button Click this button to show or hide the Import panel For more information see Chapter 4 Importing Images on page 87 Part Interface and Acquisition Vaults Panel The Vaults panel lists your backup vaults and their locations Vaults are usually located on external FireWire drives As you add images to the Library Aperture automatically tracks which managed image files have been backed up to your vault When your vault is up to date the Vault Status button appears black When a change to at least one version occurs such as an adjustment the Vault Status button appears yellow When Aperture determines that even a single master file has not been backed up the Vault Status button appears red You can have Aperture update your vaults whenever you want Vault 1 377 9GB of 465 7CB available 5 ed Vault 2 261 7G8 of 467 5C8 available gt gt o f aed O Vault cs m kki A Vault Status buttons Click the Vault Status button next to a vault to update the vault The Vault Status button changes color to indicate the current
198. d images You can also use the stacking buttons in the toolbar and keyboard shortcuts to work with stacks When a stack appears in the filmstrip you can rate the pick image and open the stack and rate the images within it Open stack After stacking images you may want to rate your picks or the images within stacks For more information about rating images see Chapter 9 Rating Images on page 187 Chapter 8 Stacking Images and Making Picks 185 186 Keyboard Shortcuts for Working with Stacks Aperture provides the following keyboard shortcuts for efficiently working with stacks Keyboard shortcut Function j age non 2 Go to previous stack age non J e Go to next stack la J Open Close stack option Open all stacks option Close all stacks l sti Create stack e stea J Unstack option Split stack le s h Set stack pick 6 Promote stack item b b Demote stack item lar J oon J J Extract item Part II Photo Editing Rating Images Rating images is a quick and easy way to narrow down the number of images you intend to work with It can also help you locate your best images later This chapter explains how to quickly assign image ratings and use them to sort and review images This chapter covers An Overview of the Aperture Rating System p 188 e Rating Images p 190 e Sorting
199. d import the project into the Aperture Library You might also transfer images over your office network You can also use a FireWire cable to connect two computers and transfer your project You connect both computers via their FireWire ports and then restart one of the computers in FireWire Target Disk Mode When a computer is restarted in FireWire Target Disk Mode the computer s hard disk icon appears on the desktop of the other computer You can then copy the project from one computer to another For more information about using FireWire Target Disk Mode see Mac Help in the Mac OS X Help menu To import a project into the Aperture Library Connect the computer or hard disk drive from which you want to import the project If you re connecting a computer directly to your Aperture system computer via a FireWire cable restart the computer that holds the project while holding down the T key The computer starts up in FireWire Target Disk Mode and a FireWire icon appears onscreen The computer s hard disk icon then appears on the other computer s desktop Choose File gt Import gt Projects Select the project you want to import then click Open The new project appears in the Projects panel Part Ill Distribution and Backup Restoring Your Aperture System If you buy a new computer or use another system at a different location and want access to the Aperture Library you can install Aperture and then transfer the Library from your va
200. d preferences Part Il Photo Editing You can select images in the following ways Select a single image e Click the image Press the arrow keys to navigate to the image Select a range of images e Click the first image in a range then Shift click the last image e Press the arrow keys to select the first image then press Shift and the arrow keys to select the last image in the range Select the first image then choose Edit gt Grow Selection or press Command E to extend the selection e Select the first image then choose Edit gt Select to End or press Shift End to extend the selection to the last image in the Browser e Select the last image in a range then choose Edit gt Select to Beginning or press Shift Home to extend the selection to the first image in the Browser Drag a selection rectangle to select all the images that fall within the rectangle Select an image among e Press semicolon or press Command Option Left Arrow to selected images select the previous image in the selection Press apostrophe or press Command Option Right Arrow to select the next image in the selection Select an image in a stack e Press the Right or Left Arrow key Select the pick of the stack e Choose Edit gt Select Parent or press Shift Option E Select nonadjacent images Command click the images you want to select Command click the images again to deselect them Slide a selection e Press
201. data 228 searching for 140 262 263 Version Name with Index format 105 Version Name with Sequence format 105 version numbers 50 versions in albums 74 creating 130 169 creating while importing 88 defined 72 73 451 deleting 82 132 duplicating 169 exporting 296 350 incremental versions 131 moving into other projects or albums 134 numbers 50 in projects 74 renaming 127 toolbar buttons 169 video cards 416 Viewer adjusting image view 155 background 68 148 badge overlays 243 comparing images in 150 defined 451 displaying or hiding 65 148 full resolution image display 155 functions and controls 42 hot areas in images 154 illustrated 16 image display size 147 keyword display in 202 keywords in 203 Loupe 151 metadata in 158 226 228 230 multiple screen displays 148 157 number of images in 149 onscreen proofing 156 overview 146 shortcut menu 162 stacks in 151 switching to Book Layout Editor 373 Viewer Background Brightness slider 68 Viewer Mode pop up menu 43 157 167 viewfinders 451 View Options command 203 View Options window 126 142 159 203 226 vignetting 451 W watermarks defined 451 displaying 308 exporting images with 292 352 opacity 308 355 resizing 356 tips for 303 webpage images 355 Web Copyright field 69 345 Web Export command 352 353 354 web export presets creating 353 deleting 354 editing 353 selecting 351 watermarks 355 Web Export Presets dialog 352 353 354 web gallerie
202. dding pages to books 376 for book albums 365 in Browser 120 changing one image in selections 124 compare images 150 deselecting 123 for books 373 for Light Table albums 325 to import 95 multiple images 123 overview 122 primary selections 122 Selection tool 170 shortcuts 123 for stacks 179 selecting keywords 208 220 Selection tool 47 170 selective focus 448 Select ratings 196 448 Index selects defined 74 Send Backward button 55 367 387 sending images in email 305 sepia tone filters 387 sequences of images 105 177 Set 1 pop up menu 203 Set Album Pick command 182 Set Compare Item command 150 195 Set Master Page pop up menu 55 367 375 381 setting up systems 414 421 shadows 308 448 sharing images See distributing images shortcut keys See keyboard shortcuts shortcut menus defined 448 displaying 85 Full Screen mode 174 Projects panel 85 Viewer 162 Show All Images button 60 327 373 Show crop marks option 281 Show decorations checkbox 245 Show Full Spreads button 56 368 371 Show Inspectors command 227 Show Keyword Controls command 213 215 Show loading indicator while full size images load checkbox 68 Show Master Image button 43 156 171 Show Master Pages command 377 394 Show number of versions for projects and albums checkbox 68 Show proxy indicator while full size images load checkbox 68 Show Single Pages button 56 368 371 Show tooltips on controls checkbox 68 Show Unplaced Images butto
203. der the Smart Album searches the projects within the folder Part Il Photo Editing By instituting specific keyword schemes you can create Smart Albums that are automatically updated with specific kinds of images For example you might create Smart Albums that e Collect images of certain poses or subjects such as head shots images of particular models or sports scenes Collect images based on business information such as purchase date payment or amount due e Collect images suitable for a specific purpose such as for distribution on the web or submission to stock photography houses e Gather the best images of your collection into a portfolio of poster images that you use to present or introduce your work e Automatically gather a project s select images As you complete projects throughout the year Smart Albums are automatically updated with images that match their search criteria You might also use Smart Albums to explore different aspects of your photography For example you can create temporary collections of images based on technical data such as camera model exposure or lens type as you investigate technical influences on your images You can quickly create a Smart Album to review images and then delete it Or you can create Smart Albums that hold permanent and expanding collections of images Using Smart Albums can become a handy way to relieve yourself from slow reviews of images that you are required to track p
204. devices mathematical models are used to simulate the full spectrum of light within the gamuts of the devices These models are known as color spaces Color spaces in which the interpretation of a color is not dependent on a specific device are known as device independent The Commission Internationale de Eclairage CIE was established in 1931 to create standards for a series of color spaces representing the visible spectrum The CIE color spaces CIE XYZ and CIE Lab are found in ColorSync Utility As technology evolved new color spaces were created for RGB and CMYK color For more information about RGB and CMYK color see Digital Photography Fundamentals available in the Aperture Help menu Device independent color spaces are used by ColorSync Utility Aperture and other color management systems to transfer and transform color data from one device to another Color from one device dependent color space such as a display is translated to a device independent color space such as sRGB and then translated to another device dependent color space such as a printer The independent color space acts as an objective interpreter ensuring that the color data is accurately passed on to the next device Understanding ColorSync Utility ColorSync Utility is the color management system used by Mac OS X ColorSync is completely integrated with Mac OS X and available to all native Mac OS X applications including Aperture ColorSync is used to manage
205. diately displayed in the Browser To save your search results see Saving Your Search Results on page 265 Searching by Import Session At times you may want to locate images that were imported at a specific time or date Aperture keeps track of your import sessions and can identify images that were imported at the same time To search for images based on their import session you use the Import Session search options To search for images by import session In the Projects panel select a project or an album you want to search Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser In the Query HUD select the Import Session checkbox and select the checkbox for the import group you want to search by x Match ai of the following Rating Ts greater than or equal to Cal import Session is one or more of the following 1 2005 08 16 07 22 PM 1 2005 08 16 07 23 PM New Album With Current images Select an import group Chapter 12 Searching for and Displaying Images 261 4 Choose any from the Match pop up menu if it s not already chosen The images that match the search criteria are displayed in the Browser To save your search results see Saving Your Search Results on page 265 Searching by File Status You can also search for images using their file status For example you can
206. dicate a An X indicates a negative positive rating rating Reject Part Il Photo Editing Reject K Make sure this checkbox is selected then choose an option from the pop up menu The process of rating an image can be as easy as selecting an image and clicking a rating button to assign a rating to the image Increase Rating SN Select Decrease Rating You can also use keyboard shortcuts to quickly assign or change ratings You can quickly review and rate images one after another with speed and efficiency You can also select and rate multiple images at once You can review and rate images in the Viewer Browser and Light Table as well as in Full Screen mode When you ve finished rating images Aperture allows you to sort images according to their ratings You use the Query HUD to hide or show images of a certain rating For example after an initial rating pass you can set the Query HUD to show only those images that are rated one star You can then closely inspect and further refine your selection or begin an adjustments pass Aperture is preset to hide images that are rated Reject so you may need to change the Query HUD settings to see rejected images x Filter 2005 Match any of the following Qr Quick Search V Rating is greater than or equal to 7 Unrated Calendar Set the slider to a rating import Session is one or more of the following New Smart Album New Album With Current images
207. duration as the song choose Fit to music from the Timing pop up menu Slideshow Presets Timing Fit to music Duration __________ 1 see F Loop slideshow Aperture adjusts the amount of time each image is displayed to fit the duration of the selected song If you are satisfied with your music selection click OK The Run Slideshow dialog appears Click Start to begin playing the slideshow presentation Part Ill Distribution and Backup Using the Light Table The Light Table provides a large open space where you can freely resize group and rearrange images This chapter provides instructions for using the Light Table You can place a selection of images in the Light Table for review and drag them to new positions group them in different combinations and resize them as needed You can also easily arrange related images together to compare them as you might during color correction This chapter covers An Overview of the Light Table p 324 Creating a Light Table Album p 325 Placing and Viewing Images in the Light Table p 326 Moving and Resizing Images in the Light Table p 327 Aligning and Arranging Images in the Light Table p 328 Adjusting the Light Table View p 330 Setting View Options for the Light Table p 331 Transferring Images from the Light Table p 331 Printing a Light Table Arrangement p 332 Deleting a Light Table Album p 332 323 324 An Overview o
208. e Library from the Store Files pop up menu To store imported master image files as referenced images in the Pictures folder on your hard disk Choose Pictures from the Store Files pop up menu To store imported master image files as referenced images in a location other than the Pictures folder Choose Choose from the Store Files pop up menu and select the folder you want Choose No folder from the Subfolders pop up menu to specify that the files be stored as separate individual files in the selected folder You can also specify that Aperture create and store your files in a hierarchy of subfolders with specific folder names For more information about specifying folders to hold your imported images see Importing Master Files for Referenced Images into Folders on page 103 Choose whether you want the image files moved or copied to a new location by clicking the Move files or Copy files button For more information about moving and copying files see Changing the Location of Images When You Import Them on page 100 Chapter 4 Importing Images 93 94 4 Choose a naming convention from the Version Name pop up menu to specify how you want the images named For example choose Master Filename from the Version Name pop up menu to have your files stored using the current master filenames from your camera or card Choose a name format from the Version Name pop up menu to have your images stored using a specified n
209. e from the Store Files pop up menu and select the folder you want Choose No folder from the Subfolders pop up menu to specify that the files be stored as separate individual files in the selected folder You can also specify that Aperture create and store your files in a hierarchy of subfolders with specific folder names For more information about specifying folders to hold your imported images see Importing Master Files for Referenced Images into Folders on page 103 Choose whether you want the image files moved or copied to a new location by clicking the Move files or Copy files button For more information about moving and copying files see Changing the Location of Images When You Import Them on page 100 7 Choose a naming convention from the Version Name pop up menu to specify how you want the images named For example choose Master Filename from the Version Name pop up menu to have your files stored using the current master filenames from your camera or card Choose a name format from the Version Name pop up menu to have your images stored using a specified name If you choose a custom name format enter the name you want in the Name Text field You can also apply the name format to the master image as well Choose Edit from the Version Name pop up menu to define a new naming scheme For more information about naming files see Automatically Naming Your Imported Images on page 105 8 To add metadata to
210. e master file for the specific image To reconnect an offline referenced image Reconnect the hard disk holding the referenced image s master file or otherwise locate or make the file available to Aperture for reconnecting Select a project that contains the offline image you want to reconnect or select the offline image in the Browser 3 Choose File gt Manage Referenced Files Chapter 5 Working with Images in the Browser 137 4 Click the Show Reconnect Options button Select the volume you want here and navigate to the location of the file on the hard disk 5 At the top of the window select the file path for the master file that you want to reconnect A thumbnail of the image and some identifying metadata appear 6 Inthe bottom half of the window navigate to the referenced image s master file location on the hard disk and select the master file You can follow the file path listed for a selected image in the top of the window When you select the file a thumbnail of the image and metadata appear allowing you to compare it to the thumbnail and metadata in the upper window to make sure you ve selected the correct file 7 Click Reconnect to reconnect a specific image or click Reconnect All to reconnect all the selected images 138 Part II Photo Editing A U N Relocating Referenced Images Master Files You can easily move master files for referenced images to new locations on the same hard disk or a d
211. e 1SO Speed FocalLength Focal 1mg108 12 31 00 4 00 00 PM PST p img 12 31 00 4 00 00 PM PST gt 1mg213 kkk 7 21 05 5 38 49 PM GMT 1 gt i Img220 sek 7 21 05 6 02 15 PM GMT gt 1ma206 Sok 7 24 05 8 51 41 PM GMT YE img2oz khkk 7 24 05 10 40 00 PM GMT ff tmg202 kkk 7 24 05 10 40 00 PM GMT amp Impos seek 7 24105 9 58 45 PM GMT L Img204 kkk 7 24 05 10 12 57 PM GMT amp Img203 ae 7 24 05 10 25 30 PM GMT K imgz01 eek 7 25 05 4 57 39 PM GMT Img200 kik 7 25105 5 28 42 PM GMT img056 x 7 26 05 5 04 46 PM GMT gt Imgos2 ae 7 26 05 8 35 01 PM GMT img051 tk 7 26 05 8 41 45 PM GMT 1 i 1 selected 72 images displayed ao E In list view a stack is identified by a disclosure triangle beside the image name To open and close stacks in list view Click the disclosure triangle beside the stack name You can work with the images in a stack in list view by dragging pressing keyboard shortcuts or choosing commands from the Stacks menu Part Il Photo Editing Working with Stacks in Full Screen Mode You can also review stacks using the filmstrip in Full Screen mode A stack appears marked with a Stack button You can open or close stacks to review the contents of a stack or compare images within stacks You can reorder images in a stack or change a stack s pick image using the keyboard shortcuts for promoting and demoting stacke
212. e Help menu Part Ill Distribution and Backup Exporting Copies of Digital Master Files When you export master files duplicates of the files that were imported from your camera or other source are created no adjustments file modifications or any other changes are exported with the file To export copies of digital master files Select an image or images in the Browser Choose File gt Export gt Export Masters or press Command Shift S Navigate to the location where you want the exported files placed lt i gt jin A tomciark SJG search Choose a location for the exported files Custom Subfolder Name Enter folder text here Name Format Master Filename Choose a name format for your Custom Name Enter name text here master files here File Name Example IMP 008 Navigate tiff C create IPTC4XMP sidecar file Ewormasters Click this button to export files A Do one of the following Choose No folder from the Subfolder Format pop up menu to specify that the files be stored as separate individual files in the selected folder To specify that Aperture create and store your files in a hierarchy of subfolders with specific folder names choose a folder preset from the Subfolder Format pop up menu For more information about specifying folders to hold your exported images see Exporting Master Files into Folders in the Finder on page 294 e Enter a custo
213. e Library file e Vaults Containers that each hold a backup of the Library and all its images and information The next sections explain details about each of these elements and how you work with them in Aperture What Are Digital Master Files A digital master file is the original RAW JPEG TIFF or PNG file that was imported into Aperture from your camera a memory card a computer or external storage media such as an external hard disk drive or CD Aperture never changes the master file so you always have originals to work from Important Digital master files especially RAW files tend to be quite large Projects consisting of several thousand digital master files require high capacity hard disks For information about importing your digital master files see Chapter 4 Importing Images on page 87 Part Interface and Acquisition What Are Versions Once you have digital master files on your hard disk you can review and make adjustments to your images For example you can change the exposure contrast or saturation or add information to an image such as the photographer s name event and location To work with images Aperture creates a version of each master file that includes your adjustments and embedded information and leaves the master file unchanged A version refers to the master file on your hard disk but it is not the master file itself Versions store only the thumbnail image adjustments and
214. e Master Pages panel Choose Split Master Page from the Book Action pop up menu You can now adjust the position of items on the new pages to match the margins on the left and right pages Chapter 19 Creating Books 395 396 A U N O O NA Updating Book Pages with Master Page Changes After you change a master page the modified design can be applied to pages in your book Aperture does not automatically update the design of pages whose master pages are modified later However you can choose to update the pages in a book with revised master page designs To update a page with a changed master page design In the Pages panel select the page whose master page design you want to update Choose Reapply Master from the Book Action pop up menu Aperture applies the current master page design to the selected page Copying a Book Album After you ve set up a book structure that you like you can reuse it for other projects For example you might create a wedding album book structure that you reuse frequently You can select and duplicate a book album You can then remove the images from the album and replace them with others to fill the new book Aperture can automatically flow the new images into the duplicated book structure To copy a book album and place new images in it Select the book album in the Projects panel Choose File gt Duplicate Book Drag the duplicate book album to a new project if you wish With the duplica
215. e a page design from the Set Master Page pop up menu For example you might create a single image page and later decide to change that page to hold two images You can apply different master page designs to a page to find the design that works best for your images and book To apply a master page design to a page Select the page in the Pages panel Choose the master page you want from the Set Master Page pop up menu If you changed a page s design by repositioning or resizing boxes and you want to start over with the original design you can reapply the original master page design To reapply a master page design to a page Select the page you want to change in the Pages panel Choose Reapply Master from the Book Action pop up menu Copying Pages If you ve made changes to a page and youd like to use that page again in your book you can duplicate it Or you might duplicate a page and then make small modifications to it keeping both the new page design and the original for later use To copy pages Select the page or pages you want to duplicate You can Shift click pages in the Pages panel to select multiple pages Choose Duplicate Page from the Add Pages pop up menu Reordering Pages in a Book You can move pages within a book If you need to move a particular page forward or backward in the page order you can drag it to a new location in the book structure To move a page in your book Select the page in the Pages panel
216. e a slideshow that successively adds images to your screen in a grid pattern To display images in a grid 1 Select a set of images to be displayed in your slideshow 2 Choose File gt Slideshow or press Shift S The Run Slideshow dialog appears 3 Choose Edit from the Slideshow Preset pop up menu The Slideshow Presets dialog appears 4 Do one of the following e Select a slideshow preset to modify e Create a new slideshow preset 5 In the Slideshow Presets dialog adjust the Rows and Columns sliders to specify the number of rows and columns in your image grid Slideshow Presets Timing Show images for fred tine Duration Q 1 see Fl Loop slideshow Rows t I i t l2 i t t t i 1 J 1 Columns Heoi Background MENIN 6 Click OK The Run Slideshow dialog appears 7 Click Start to begin playing the slideshow presentation Chapter 16 Creating Slideshow Presentations 319 320 _ 6 7 Playing Your Slideshow on Your Main Display Only Your slideshow automatically plays according to your default display setup If you use a dual display system but want to view a slideshow only on your main display you can easily make that change in the Slideshow Presets dialog To play your slideshow only on your main display Select a set of images to be displayed in your slideshow Choose File gt Slideshow or press Shift S The Run Slideshow dialog appears Choose Edit from the Slideshow Preset pop
217. e after installing the application Creating Projects and Importing Your Photos To use Aperture you first import your photos You can import digital photos directly from your camera or a card reader and from hard disks or other storage devices where you ve archived digital files After a shoot you can connect your card reader or digital camera to your computer and Aperture automatically detects it You can then easily import your new images into Aperture Creating Projects As you work with Aperture you create projects to hold your images A project is similar to a folder that can hold dozens hundreds or even thousands of images For example after completing a travel shoot to Antarctica you might create a new project named Antarctica and import the photos into it Chapter 1 An Overview of Aperture 17 18 Your new project appears in a list in the Projects panel all Projects O gt Library Q r gt 2002 Examples of items in gt amp 2003 the Projects panel gt 2004 L gt 2005 a gt Antarctica Projects Bali L__ gt Belize ig Cephalopods Q Li Deep Sea Animals Q gt Florida and the Keys gt French Polynesia and Tahiti gt gt Galapagos Islands Kenya The Wildlife of the Masai Mara T Komodo Folders As your portfolio increases and you create more and more projects you can organize your work into hierarchies of folders projects and albums
218. e an album to consolidate your favorite images or selects from multiple projects You can then publish this collection of selects on your website or export the album s contents for review by a prospective client Part Interface and Acquisition You can also create albums within projects to help you organize your images into relevant groups For example images in your Antarctica project can be divided into three albums Antarctica Selects On Land and Underwater Three albums created within one project You can also place versions from other projects into an album that resides within a project What Are Folders In Aperture you use folders to organize projects and albums For example you can import images into projects and then place the projects in folders based on the year such as 2002 2003 2004 and 2005 If you shoot multiple projects for the same client you can create a folder that holds the client s individual projects These folders organize images based on what year they were shot Folders contain only albums projects and other folders They don t contain master files or versions Chapter 3 Working with Aperture Projects 75 76 What Is the Library The Aperture Library tracks every project album master file and version no matter whether the images are stored in the Aperture Library file or in other hard disk locations Aperture automatically creates a Library file in your Pictures folder the f
219. e from the Placement pop up menus 5 To include labels with metadata items select the Show Labels checkbox Click the Set 1 or Set 2 button to specify the set you want to use Click Done When you choose a metadata view for the Browser in list view the metadata view determines the number of columns that appear Each metadata item in the metadata view becomes a list view column Part Il Photo Editing BW N To set the display of metadata in the Browser in list view Choose View gt View Options or press Command J Select the Grid View checkbox In the List View Columns area choose the metadata view you want from the Set 1 pop up menu Choose an alternate metadata view from the Set 2 pop up menu Click the Set 1 or Set 2 button to specify the set you want to use Click Done To set the display of metadata in image tooltips Choose View gt View Options or press Command J Select the Image Tooltips checkbox Choose the metadata view you want from the Set pop up menu Click Done Turning the Display of Metadata On or Off After choosing a metadata view you can turn the display of metadata on and off and switch between metadata views To hide or show metadata in the Viewer do one of the following Choose View gt Metadata Overlays gt Viewer or press Y Choose View gt View Options or press Command J select or deselect the Viewer checkbox then click Done To switch metadata views in the Viewer do one of
220. e from the Set Master Page pop up menu if you wish The new page now has the page layout you chose Chapter 19 Creating Books 375 Automatically Creating New Pages You can have Aperture automatically add pages to your book containing unplaced images in the book album Aperture creates the number of pages needed to hold the remaining unplaced images Add Pages pop up menu Book Action pop up menu Delete Pages button Set Master Page pop up menu To automatically place the unplaced images in pages added to your book 1 Arrange the images in the Browser in the order in which you want them to appear in the book 2 Select a page in the Pages panel where the new pages should appear The new pages will appear just after the selected page 3 Choose Add New Pages gt With Unplaced Images from the Add Pages pop up menu All the unplaced images in the album are added to new pages in your book Adding New Pages to Hold a Selection of Images You can also select a group of images and have Aperture automatically place them on new pages in your book Aperture creates the number of pages needed to hold the selected images 376 Part III Distribution and Backup To add a selection of images to new pages in your book Select the images you want in the Browser Select a page in the Pages panel where the new pages should appear The new pages will appear just after the selected page Choose Add New Pages gt With S
221. e gray box to see other parts of the image also known as panning To pan the full resolution image in the Viewer do one of the following Drag the red rectangle that appears on the image Drag the red rectangle to change your view of the image Hold down the Space bar and drag the image Chapter 6 Displaying Images in the Viewer 155 156 Viewing Master Images When working with adjusted images or versions you may at times want to check what the original master image looks like You can have Aperture quickly display the digital master file on which a selected version is based To display the master file for a selected version do one of the following Choose View gt Show Master Image or press M Click the Show Master Image button in the control bar Setting Up the Viewer for Onscreen Proofing Images displayed on your computer screen may look different when displayed on computer screens that use different color technologies Your images may also reproduce differently in print depending on the type of printer the paper used and the color profile of the printing device To see what an image will look like when you print it or view it on a different screen you can have Aperture adjust your screen so that your images resemble the final results To adjust your computer screen you choose a proofing profile that matches as closely as possible the characteristics of the final output device For example if your image will
222. e next section Saving Your Search Results Part Il Photo Editing Saving Your Search Results When you perform a search using the Query HUD you can choose to save your results in several ways You can create a new Smart Album that locates images that match the search criteria You can also save the search results themselves into a new album Light Table album book album web gallery album Smart Web Gallery Album or web journal album To create a Smart Album based on the search criteria 1 Use the Query HUD to search for images based on specified criteria 2 In the Query HUD click New Smart Album A new untitled Smart Album appears in the Projects panel 3 Enter the name you want for the Smart Album then press Return When you add images to a project or the Library that match the search criteria they are automatically added to the Smart Album For more information see Chapter 13 Grouping Images with Smart Albums on page 267 To save your search results in an album 1 Use the Query HUD to search for images based on specified criteria 2 In the Query HUD do one of the following To create anew album Click New Album With Current Images enter the name you want for the album then press Return To create a new Light Table book web gallery Smart Web Gallery or web journal album Choose the appropriate option from the Query HUD Action pop up menu enter the name you want for the album then press Return
223. e next web gallery page K Previous Page button Click this button to go to the previous web gallery page Publish to Mac button Click this button to publish your finalized webpages to your Mac account For more information see Exporting to Mac on page 348 M Export Web Pages Click this button to export your webpages For more information button see Exporting Webpages as HTML Files on page 350 Web Journal Controls You can also create journal style webpages mixing paragraphs of text and images to display on the web When working with a web journal you can manually arrange images and text on the page a ceed Journal 1 Page i Vietnam Travel Journal ng Vie Detail 3 Pages ka Detall Page Oo be Too To work with a web journal in the Webpage Editor select a web journal album in the Projects panel and select a page to view from the thumbnail pages on the left side When the selected page appears you can add and arrange images and text A Remove Page button Click this button to remove a selected page from your web journal B Add Page button Click this button to add a page to your web journal C Detail Images panel Click the thumbnail image in this panel to see the enlarged version of a selected image D Journal Pages panel Select a page s thumbnail in this panel to see the enlarged version E Site Theme button Click this button to
224. e not deleted Part Interface and Acquisition Deleting Items from the Projects Panel You can also delete items from the Projects panel When you delete an item from the Projects panel the contents of the item are deleted with it Note If you delete a project or a project within a folder the digital master files contained in the project are also deleted To delete projects and folders Select the item then do one of the following To delete a project Choose File gt Delete Project or press Command Delete To delete a folder Choose File gt Delete Folder or press Command Delete A dialog appears asking if you want to continue Click the Delete button The selected item is deleted along with its contents Warning This action cannot be undone Once you click the Delete button the master files are moved to the Trash All versions and their adjustments and metadata are permanently deleted To permanently remove the master files from your hard disk empty the Trash To delete an album a Light Table album a web gallery album a web journal album or a book album Select the album then choose File gt Delete tem The selected item is deleted along with its contents Working with Library Files When the Library file becomes large and requires more disk space than is available in its current location you can move it to a hard disk with more storage capacity Aperture is preset to create the Librar
225. e pages to suit your book s requirements and you can add and remove pages as needed You can insert new blank pages wherever you want in your book After adding pages you can drag them in the Pages panel to new locations in the book You can e Add individual pages one at a time to a book e Have Aperture automatically add new pages to your book e Select images and have Aperture create new pages to hold them e Add images to new pages that use a specific master page design Add index pages that show thumbnails of all the images in the book Part Ill Distribution and Backup Adding Individual Pages to a Book As you create a book you can create new pages one by one and add them to your book To add a single page to your book Select a page in the Pages panel where the new page should appear The new page will appear just after the selected page Choose Add New Page from the Add Pages pop up menu The new page appears in the Pages panel With the page selected in the Pages panel choose a master page from the Set Master Page pop up menu The new page now has the page layout you chose You can also duplicate pages within a book To duplicate a single page in your book Select a page in the Pages panel where the new page should appear The new page will appear just after the selected page Choose Duplicate Page from the Add Pages pop up menu A new page appears in the Pages panel With the page selected choose a master pag
226. e to attach to an email message later Select the image or images you want to export Choose File gt Export Version or press Command Shift E Navigate to the location where you want the exported images placed Choose an email export preset from the Export Preset pop up menu Choose a name format for your files from the Export Name Format pop up menu When you re ready to export files click Export You can now open your email application and attach the exported files Working with Export Presets Export presets are groups of saved export settings that help you quickly and easily export your images Aperture comes with numerous export presets and you can also create your own Controls in the Export Presets Dialog Before using an export preset whether it s one that comes with Aperture or one that you created you can view its settings to make sure they are exactly what you want Part Ill Distribution and Backup Available presets are shown here To view the settings for an export preset do one of the following Choose Aperture gt Presets gt Image Export With an image selected choose File gt Export Version or press Command Shift E and in the dialog that appears choose Edit from the Export Preset pop up menu The Export Presets dialog appears listing the presets available and the configurable export settings f Export Preset Name JPEG Original Size JPEG 50 of Original Size JP
227. e too long Overexposed scenes appear too bright and lack adequate details in the shadows See also exposure underexposed panning Moving the camera along with a moving subject in order to keep the subject in the frame Panning a fast moving subject with a slow shutter speed usually causes the subject to remain relatively in focus while the remaining areas of the scene are blurred or stretched in the direction of the camera movement See also camera panorama Usually refers to a scenic landscape image with a wide aspect ratio Photographers often digitally combine or stitch multiple images of the same scene to create a continuous panoramic image See also aspect ratio phase An attribute of color perception also known as hue See also hue photo edit The process of choosing selects as well as sorting out images from a group that you don t plan to use or publish also known as rejects The more aggressively you cull undesirable images from your working group of images the more time you save when you process the images for display See also rating Reject Select Glossary 445 446 photo printer A type of printer capable of producing photo quality images See also gamut dye sublimation inkjet printer offset press print RA 4 pick The image that represents the stack The pick is usually the best image in the stack See also alternate stack pixel The smallest discernible visual element of a digital image See also megapixel
228. ead shots can be difficult Even in head shots captured within a short time span the facial expressions of the subject can change ever so slightly By comparing images side by side and rating them you can more easily select among like images To compare and rate images Select the image that appears to be the best To set this image as the compare image choose Edit gt Set Compare Item or press Return The compare image appears in the Viewer and the Browser with a yellow border The next selected image appears with a white border immediately to the right of the compare image If you want to view another image against the compare image simply select it The alternate image you selected appears to the right of the compare image in the Viewer The alternate image has a white border a Img202 kee Img206 Chapter 9 Rating Images 195 196 If you have a second display and want to view each image on a different display choose View gt Secondary Viewer gt Span or press Option S Rate your compare image by doing one of the following To assign the Select rating Press Option backslash To increase the compare image s rating Press Option equal sign To decrease the compare image s rating Press Option hyphen e To assign the Reject rating Press Option 9 The rating appears as an overlay on the compare image Rate the alternate image by doing one of the following To assign the Select rat
229. eate new metadata presets that apply different combinations of metadata To create a new metadata preset To show the Metadata Inspector choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D Choose the metadata view that you want to use for the preset from the Metadata View pop up menu Enter the metadata you want applied to your images in the metadata fields Choose Save as Preset from the Metadata Action pop up menu In the dialog that appears enter a name for the new metadata preset then click OK Please enter a unique name for your metadata view or preset Cone E The new metadata preset now appears under the Append with Preset and Replace with Preset commands in the Metadata Action pop up menu To modify an existing metadata preset To show the Metadata Inspector choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D Choose the metadata view that you want to use for the preset from the Metadata View pop up menu Choose Replace with Preset from the Metadata Action pop up menu then choose the preset you want to modify Enter the changes you want in the metadata fields in the Metadata Inspector Choose Save as Preset from the Metadata Action pop up menu Give the metadata preset a new name then click OK If you want you can delete the previous metadata preset or rename presets by choosing Manage Presets from the Metadata Action pop up menu Part Il Photo Editing BW N Applying Combinations of Metadata Using
230. eb gallery album in the Projects panel Web Journal Web journal pages allow you to mix images and text manually on the page Web journals are ideal for projects in which you show photos with narrative to support them Unlike with a web gallery you manually add pages images and text to your web journal You can choose a theme to apply to all your pages and you can change the layout of images and text on your web journal pages 6T come 5 Fit images within Rectangle 4 225 E 150 gt Vietnam Travel Journal Revisiting Vietnam Stock Image 1 s vietnam2004 0405 vietnam2004 0378 Vietnamese rivers wind through ancient lands and natural wonders It was with great pleasure that we were able to take part in an informal expedition into the heart of this country 7 t Se Ls Apertura Sew AG ee ga 2B tora 4 gt Roma 3 images within Recipe EC 375 RIC 100 f Antarctica 2 2 Ur 2 o Rowe eoee OB kaa Chapter 18 Creating Webpages To create a web gallery or web journal you create a web gallery or web journal album When you select the album in the Projects panel the Webpage Editor appears above the Browser The Webpage Editor is where you design your webpages including changing the theme positioning images and adding text Webpage Edit
231. ebpages Pages panel 54 359 367 page spreads 368 Page Template pop up menu 59 340 347 panning images 155 384 445 panoramas 445 Paper Size pop up menu 280 paper size settings 280 paper types 430 Paste Content command 386 pasting photo box contents 386 stamping See stamping patch adjustments 170 Patch tool 170 paths to hard disks 406 pausing slideshows 315 PC mode 91 Index PCI graphics cards 416 PDF files 281 283 phase 445 Photo Box Aspect Ratio command 385 photo box buttons 55 photo boxes adding and filling 367 372 383 aspect ratios 385 buttons 55 copying and pasting contents 386 deleting boxes 387 deleting images 386 image size choices 384 moving 385 overlapping 387 photo edits defined 445 Photo Filter pop up menu 55 367 388 photo printers 446 photos See images Photoshop files See PSD files Pick command 181 picks album picks 182 defined 176 446 marking images as 169 selecting 123 181 pixels copying 170 defined 446 display resolution 147 size in metadata 228 Placement pop up menu 228 placing images 327 374 376 377 placing metadata 228 planning backup systems 401 book layout 363 platform naming conventions 106 playing slideshows 312 320 PNG files 20 72 89 292 304 446 polarizing filters 446 pop up menus 85 237 240 portable computers working with vaults on 407 portfolios importing 90 portrait photo boxes 385 positives 446 posting webpages on Internet 348 preferences
232. ecifying a different folder for the Library in the Preferences window and then quitting and reopening Aperture You can also rename Library files as needed Thus you might have multiple Library files with different names in the same location and set Aperture to access the Library file you want To create a new empty Library file in a new location Choose Aperture gt Preferences or press Command comma Click Choose under the Library Location option Navigate to and select the folder where you want to place the new Library then click Select Quit Aperture and then reopen it By default Aperture creates a new Library file named Aperture Library It s recommended that you rename Library files to avoid any mix ups or the possibility of overwriting one Library file with another accidentally After renaming a Library file make sure to open Aperture and select the renamed Library file When you have multiple Library files and you want to switch between them you use the Preferences window to select the Library you want You then quit and reopen the application to complete the switch To access a different Aperture Library Choose Aperture gt Preferences or press Command comma Click Choose under the Library Location option Navigate to and select the Library you want then click Select Quit Aperture and then reopen it Part Interface and Acquisition Adding Times and Dates to Aperture Album Names It is common to di
233. ect either the camera a memory card or a mounted drive the Import dialog appears For more information see Import Panel on page 52 New Project Click this button to create a new project You will have the option to create an empty project a project with any images you ve selected or a project with all the images in the Browser New Album Click this button to create a new album containing your current image selection New Smart Album Click this button to create a new Smart Album For more information see Chapter 13 Grouping Images with Smart Albums on page 267 New Book Album New Web Gallery Album Click this button to create a new book album For more information see Chapter 19 Creating Books on page 357 Click this button to create a new web gallery album For more information see Chapter 18 Creating Webpages on page 333 New Light Table Album Click this button to create a new Light Table album For more information see Chapter 17 Using the Light Table on page 323 Email and Slideshow Buttons A Email Click this button to open your email program and attach selected images B Slideshow Click this button to initiate a slideshow of the selected images Part Interface and Acquisition Version Buttons A Duplicate Version Click this button to duplicate the selected image version with all applied metadata and adjustments B New Versio
234. ect or folder a favorite In the Projects panel select a project then choose Add to Favorites from the Project Action pop up menu To view favorite projects or folders In the Projects panel choose Show Favorites from the Projects pop up menu at the top left corner To remove a project or folder as a favorite In the Projects panel select a project then choose Remove From Favorites from the Project Action pop up menu Deleting Images from Projects and Albums Aperture allows you to delete versions separately from their digital master files You can also delete a master file and all its versions in a project If you delete a version in an album its master file and related versions are not deleted To delete a master file and all its versions from a project Select the image then choose File gt Delete Master Image and All Versions A dialog appears asking if you want to continue Click the Move to Trash button The digital master file and all versions are deleted Warning This action cannot be undone Once you click the Move to Trash button the master file is moved to the Trash All versions and their adjustments and metadata are permanently deleted To permanently remove the master file from your hard disk empty the Trash To delete only a version from an album Select the image then choose Images gt Remove From Album or press Delete The version is deleted The digital master file and its other versions ar
235. ected image e Stamp Use this tool to stamp or apply a copied set of adjustments to one or several images Part Il Photo Editing Other Buttons Show Master Image Adjustments HUD Always Show Loupe Toolbar Show Master Image Click this button to view the original master file without any applied adjustments Click again to switch the view back to the current version e Always Show Toolbar Click this button to keep the toolbar in view e Loupe Click this button to open the Loupe which you can use to minutely examine parts of an image Adjustments HUD Click this button to show or hide the Adjustments HUD Using HUDs in Full Screen Mode You can use any of the Aperture HUDs in Full Screen mode For example you can open a HUD when you want to add keywords or make adjustments to images HUDs are available for use in Full Screen mode and can make adjusting images easier Chapter 7 Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode 171 172 Use the Keywords HUD in Full Screen mode to quickly add keywords to your images Use the Adjustments HUD in Full Screen mode to remove flaws and make adjustments to your images Keywords HUD Use the Keywords HUD to create and organize keywords and to add keywords to your images For more information about applying keywords to images see Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images on page 199 To show the Keywords HUD press Shift H x Keywords Q Search L gt
236. ed on search criteria You specify where you want to search by selecting the Library or the project or album that contains the images you want To search for images across your entire Aperture portfolio select Library and click the Query HUD button to the right of the Library name When you enter search criteria in the Query HUD Aperture displays results from across all your projects 088 See Se ah SE ye All Projects v te Smart Settings Library iy gt ia Library Tae eae Match any of the following Qr E Sonoma County Fair Rating v Vietnam CEJ New Vietnam Aperture is greater than or equal to Specify your search criteria here owing Chapter 12 Searching for and Displaying Images no s New Smart Album New Album With Current Images 249 250 Select the project you want to search The most common reason to perform a search is to display a selection of images within a project By selecting a project and using the Query HUD you can quickly display specific images hiding the rest from view For example you might isolate and display only those images of a certain subject pose rating or location Your search doesn t change the contents of the project it only temporarily changes the images you view in the Browser If you cancel the search criteria in the Query HUD all of your images appear in the Browser again The Query HUD is preset to show images that are unrated or better
237. ed stack item farther from the stack s pick Chapter 7 Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode 169 170 Selection e Album Pick Select an image version to represent a stack then click this button to select the image as the pick within that particular album the stack can have a different pick image in another album e Open All Stacks Click this button to open all the image stacks in the album or project you re viewing e Close All Stacks Click this button to close all the image stacks in the album or project you re viewing Adjustment Tools Rotate Left Straighten Red Eye Lift i ieee Some Be bee Stamp Rotate Right Crop Spot amp Patch e Selection Use this tool to select images Rotate Left Use this tool to rotate an image counterclockwise e Rotate Right Use this tool to rotate an image clockwise e Straighten Use this tool to manually rotate an image so that it s straight in relation to a virtual horizon e Crop Use this tool to crop an image to a constrained aspect ratio or custom dimension Spot amp Patch Removes imperfections in the image such as sensor dust by either copying the pixels around the blemish spotting or copying pixels from another area of the image patching e Red Eye Use this tool to correct red eye occurring when the subject s retinas reflect light from your camera s flash e Lift Use this tool to copy a set of metadata and adjustments from a sel
238. eed to profile your camera depends on your workflow If you shoot JPEG files the camera has to apply a color space to the image file However if you shoot RAW files no profiling is necessary A RAW image file consists of bit for bit data captured by the digital image sensor When you select the RAW setting on your camera the camera ignores the color space settings When you import the RAW image into Aperture Aperture ignores the color space settings as well Profiling Your Camera Most digital cameras are set at the factory to shoot in a default color space when you first use them but each camera regardless of manufacturer and model has a unique gamut In order to color calibrate your camera you need to create a new custom profile Color calibrating your camera requires the purchase of a profiling package designed for profiling digital cameras a carefully constructed lighting environment dictated by the profiling package and the use of a color calibration target Because each camera is unique you must repeat the color calibration for each camera Using a Generic Profile Provided that your displays and printers are calibrated setting your camera to shoot using a generic profile such as sRGB is easier than profiling your camera Most digital cameras have more than one color space option available As the image is shot the camera converts the image from its native color space to the generic color space you selected prior to shooting the im
239. eeds To modify your pages you can use the procedures for working with photo text and metadata boxes presented earlier in this chapter To modify a master page you show master pages in the Master Pages panel and then add a new page or select the page you want to work on When you select a master page in the Master Pages panel the Book Layout Editor displays an enlarged view of the page Choose the master page Make layout changes to you want to work on here your master page here mesoa E Treme ra cate m aa T a T sen al T Title Information Here 1 up Landscape Small CECT mome EA OAA os Choose Show Master Pages from this pop up menu to show the Master Pages panel You can e View master pages Create new master page designs or modify existing master page designs e Create left and right facing page versions of a master page or combine left and right versions into one page e Update your book with changes made to the master pages on which the book pages are based Chapter 19 Creating Books 393 394 wu A U N U A A W N Viewing Master Pages To view and work on the master pages for a theme you must show the master pages in the Master Pages panel To show master pages Choose Show Master Pages from the Book Action pop up menu The Master Pages panel appears above the Pages panel showing thumbnails of the master pages for the selected theme
240. een mode 171 Full Screen mode and 171 functions and controls 61 working with 23 l ICC profiles 426 428 430 icons badge icons 243 tools 66 identifying referenced images 135 ID numbers 140 262 263 IEEE 1394 See FireWire If 131 image adjustments adjusting during export 301 Adjustments HUD 32 172 Adjustments Inspector 49 badge overlays 243 defined 433 editing prior adjustments 50 gamma adjustments 352 HUDs for tools 62 173 lifting 170 types of 31 versions and 73 Image Date Time format 105 Image Display checkboxes 68 Image Export command 307 Image Format pop up menu 307 352 image indexes 367 378 Image Quality slider 302 307 352 images adjustments See image adjustments on book covers 380 comparing 27 146 150 digital master files See digital master files exporting See exporting file formats See file formats file information 126 finding See finding images 461 462 image tooltips 226 231 232 importing See importing images indexes 367 378 keywording See keywords legacy images 90 locations of 115 metadata in See metadata pick images 181 rating See rating images selecting 120 122 170 series of 177 sharing 32 slideshows See slideshows sorting See sorting images stacks See stacks storage space for 402 versions See versions Image Scale slider 384 image tooltips 226 231 232 Import 46 Import button 52 63 Import dialog 19 92 importing albums 46 importing images automatically naming 10
241. either side of this slider to rapidly shuttle through your filmstrip images The closer to the double arrows you click the more rapidly the filmstrip moves through its images You can also use the J K and L keys to shuttle through your images Scroll bar Use this to scroll through your images e Thumbnail Resize slider Drag the slider to change the size of the image thumbnails shown in the filmstrip The following controls are displayed on the left side of the filmstrip and control the images shown in the filmstrip Search field Query HUD button Qr Showing Al GO Rotate buttons JSS Navigation buttons Rating buttons Display controls Search Controls Search field Enter text images that match appear in the full screen view e Query HUD button Click this button to show the Query HUD From the Query HUD you can perform a quick search or create a new album to hold the contents of your search 166 Part Il Photo Editing Rotate Left Reject Viewer Mode pop up menu Rotate and Navigation Buttons Next Image Rotate Right Previous Image e Rotate Left Click this button to rotate the selected image counterclockwise e Rotate Right Click this button to rotate the selected image clockwise e Previous Image Click this button to display the previous image e Next Image Click this button to display the next image Rating Buttons Select Decrease Increase Rating Rating e Reject Clic
242. elected Images from the Add Pages pop up menu The selected images are added to your book Adding New Pages Based on a Master Page You can add pages that are based on a specific master page to your book To add a new page based on a master page to your book To show master pages choose Show Master Pages from the Book Action pop up menu Select a master page in the Master Pages panel Select a page in the Pages panel where the new page should appear The new page will appear just after the selected page Choose Add New Page From Master from the Add Pages pop up menu You can also select a master page and have Aperture place any unplaced images in new pages that are based on the master page To add pages based on a master page and have Aperture fill them with unplaced images To show master pages choose Show Master Pages from the Book Action pop up menu Select a master page in the Master Pages panel Select a page in the Pages panel where the new page should appear The new page will appear just after the selected page Choose Add New Pages From Master gt With Unplaced Images from the Add Pages pop up menu Aperture adds the unplaced images to new pages in your book All the pages are based on the selected master page You can also select images and have Aperture place them in new pages that are based on a master page Chapter 19 Creating Books 377 378 A WN To add pages based on a master page and have Aperture fi
243. electing the checkboxes As you select or deselect name elements the Example field automatically updates 7 When you re satisfied with the new name format click OK The new name format appears in the Export Name Format pop up menu When exporting images for specific uses such as for use on websites you may need to use filenames without spaces so that they are compatible with the intended application or website Aperture adds spaces to filenames depending on the name format you use You can easily modify name formats to remove spaces from filenames Part III Distribution and Backup To modify a name format to remove spaces 1 Choose Aperture gt Presets gt File Naming 2 Inthe Naming Presets dialog select the preset name format you want to modify Select the space between name elements and delete it Select the name format you want to modify 3 In the Format field select and delete the spaces or characters between the name elements If you wish you can also add spaces or characters between name elements 4 Click OK Adjusting Images at Export You can also apply final adjustments to images at export by choosing ColorSync profiles setting gamma adjustment and applying black point compensation Because these adjustments are applied at export your Aperture image versions and master files are not changed Only exported files receive image adjustments applied with an export preset Chapter 15 Exporting Your
244. embedded information A full image file is not created until you are ready to print or export saving valuable storage space on your hard disk In many cases your workflow may call for different renderings of the same image For example a client may request a color as well as a black and white version of the same head shot You can create multiple versions of the same image in Aperture at any time Versions e from Master 1 ate Versions e rh yes Master 2 Pictures Aperture folder Library file Master Computer i EN 3 Versions 3 1 i 3B from Master 3 Master When you create a version several things occur e Aperture reads the original master file on disk and displays it on the screen e As you make adjustments or add information to the image Aperture displays the image with your changes to the version but the original master file is never changed Chapter 3 Working with Aperture Projects 73 What Are Projects You organize your digital master files and versions using projects A project is a container consisting of image versions and their corresponding master files A project can hold up to 10 000 master files and you can create as many projects as you wish up to the limitations of your disk space For example you can create a new project for each of your shoots Or if you do several shoots of the same subject you may want to create a project that encompasses all of the shoots Projects are
245. ement pop up menus Part Il Photo Editing BW N Lea To set the display of metadata shown with images in the Browser Choose View gt View Options or press Command J Select the Grid View checkbox Choose the metadata views you want to use from the Set 1 and Set 2 pop up menus Choose the location where you want the metadata displayed from the Placement pop up menus Click the Set 1 or Set 2 button to select the metadata view you want displayed Click Done To turn the display of metadata on or off in the Browser Press U To switch between sets of Browser metadata information Press Shift U For more information about displaying metadata with your images see Chapter 11 Working with Metadata on page 225 Chapter 5 Working with Images in the Browser 143 Displaying Images in the Viewer The Viewer displays a detailed view of the image or images selected in the Browser You can view an image in incredible detail or view several images at a time This chapter provides instructions for displaying images in the Viewer so you can make adjustments closely compare similar images and inspect images at full resolution If you use a dual display system you can set the Viewer to show your images on both screens to provide stunning full detail views This chapter covers e An Overview of the Viewer p 146 e Showing or Hiding the Viewer p 148 Changing the Viewer Background p 148 Changing the Nu
246. en or print gamut by choosing View gt Highlight Hot Areas To adjust the threshold used to determine an image s hot areas drag the slider Aperture options checkboxes Select the Create new versions when making adjustments checkbox to have Aperture automatically create a new version when you adjust a selected image Select the Show warning when deleting masters checkbox to have Aperture display an alert message when you delete master image files When a camera is connected pop up menu Choose an application to open when a camera is connected to your computer Library Location field Displays the default location of the Library To specify a custom location for the Aperture Library click Choose and navigate to a location to store the Library Reopen Aperture to complete the location change Search Scope pop up menu Use this pop up menu to set your preferences for how Aperture searches You can have Aperture search for your entered text throughout all the metadata associated with your images or perform a limited text search that doesn t search through your images EXIF information Part Interface and Acquisition M Web Copyright field Enter copyright text for web galleries and web journals here N Previews options To set Aperture to create previews for the images in all new projects and new Libraries select the New projects automatically generate previews
247. ents keywords or other changes to an image Aperture marks the image with a badge overlay Badges can appear on images in the Viewer Browser and Light Table in book pages and webpages and in Full Screen mode How Badge Overlays Appear in Aperture The following table shows badges that appear on images in Aperture El A One or more adjustments have been applied to the image One or more keywords have been applied to the image Images are contained in a stack The number indicates the number of images in the stack Ol The image has been edited with the external editor and is therefore represented by the master file created when the file was exported to the external editor The image is an album s pick image the identifying image for that album web gallery album web journal album Light Table album or book album Because of low image resolution the image s print quality may be affected This badge appears on images placed in book pages and webpages The number indicates the number of times the image has been used in a given book web journal or Light Table arrangement The image has a referenced image master file F The referenced image s master file is offline J The referenced image s master file has not been found a Keywords and adjustments have been applied to this image Chapter 11 Working with Metadata 243 Displaying Images with Badge Overlays Badge visibility is
248. equal to 0 Unrated Choose how you want to Calendar qualify your search from this pop up menu more of the following T contains T Vienam m Enter an IPTC value here New Smart Album New Album With Current Images ry Choose an IPTC field to search by Chapter 12 Searching for and Displaying Images 259 260 Choose an option from the middle pop up menu to qualify your search Choose contains to specify characters that the IPTC field should contain somewhere within the field Choose does not contain to specify characters that the IPTC field should not contain Choose is to specify the exact characters that the IPTC field should contain Choose is not to specify the exact characters that the IPTC field should not contain Choose starts with to specify the characters that the IPTC field should begin with Choose ends with to specify the characters that the IPTC field should end with Choose is empty to specify that the IPTC field should hold no entry Choose is not empty to specify that the IPTC field can be any entry as long as the field is not empty Enter an IPTC value you want to search by in the IPTC text field 7 Choose any from the Match pop up menu if it s not already chosen The images that match the search criteria are immediately displayed in the Browser To save your search results see Saving Your Search Results on page 265 Searching by EXI
249. er and Browser p 42 Control Bar p 43 Toolbar p 45 Adjustments Inspector p 49 Metadata Inspector p 50 Import Panel p 52 Vaults Panel p 53 Book Layout Editor p 54 Webpage Editor p 57 Light Table p 60 Heads Up Displays p 61 Workspace Layouts p 64 Customizing the Toolbar p 65 Setting Aperture Preferences p 67 39 40 Browser The Aperture Main Window The Aperture main window contains the following areas Viewer 5 Mo e uheeoas OB La a Toolbar me Adjustments Inspector Y i French Polyresia and Tahiti L untitied Atoum Y Gy Fafing the Grand Canyon E Untied Album Wakatobi Lel Untited Album Metadata Inspector Vault EIEE w control bar Note The inspectors are not shown by default You can show or hide the Inspectors panel by pressing l Arranging the Interface Aperture provides three preconfigured workspace layouts Basic Maximize Browser and Maximize Viewer The areas in the Aperture interface are resizable and you can customize any of these workspaces to suit your workflow To view the workspace layout shown above choose Window gt Layouts gt Basic then press to show the Inspectors panel For more information about workspace layouts see Workspace Layouts on page 64 Part Interface and Acquisition Projects Panel The Projects panel holds containers projects folder
250. ere on the screen and use them to make changes For example Aperture provides a Keywords HUD that you can use to quickly assign keywords to your images To assign a keyword you simply drag it from the Keywords HUD to the image Cd Q Search Antarctica Personal Photo specs Photojournalism Stock categories Wedding Chapter 1 An Overview of Aperture 23 24 Working with Inspectors Aperture also provides an Adjustments Inspector for applying adjustments and a Metadata Inspector that allows you to review and assign metadata to your images You can show or hide the Adjustments and Metadata Inspectors together or individually whenever you want Showing the Inspectors panel is as easy as double clicking an image in the Browser or pressing the key eo Aperture r Sudusa Adjustments Inspector For more information about making adjustments and retouching your images see Performing Image Adjustments in the Aperture Help menu Part Interface and Acquisition Rating Images with Aperture You can rate images as you review them in the Viewer or the Browser or in Full Screen mode Rating controls appear below the Browser and in the filmstrip in Full Screen mode By selecting an image and clicking a rating button you can quickly rate images as rejected or assign them from one to five stars with five stars being the highest or Select rating Image ratings appear as easy to read ove
251. ering if you wish You cannot reposition page numbers on the page or change the format of the page numbers To turn on page numbering Choose Page Numbers gt Always from the Book Action pop up menu You can also choose the Automatic option to turn on page numbering When chosen the Automatic option displays page numbers on pages when no images appear behind them To turn off page numbering Choose Page Numbers gt Off from the Book Action pop up menu Part Ill Distribution and Backup Rebuilding a Book If you ve made modifications to the design of a book and you want to start over with an unmodified design you can have Aperture rebuild your book Aperture rebuilds the book structure using the default series of master page designs and adds your images to the revised pages You lose any changes that you previously made to your pages You can have Aperture place all the images in the Browser in the book or place selected images in the book To rebuild a book with all the images in the Browser Choose Rebuild Book With All Images from the Book Action pop up menu To rebuild a book with a selection of images Select the images you want to place in the book Choose Rebuild Book With Selected Images from the Book Action pop up menu Working with Images As you add images to your pages you can make adjustments to the page design You can adjust the position of images within photo boxes and change box sizes and locations on the page
252. eriodically Chapter 13 Grouping Images with Smart Albums 269 270 Collecting Images in a New Smart Album You can collect images based on any of the information you can search for using the Query HUD For example you can create a Smart Album that gathers images based on a specific keyword or a combination of keywords ratings dates or other metadata You can narrow or broaden the Smart Album search criteria in the Query HUD at any time To create a Smart Album that searches across the entire Library Select Library in the Projects panel Do one of the following Choose File gt New Smart gt Album or press Command Shift L Choose New Smart Album from the Add to Library pop up menu in the Projects panel e Click the New Smart Album button in the toolbar A new untitled Smart Album appears in the Projects panel Rename the Smart Album by entering the name you want In the Query HUD specify the search criteria you want For more information about using the Query HUD and specifying search criteria see Chapter 12 Searching for and Displaying Images on page 247 Click the Query HUD s close button Aperture finds the images matching the specified search criteria and displays them in the Browser You can now work with these versions of your images in the same way you work with images in any project or album To create a Smart Album that searches only within one project Select the project in the Projects panel D
253. ers An Overview of Searching p 248 Controls in the Query HUD p 252 Searching Across the Entire Library p 253 Searching by Image Name Caption or Other Text p 253 Searching by Keyword p 255 Searching by Date p 256 Searching by Rating p 258 Searching by IPTC Information p 259 Searching by EXIF Information p 260 Searching by Import Session p 261 Searching by File Status p 262 Searching by Other Metadata p 263 Searching by a Combination of Criteria p 264 Saving Your Search Results p 265 247 An Overview of Searching Aperture provides a pop up menu in the search field of the Browser that allows you to quickly display images by rating and change how Aperture performs searches Search field Te ae pop up menu or Better l or Better wkw or Better kikk or Better kikik Show All Unrated Rejected Full text search Limited text search To have Aperture search for images by rating you can choose a rating level from the pop up menu You can also have Aperture perform full text searches or limited text searches When you choose Full text search from the pop up menu Aperture searches for any text entered in the search field throughout all the metadata associated with your images If you choose Limited text search Aperture searches for any entered text but doesn t search through the EXIF IPTC badge or custom metadata associated with images However a limited text
254. ery HUD button beside the search field in the Browser The Browser s Query HUD appears and any search criteria you specify change the results you see in the Browser For information about entering search criteria in the Query HUD to perform different kinds of searches see the sections about specifying search criteria that follow Searching by Image Name Caption or Other Text You can search for images using any text that you ve associated with an image For example you might search for images based on text in an image s caption or keywords or in any other text entry You can also search by multiple text entries To search for images by text 1 In the Projects panel select a project or an album you want to search 2 Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser Chapter 12 Searching for and Displaying Images 253 3 In the Query HUD enter the text you want to search for in the search field 6 Match any of the following Rating is greater than or equal to J Unrated Enter the text you want Calendar to search for in this field Keywords import Session is one or more of the following New Smart Album New Album With Current images You can enter multiple text items separating them by commas Aperture locates any images that have a match for all the text items The images that match the searc
255. es 141 stacks in 176 working with 21 browsing through keywords 209 Bulb setting B 435 burning 435 bus powered hard disks 416 Buy Book button 56 368 buying books See ordering books byline based web journal pages 347 bylines in metadata 229 242 Index C cables 414 Calendar search options 256 calibration camera profiles 427 color management and 423 color spaces and 425 ColorSync Utility and 425 custom device profiles 307 352 defined 435 device profiles 426 display calibration 278 421 428 printer profiles 430 proofing profiles 156 cameras camera profiles 427 connecting to computers 414 connection modes 91 defined 435 importing images from 19 92 96 importing selected images 95 metadata 228 resolution settings 278 shutter speeds and settings 50 supported digital cameras 20 camera shake 435 Camera Time Zone pop up menu 110 captions in metadata 228 242 in Metadata Inspector 50 searching for images by 253 capturing images 435 card readers connecting to computer 414 ejecting cards 94 erasing cards 94 importing files from 19 91 96 importing selected images 95 carriage return characters 106 categories adding to metadata sets 236 deleting 236 in IPTC and EXIF metadata 229 metadata character limits 242 category based web journal pages 347 CCDs Charged Coupled Devices 435 centering images 384 center weighted metering 435 changing the location of images 100 characters in filenames 1
256. es by date In the Projects panel select a project or an album you want to search Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser In the Query HUD select the Calendar checkbox 6 Match any of the following Rating Ts greater than or equal to Y calendar August 2004 September 2004 October 2004 SMTWTFS S2uoT WOT Le Ss SMTWTF S 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 Keywords Import Session is one or more of the following New Smart Album New Album With Current Images ry Select the date or dates you want to search by Shift click to select a range of continuous dates Command click to select multiple noncontinuous dates Choose any from the Match pop up menu if it s not already chosen The images that match the search criteria are immediately displayed in the Browser To save your search results see Saving Your Search Results on page 265 Part Il Photo Editing Select the Date checkbox O uu A WwW Images that you import from sources other than cameras and card readers such as JPEG or TIFF files may not have EXIF information associated with them However they typically have a creation date assigned to the file You can use this creation date to locate images using the Date search options To search for images by creation date In the Projects panel select a project or
257. es to appear in a different position in your book you can drag them in the Pages panel You can also add an index of metadata for the images to your book Part Ill Distribution and Backup To add a metadata index to your book Choose Create Index from the Book Action pop up menu Aperture adds index pages to the end of your book and updates the index with the metadata information from your images You can change the metadata that appears in the index by selecting metadata boxes and changing the metadata format using the Metadata Format pop up menu Metadata Format pop up menu Working with Pages As you work with your book pages you can make a variety of design and text changes You can Create a cover for a softcover or hardcover book Choose a master page design for your pages Copy pages Reorder pages in a book Remove pages from a book Choose a background image for a page Add page numbers to your pages Rebuild a book Chapter 19 Creating Books 379 380 Large Hardcover button Creating a Cover for Your Book When you create a new book album Aperture automatically creates a front cover page for your book You can select the page and add a title cover image or design and other text or images that you like You can also choose between a softcover or hardcover design Softcover designs have a white background but when you select a hardcover design and purchase printed copies of the book from Apple s pr
258. ese keywords to your images when exporting to JPEG TIFF and PSD file formats Remember that applying metadata at export applies all the metadata attached to your image If your image version has metadata that you don t want exported create an image version that includes only the metadata intended for export Note The PNG file format does not support the inclusion of metadata To include metadata with images at export Select the image or images you want to export Choose File gt Export gt Export Version or press Command Shift E Navigate to the location where you want the exported images placed Choose Edit from the Export Preset pop up menu In the Export Presets dialog select the export preset you want to use to export your images Select the Include Metadata checkbox 7 Click OK Choose a name format for your exported files from the Export Name Format pop up menu Click Export The metadata is included in your exported images Exporting Metadata Listed in a Separate File You can select images and export the metadata assigned to them in a tab delimited text file The text file lists the version name ratings keywords and other metadata assigned to the image To export image metadata in a text file Select the images whose metadata you want to export Choose File gt Export gt Export Metadata Select the location where you want the file stored then click Export Metadata Aperture exports the metadata in
259. ete key Changing Text on Web Gallery Pages Depending on the theme you choose for your web gallery pages may appear with titles subtitles or headings You can change the sample text to text appropriate for your web gallery To change titles and subtitles on web gallery pages Click the title subtitle or heading you want to change then type the text you want Hiding or Showing Image Plate Numbers in Web Galleries You can turn on or off the display of plate numbers in your web galleries Aperture is preset to not display plate numbers for images To turn on the display of plate numbers in a web gallery In the Webpage Editor choose Enable Plate Metadata from the Metadata View pop up menu Chapter 18 Creating Webpages 345 346 Working with Web Journal Pages As you work with a web journal you can add images and text to pages add pages choose header types delete pages and change the page order Adding Arranging and Deleting Images and Text on Web Journal Pages When you create a web journal you must manually place your images and add text To add images to a web journal page Drag images from the Browser to the page in the Webpage Editor You can also drag several images into place at once by selecting and dragging groups of images For example if your webpage is set to display four images per row you can arrange four images in the order you want them and then drag all four to the page at once To move images on a
260. ew two projects in the Browser side by side When you finish working and quit Aperture Aperture remembers which projects were open The next time you open Aperture all projects that were open at the end of your last session open automatically To open a project Select the project in the Projects panel Select a project to view its images in the Browser All images in the project appear in the Browser 80 Part Interface and Acquisition To open additional projects in the Browser Command click a project in the Projects panel The newly opened project appears in the Browser with its own tab in front of any other open projects To open another project in its own pane Option click a project in the Projects panel The newly opened project appears in the Browser in its own pane To switch between several open projects In the Browser click a project s tab Projects are identified by their tabs To close a project Click the project s tab to bring it to the front Do one of the following e Choose File gt Close Tab or press Command W Click the tab s close button Close button in a tab Chapter 3 Working with Aperture Projects 81 82 Creating and Showing Favorite Projects If you have certain projects that you work on most often or projects that you work on together you can make them favorites to quickly view them all at the same time To make a proj
261. f the Light Table The Light Table is used to arrange and view images You can work with images in the Light Table just as you would work with slides on a physical light table You can place a selection of images in the Light Table for review and drag them to new positions arranging grouping and resizing them in different combinations to see how they might look on webpages or book pages You never run out of space in the Light Table it grows as you add images to it and it s easy to adjust the view by zooming in or changing the area of the Light Table that s shown gt je Gunana sm eer na Noe4seces OB wa tira a m 3 a You can use the Light Table when color correcting many related photos You can arrange related images together and carefully compare the color values between images You can also use the Light Table to sort images into related piles After sorting you can select groups of images and assign keywords to all the images in a group at once You can use the Light Table to create editorial layouts as well arranging images onscreen to tell a story You can put the selects from a given project in the Light Table and arrange them so that they progress visually eliminating repetitive images As you group and pair images of the same subject you ll find the Light Table ideal for examining the relationships between images Part III Distribution and Backup Creating a Light Table Album
262. fferentiate albums in a project by adding the dates to the album names If you add dates to an album name avoid using special characters like the slash since that may be interpreted by Mac OS X as a file separator Quickly Accessing Commands You can access commands via a shortcut menu as an alternative to using the menu bar at the top of the screen or pop up menus within a window To view the shortcut menu Position the pointer over the Projects panel then Control click Note Although accessing commands from shortcut menus can help you work more quickly keep in mind that not all commands are available in shortcut menus Chapter 3 Working with Aperture Projects 85 Importing Images Aperture provides tools and workflow options that make it easy to import your images This chapter describes a variety of methods for importing images into Aperture You can import images directly from your camera or card reader import images stored on your computer hard disk or other storage devices import your iPhoto Library and more This chapter covers An Overview of Importing Images p 88 File Formats You Can Import into the Library p 89 Planning Your Import Strategy p 90 Importing from Your Digital Camera or Card Reader p 91 Importing Image Files Stored on Your Computer p 97 Automatically Naming Your Imported Images p 105 Adding Metadata to Images During Import p 108 Creating Stacks Automatically Durin
263. for your web gallery or web journal pages When you choose or change a theme Aperture updates all your pages to use the new theme After a theme is applied to your pages you can modify it by changing the number and size of images on the page You can also display images with metadata and have copyright information appear on your webpages Choosing a Theme The theme you choose for your pages determines the basic template design of the page Make sure to explore the themes to see which best suits your work Part Ill Distribution and Backup To choose a theme for your web gallery or web journal pages 1 Click the Site Theme button at the top left corner of the Webpage Editor 2 2 8 Choose Web Theme Aperture Themes pe ppp fat E e re kite Y a m GUT Art Collection Picture Proof Special Occasion Cora 2 Select the theme you want to use then click Choose Changing the Number of Images on Webpages After you ve chosen a theme you can modify how many images appear on each page Columns value slider Columns 4 3 Rows 4 3 gt Left and right arrows Note When a web journal is open in the Webpage Editor only the Columns value slider is available You can manually add as many rows of images to a page as you need To change the number of columns and rows of images on the page Double click in the number field of the Columns or Rows value slider and enter a new number or click the le
264. formation as a standard Unicode text file that you can open and use with any application that uses text files Part Ill Distribution and Backup Exporting Using Plug Ins Some applications or photography services supply plug ins that set up Aperture to export files automatically with the format and settings the application or service requires For example a stock photography service or print lab may require that images be transferred to them at a specific size a specific file format or with particular types of metadata Such a service can create its own plug in that automatically sets up Aperture to export files with precisely the characteristics the service needs To use an export plug in you must first obtain the plug in software from the service or application vendor and install it Third party plug ins for Aperture are stored in the following location Library Application Support Aperture Plug ins Export To export images using a third party plug in Select the images you want to transfer Choose File gt Export then select the plug in that you wish to use Exporting Images to Use in Email While it s not the best method for delivering uncompressed or large image files email provides a quick and easy way to deliver images Aperture contains three export presets Email Small Email Medium and Email Original Size that create compressed JPEG files that are easy to send via email If these export presets don t meet your needs you c
265. ft or right arrow When you change the number of columns and rows Aperture automatically updates all your webpages to reflect the new settings Chapter 18 Creating Webpages 343 344 Resizing the Images on Webpages You can increase or decrease the size of images on your pages To change the size of images on the page From the Fit images within pop up menu choose whether you want the images to be spaced according to their longest edge or both edges To increase or decrease the image size double click in the number field of the Height and Width value sliders and enter new numbers or click the left or right arrows Width value slider Height value slider Fit images within Rectangle 3 4 175 T 150 Choose how you want your images to fit on the pages from this pop up menu Displaying Images with Metadata You can specify that your images appear with metadata on your web gallery or journal pages You can choose different combinations of metadata to appear on your pages For example you might display your web gallery pages with a simple set of metadata that includes the filename caption and image date Metadata View pop up menu E Theme stock Columns 1 4 gt Rows 7 3 Fit images within Rectangle gt 4 175 E 4 100 Antarctica Under The Ice Stock Image 11 Stock Image 12 ANTI33 ANTI32 v4 export Web Pages PublishtoMac
266. g Images on page 247 Part Interface and Acquisition Comparing Photos Aperture allows you to carefully compare images You select an image and press Return to have Aperture display it for comparison against other images in a selection hosnztecas Q veut Select an image and Select an image for press Return to select it comparison by pressing as the compare image the arrow keys While comparing images you can rate the selected images or make adjustments to them For example you might use the comparison method to make final selections of the best images in a series Or you might compare two versions of an image and make adjustments Chapter 1 An Overview of Aperture 27 28 The Stack button indicates the number of images in the stack Only the pick image is shown when the stack is closed Stacking Images Photographers frequently work with large selections of images To help you work efficiently with a series of shots such as bracketed shots or shots taken in quick succession Aperture can automatically stack related shots You can also select and manually stack related shots yourself and review them for a pick the image that you intend to use A stack with five images is shown expanded or open E Custom 1 Once photos are in a stack you can work with them as if they were a single image instead of many individual photos A s
267. g Import p 109 Adjusting the Image File s Time When Importing p 110 Dragging Files from the Finder to the Projects Panel p 110 Importing Folders of Images from the Finder p 111 Importing Your iPhoto Library p 112 Transferring Projects from Another System p 114 Making an Immediate Backup p 114 Where Aperture Stores Your Managed Files in the Library p 115 87 88 An Overview of Importing Images When you import from a camera or card reader Aperture places the images in a project If you don t select an existing project a new one is created automatically As Aperture imports images it generates a version file and an image thumbnail corresponding to each digital master file Import D Versions Aperture Library Hels T Digital RAW system disk master files amp JPEG Importing to Aperture Back up Camera FireWire drive You can import digital master images directly from a camera or card reader and from your hard disk drives When you import images you can choose whether to have the digital master files stored in the Aperture Library or store them on your hard disk outside of the Library where they can be accessed as referenced images For more information about referenced images see What Are Managed Images and Referenced Images on page 76 PartI Interface and Acquisition As you import images you can have Aperture automatically name and record informati
268. g Through Webpages p 341 Choosing and Modifying Themes p 342 Working with Web Gallery Pages p 345 Working with Web Journal Pages p 346 Exporting Webpages p 348 Working with Web Export Presets p 351 333 334 An Overview of Creating Webpages Web delivery is convenient when time won t allow office visits or delivery of prints to clients Photographers around the world currently benefit from web distribution of their works providing clients with online access to galleries of their best images Building a web portfolio for prospective clients can extend the reach of your photography business and reputation globally Using Aperture you can create two types of webpages web galleries and web journals Both are based on themes or page designs are easily editable and can be posted to the web Web Gallery Web gallery pages are designed to display images without your having to lay out pages by hand Aperture automatically creates the appropriate number of webpages and populates them with the selected images You can then adjust the pages to make the images appear as you want them You can also choose the metadata information that appears next to each image such as captions names and ratings D Columns 74 gt Rows 7 3 gt Fit images within Rectangle 4 175 E 4 100 Antarctica aeon web rao reimo e e Part III Distribution and Backup W
269. ge media e Versions Files derived from the digital master files and used to display your images with any changes you ve made including image adjustments or changes to metadata e Projects Containers that hold digital master files versions and albums Projects can hold up to 10 000 digital master files although it s recommended that for practical usage you limit the number of files both digital master files and versions below 10 000 e Albums Containers that hold versions You can create albums to organize images within projects or outside of them e Folders Containers used to organize projects and albums e Library The Aperture database that records and tracks your digital master files and all corresponding versions You can also create multiple Aperture Library files in different locations The Library tracks all the information about projects and albums you create to organize your images e Managed and referenced images Master files stored in the Aperture Library are called managed images because Aperture manages the location of the images in its database Managed images are physically located in the Aperture Library file in the Pictures folder You can also import images into Aperture without storing the digital master files in the Library Images that are not stored in the Library file are called referenced images Aperture links to referenced images in their current locations on your hard disk without placing them in the Apertur
270. ge sensors 438 digital master files copying versions of 131 creating projects 74 creation dates 257 defined 72 444 deleting 82 132 133 displaying 156 171 exporting 293 importing into projects 88 location of 115 228 versions of 73 digital noise 439 digital photos See images digital point and shoot cameras 439 digital single lens reflex cameras DSLRs 439 Digital Visual Interface DVI ports 418 digitization 439 digitizing images 439 disclosure triangles 63 79 207 403 439 disconnecting hard disks 406 display adapters 416 display controls 43 displaying Adjustments Inspector 49 51 adjustment tool HUDs 62 all images 193 badges 244 Book Layout Editor 358 digital master files 156 171 existing vaults 405 export presets 306 351 favorite projects 82 filmstrip 168 full resolution images 147 155 Full Screen mode 164 hot areas 154 keyword controls 213 215 keywords 202 205 Keywords HUD 63 207 208 209 210 211 Light Table adjustments 329 master pages 394 metadata 142 158 228 232 metadata sets 233 457 multiple displays See dual displays overlapping images in Light Table 329 overlays 204 pages in books 370 page spreads in books 368 panels with keyboard shortcuts 65 projects 79 Smart Album contents 268 stacks 151 storage space available 403 toolbar 169 unrated images 193 Viewer 148 watermarks 303 308 webpages 341 342 zooming in or out to view book pages 371 displays calibration 278 307 421 color mana
271. gement 423 defined 439 device profiles 426 extended desktop or mirroring mode 419 Full Screen mode 164 gamut 424 HUDs See HUDs Light Table adjustments 329 multiple displays See dual displays proofing images on 286 rearranging 420 slideshows 312 316 Display Size slider 56 368 371 Dissolve slideshow preset 312 314 distorting adjustments 439 distributing images Light Table review 34 329 methods 32 printing books 36 slideshows 33 web galleries 34 web journals 35 webpages 334 dividing stacks 109 183 dodging 439 dot gain 439 dot per inch dpi print resolution 280 dots per inch dpi 307 439 double sided printing 371 dpi dots per inch 307 439 DPI field 280 dragging filmstrip 168 folders into projects 112 images from Smart Albums 134 images in Browser 128 images in Light Table 326 327 images in stacks 184 Index images into books 361 372 images into projects 110 images into stacks 183 images into web galleries 337 images into web journals 340 keywords for images 207 keywords in preset groups 217 panning view of images 155 stacks 184 drift 423 439 drivers for hardware 416 drop shadows 439 DSLRs digital single lens reflex cameras 439 dual displays 157 417 421 calibrating 429 configuring 419 421 Full Screen mode and 23 164 PCI graphics cards and 416 primary and secondary Viewer 148 slideshow choices 316 slideshows and 316 320 duplex printing 371 Duplicate Book command 396 Duplicate Page command 375 37
272. ges Vault 1 83 4GB of 232 8GB available _ E e J Disclosure triangle Vault Status button E Backup Disk Vault 1 Vault 2 83 4GB of 232 8GB available k F l to 7 Backup Disk Vault 2 r a j Vault Action E Vault lt amp amp pop up menu Update All Vaults Vaults Panel button button You can create multiple vaults to provide duplicate backups Each vault holds a backup copy of the entire Aperture Library After you import new images into Aperture you should immediately make a backup of the newly imported files Once the images are backed up you can depend on the reliable Aperture backup functions to track all the versions of your photos and the work you have done with them For an explanation of the Aperture backup and archiving features see Chapter 20 Backing Up Your Images on page 399 Part Interface and Acquisition The Aperture Interface The Aperture interface is modeled around acquiring editing processing and distributing photos This chapter describes the names and functions of the Aperture interface elements Use this chapter to orient yourself while learning Aperture To find detailed information about the concepts described in this chapter read the chapter about the topic You can also search for terms associated with Aperture in the index and glossary This chapter covers The Aperture Main Window p 40 Projects Panel p 41 View
273. ges After creating a stack choose Edit gt Undo or select the stack and choose Stacks gt Unstack or press Command Shift k Chapter 8 Stacking Images and Making Picks 179 180 Tips for Creating Stacks Quickly and Efficiently One secret to an efficient photo edit is to quickly group related images into stacks before rating Here is a suggested method for quickly creating multiple stacks in a fast initial pass through your images To create multiple stacks quickly Drag related images into easily selectable rows or groups Adjacent images are the easiest to select when creating stacks Select an image at one end of the series Holding down the Shift key press the Right or Left Arrow key to quickly select additional images To select individual images that are not adjacent Command click the images Press Command kK to create the new stack Press Shift K to close the stack Tip To quickly move from stack to stack in the Browser press Option Page Up or Option Page Down Working with Stacks When working with stacks you can Open and close stacks Designate a pick image for a stack Designate an album pick for a stack Arrange images in a stack Add images to and remove images from stacks Split stacks Drag stacks to new locations Work with stacks in list view Work with stacks in Full Screen mode Part Il Photo Editing Only the pick image is shown when the stack is closed Opening and Closing S
274. ges To help identify your images as you work with them you can set Aperture to display the metadata associated with images in the Viewer You can display keywords ratings EXIF information IPTC information and more You can specify whether the information appears below the image or across the bottom of the image You can also specify up to two sets of predefined information displays For example one set of Viewer options can be configured to show ratings only and another set to show all the IPTC information associated with an image You can then switch between sets to change the information that appears with your images Part II Photo Editing 1 The View Options window lets you choose how you want to view images A U N ao U To set the display of metadata shown with images in the Viewer Choose View gt View Options or press Command J Select the Viewer checkbox Choose the metadata views you want to use from the Set 1 and Set 2 pop up menus Choose the location where you want the metadata displayed from the Placement pop up menus You can choose whether you want the metadata to appear over the bottom edge of the image or below the image Click the Set 1 or Set 2 button to select the metadata view you want displayed Click Done To turn the display of metadata on or off in the Viewer Press Y To switch metadata views in the Viewer Press Shift Y For more information about using metadata see
275. ges YPF A new album is created containing the images you selected Deleting a Smart Album You can delete a Smart Album at any time and none of the images gathered from the Library are deleted If you ve transferred images from a Smart Album to another album the images in the other album are also not deleted when you delete the Smart Album To delete a Smart Album 1 Select the Smart Album in the Projects panel 2 Choose File gt Delete Smart Album or press Command Delete Chapter 13 Grouping Images with Smart Albums 273 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Chapter 20 Part Ill Distribution and Backup This section describes methods of printing exporting and publishing your images for viewing It also provides information about setting up and maintaining your backup systems Printing Your Images Exporting Your Images Creating Slideshow Presentations Using the Light Table Creating Webpages Creating Books Backing Up Your Images Printing Your Images Aperture makes it easy to print high resolution images You can print single images contact sheets webpages and books You can also print images selected in the Light Table This chapter provides information about several methods for printing your images including creating PDF files that you can easily transfer to clients for review This chapter covers e An Overview of Printing p 277 Controls in the Prin
276. ges appears with a thick white border You can change the primary image in a selection without changing the number of images selected by pressing the Left or Right Arrow key 1 of 42 images selected a o fl ammm OO COCO OO J Primary Only button Aperture is preset to have the Primary Only feature turned off which applies your changes to all the images in a selection To apply a change to only the primary image of a selection of images Click the Primary Only button If you discover that a change was applied to only one image when you expected it to change multiple selected images check to see if the Primary Only button is selected Part II Photo Editing Working with Images in Grid View Grid view displays a grid of thumbnails as a top level view of your project Grid view is the Browser s default view If your project has many images you may want to adjust the size of the thumbnails to a size convenient for selecting and working with them You can also use the Shuttle control or scroll bar to scroll through the images Shuttle control Scroll bar E mwm OO g0 CO M Thumbnail Resize slider To switch to grid view do one of the following Choose View gt Grid or press Control G Click the Grid View button in the Browser Grid View button eet Image Date om fa To adjust thumbnail size Drag the Thumbnail Resize slider to increase or
277. ges by corresponding file data such as image date file size or rating m image date 4 a Showing ai 8 Version Name Badges Rating i Aperture Shutt BE vietnam2004 0040 8 11 04 3 33 42 AM PDT f28 1 200 Hid vietnam2004 0062 8 11 04 4 52 15 AM POT f4 1 30 I vietnam2004 0159 8 12 04 12 16 41 AMPDT 7 1 F vietnam2004 0220 8 12 04 3 55 51 PMPDT f7 1 1 60 TA vietnam2004 0231 8 12 04 5 51 02 PMPDT f45 1 80 W vietnam2004 0243 8 12 04 7 32 26 PMPDT 2 8 1 50 N vietnam2004 0340 8 13 06 8 13 51 PM PDT 2 8 1 80 vietnam2004 0378 8 14 04 12 15 57 AM PDT f5 yi EA vietnam2004 0382 8 14 04 12 16 37 AM PDT t8 Niy 1 selected 46 images displayed aQ E List view is a great way to quickly see information about your files You can also use list view to sort your images by any of the column categories Click the category column heading to sort your images by that category You can also customize the information that appears with your images For example you can set your images to appear with filename IPTC data and EXIF data You can change what information appears in the Browser in grid and list views by customizing view options For more information see Displaying Specific Metadata with Your Images on page 142 If you make a mistake while editing in most cases you can choose the Undo command to immediately cancel your last action In fact you can choose the Undo command multiple t
278. gin placing images in the Light Table Chapter 17 Using the Light Table 325 326 Placing and Viewing Images in the Light Table After adding images to the Light Table album you can select the ones you want to work with and place them in the Light Table for viewing To add images to the Light Table Select a Light Table album in the Projects panel then drag images from the Browser to the Light Table E a E aoi to the Light Table Simply drag images from the Browser To remove an image from the Light Table Select the image then click the Put Back button Click the Put Back 52 ae button to remove a a selected image The image disappears from the Light Table but remains available in the Browser If you have many images in a Light Table album it may be difficult to remember which images you haven t yet placed in the Light Table You can set the Browser to show only those images that haven t been placed in the Light Table Part III Distribution and Backup To see only images in the Browser that remain unplaced Click the Show Unplaced Images button Show Unplaced Images button Show All Images button Qy ShowingA 9 To see the entire contents of the Light Table album in the Browser Click the Show All Images button Making Adjustments to Images in the Light Table You can t select and use the Crop Straighten Spot amp Patch and Red Eye tools in the to
279. h criteria are displayed in the Browser To save your search results see Saving Your Search Results on page 265 To search for images by multiple text entries 1 In the Projects panel select a project or an album you want to search 2 Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following e Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser 3 In the Query HUD add as many text fields as you need by choosing Text from the Add Filter pop up menu multiple times x Filter Vietnam Match BAYT of the following Qr Mekong Choose Text from the Rating is greater than or equal to Unrated Add Filter pop up menu Calendar Keywords Import Session is one or more of the following New Smart Album New Album With Current images 4 Select the Text checkboxes and enter text in each field to locate the images you want x Filter Vietnam Match any of the following Qr Quick Search Rating is greater than or equal to Calendar Select the Text checkboxes and enter import Session is one or more of the following text in each text field V Tex Vietnam2004 0040yPG you added Rewer V Text Mietnam2004 0042 PC New Smart Album New Album With Current images 5 Choose any from the Match pop up menu to locate images that have matches for any of the text entries or choose all to locate images that have matches for all of the text entries
280. h the slideshow Press the Left Arrow key To stop the slideshow Press Esc Escape The slideshow stops playing and your Aperture workspace reappears Arranging the Order of a Slideshow s Images You can arrange the order of images in your slideshow To arrange the order of your slideshow s images Before creating the slideshow arrange the image thumbnails in the Browser in the order that you want them to appear in the slideshow You can then play your slideshow by following the instructions in the previous section Controlling a Slideshow Controls in the Slideshow Presets Dialog The Slideshow Presets dialog contains options for creating and modifying existing slideshow presets In it you can choose how many images to display at a time how those images are arranged and how long each image is displayed in your slideshow You can also choose to play slideshows on one or two displays with custom background colors and music Chapter 16 Creating Slideshow Presentations 315 316 To open the Slideshow Preset dialog do one of the following Choose Aperture gt Presets gt Slideshow Choose File gt Slideshow or press Shift S then choose Edit from the Slideshow Preset pop up menu in the Run Slideshow dialog The Slideshow Presets dialog appears a Slideshow Presets Presets Timing Show images for fixed time Quality Best Dissolve nn Copy of Dissolve Duratio
281. he Loupe size To enlarge the size of the Loupe Choose View gt Increase Diameter or press Option Shift equal sign to increase the Loupe s size To increase the Loupe magnification Press Command Shift equal sign Press these keys repeatedly to increase magnification more To decrease the Loupe magnification Press Command Shift hyphen Press these keys repeatedly to decrease magnification more Using the Color Meter Aperture provides a built in Color meter you can use to sample the color values in an image and display them as RGB Lab or CMYK values Adjustments n t Color meter R214 G202 B190 L202 Daa a ea When you place the pointer over an image or thumbnail the color values are displayed in the Adjustments Inspector or Adjustments HUD You can also use the Loupe for a more accurate pixel selection and see the color values displayed within the magnified area of the Loupe Part Il Photo Editing Sampling Color Values The Color meter displays the color values of the pixels in the image beneath the pointer or the target area of the Loupe To use the pointer to sample the color values in an image Place the pointer over the area of the image where you want to sample the color values and view the values at the top of the Adjustments Inspector or Adjustments HUD Note When you select a large image with multiple adjustments applied ellipsis points
282. he Pictures folder Choose Choose from the Store Files pop up menu and select the folder you want Choose No folder from the Subfolders pop up menu to specify that the files be stored as separate individual files in the selected folder You can also specify that Aperture create and store your files in a hierarchy of subfolders with specific folder names For more information about specifying folders to hold your imported images see Importing Master Files for Referenced Images into Folders on page 103 Choose whether you want the image files moved or copied to a new location by clicking the Move files or Copy files button For more information about moving and copying files see Changing the Location of Images When You Import Them on page 100 7 Choose a naming convention from the Version Name pop up menu to specify how you want the images named For example choose Master Filename from the Version Name pop up menu to have your files stored using the current master filenames from your camera or card Choose a name format from the Version Name pop up menu to have your images stored using a specified name If you choose a custom name format enter the name you want in the Name Text field You can also apply the name format to the master image as well Choose Edit from the Version Name pop up menu to define a new naming scheme For more information about naming files see Automatically Naming Your Imported Images
283. he Deleted Images folder holds the deleted digital master files only it does not hold any information about versions or changes to your files You can open this folder and import the original digital master files To remove the deleted images from your hard disk move the files to the Trash To make the space these files occupied on both your internal and external hard disks available you have to empty the Trash choose Finder gt Empty Trash Chapter 5 Working with Images in the Browser 133 134 Dragging Images into Different Projects and Albums You can drag images into different projects and albums Depending on where you drag an image Aperture either moves or copies the image to the new location As a general rule when you drag an image into a different project Aperture moves the version and the corresponding digital master file into the new project When you drag an image into a different album Aperture copies the version into the album leaving the master file in the original location An image can be copied into any album in the same project or into albums in different projects The destination album can be an album book album Light Table album web gallery album or web journal album You can also change the result of dragging by holding down the Option key as you drag To copy an image into a different album Drag the image into another album in the Projects panel To move an image into a different album Option drag the i
284. he Query HUD or press Control 6 To view all images that are unrated or better Press Control grave accent To view rejected images only Press Control 8 Chapter 9 Rating Images 193 194 Including Image Rating in Your Workflow You can use image rating as part of your workflow to help reduce a large group of images to a smaller group of preferred images Sometimes you can accomplish the selection process in one pass especially if the group of images is small If the group is large additional rating and culling passes may be necessary Rating images with multiple passes can allow you to take a measured approach to the photo editing process You can systematically rate images and then remove levels of rated images from view to work with your best images Here is a suggested workflow for rating images in multiple passes To rate images in multiple passes Begin by assigning a Reject rating to all images that are clearly unacceptable If the Query HUD is set to show unrated images or better the default setting the rejected images immediately disappear In the next rating pass assign positive ratings to any images that deserve a rating of one star or higher Leave images you re uncertain about unrated To hide all unrated images show the Query HUD and specify a rating that is greater than or equal to one star as search criteria o Filter 2005 Match any of the following Qy Quick Search V Rating Ts gre
285. he location to place the Library then click Select Click Restore then click Restore again Chapter 20 Backing Up Your Images 409 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Part IV Appendixes and Glossary AVA This section describes the procedures for setting up and color calibrating your Aperture system and provides a glossary of photography and color management terms Setting Up an Aperture System Calibrating Your Aperture System Credits Glossary Index Setting Up an Aperture System Appendix Setting up the hardware for your system can be as simple as connecting your camera or card reader to your computer You can also set up a system that uses external hard disks and color calibrated displays This appendix provides instructions for setting up your computer system to use Aperture It provides instructions for setting up a basic system explains optional equipment that you might consider to enhance your system and explains how to set up additional displays For information about software and hardware requirements for using Aperture see the Before You Install Aperture document on the Aperture installation disc For information about installing software see the Installing Your Software booklet This chapter covers e Setting Up a Basic System p 414 e Optional Equipment to Consider p 415 e Setting Up Your System with Two Displays p 417 Configuring Mac OS X for Multiple Displays p 419 413
286. he photographer See also aperture priority exposure Glossary shutter speed The length of time the shutter is open or the digital image sensor is activated or charged Shutter speeds appear as fractions of a second such as 1 8 or 1 250 See also shutter Shuttle control A control in the Full Screen mode filmstrip that allows you to quickly advance through the images in the filmstrip See also filmstrip Full Screen mode sidelighting Light that hits the subject from the side perpendicular to the angle of the camera See also backlighting frontlighting silhouette An image in which the subject is a solid dark shape against a bright background Extreme backlighting such as a sunset can cause the silhouette effect when your subject is placed in the foreground See also backlighting foreground single image print Based on a print preset in Aperture a single image printed ona single sheet of paper slider In Aperture an interface element that can be dragged forward or backward to make an adjustment Sliders can be found in the Adjustments Inspector as well as in the Adjustments HUD See also adjustment HUD soft proof The onscreen simulation by a display of the expected output from a printer or press slide See positive slideshow An animated presentation of a series of images In Aperture slideshows can be combined with music to present a series of images across up to two displays Smart Album Dynamic albums in Aperture used
287. here the same contents appear on both displays Aperture may not work properly Appendix A Setting Up an Aperture System IV 419 To exit mirroring mode Choose Apple menu gt System Preferences _ 2 Click Displays then click Arrangement Note If the Arrangement button does not appear click the Detect Displays button If the Arrangement button still does not appear make sure the second display is properly connected to your computer For more information see Setting Up Your System with Two Displays on page 417 3 Deselect the Mirror Displays checkbox After you connect a second display your displays may show the arrangement of the desktop out of order For example the display that shows the hard disk icon and menu bar is typically on the left so that your desktop extends out to the right on the rightmost display To rearrange the position of the displays Choose Apple menu gt System Preferences _ 2 Click Displays then click Arrangement Note If the Arrangement button does not appear click the Detect Displays button If the Arrangement button still does not appear make sure the second display is properly connected to your computer For more information see Setting Up Your System with Two Displays on page 417 w Drag one of the blue rectangles representing one of the displays to match the position of the display on your desk 00o Cinema HD Display lt Show all Q
288. hoto Library Note You must upgrade to iPhoto version 5 0 4 or later before you can import photos from your iPhoto Library into Aperture If you choose not to import your iPhoto Library right away you can do it later Part Interface and Acquisition To import your iPhoto Library Choose File gt Import gt iPhoto Library Select the iPhoto Library folder using the file browser in the Import dialog Choose a location for the imported images by doing one of the following To store imported master image files in the Aperture Library Choose In the Aperture Library from the Store Files pop up menu e To import the files as referenced images stored in their current locations on your hard disk Choose In their current location from the Store Files pop up menu e To store imported master image files as referenced images in the Pictures folder on your hard disk Choose Pictures from the Store Files pop up menu To store imported master image files as referenced images in a location other than the Pictures folder Choose Choose from the Store Files pop up menu and select the folder you want Choose No folder from the Subfolders pop up menu to specify that the files be stored as separate individual files in the selected folder You can also specify that Aperture create and store your files in a hierarchy of subfolders with specific folder names For more information about specifying folders to hold your imported images
289. ibrating Your Aperture System Appendix The accuracy of your display and printer s ColorSync profile is critical to ensuring accurate color reproduction Aperture is a powerful digital image adjustment application but its power is limited to the accuracy of the devices that display and print your images This appendix provides information about color calibrating cameras displays and printers Whether you use a desktop inkjet printer or a professional lab prints your images calibrating your display and print devices and using custom profiles ensure predictable colors in your prints every time This chapter covers e An Overview of Color Management p 423 e Calibrating Your Camera p 427 e Calibrating and Profiling Your Display p 428 e Calibrating and Profiling Your Printer p 430 An Overview of Color Management Maintaining calibrated displays and printers is essential to good color management Every display and printer is unique As these devices age environmental conditions system configurations and changes in materials such as inks and paper affect the devices ability to reproduce color Changes in the way a device reproduces color over time are known as drift Maintaining good color management ensures that when you make adjustments to the colors in your digital images in Aperture these colors are faithfully reproduced on your display screen and on the printed page 423 424 What Is a Device s Gamut
290. ick Choose Choose where you want the watermark to appear on the image from the Position pop up menu To adjust the opacity of the watermark drag the Opacity slider to a new position When your re satisfied with how your watermark appears in the watermark preview area click OK Navigate to the location where you want the exported images placed Choose a name format for your exported files from the Export Name Format pop up menu Click Export Your files are exported with the watermark you created Tips for Creating High Quality Watermarks Use the following guidelines to create high quality watermarks for your images e Save your watermark as a osd Photoshop file with a transparent background e Create multiple sizes of your watermark so that you can select the one that is the best match for the output size of the exported image Note If a watermark file is larger than the image you want to export Aperture automatically scales the watermark down to fit the image Aperture does not scale watermarks up e After you create a watermark save it as part of an export preset so you can reuse it as often as you need Chapter 15 Exporting Your Images 303 304 U BW N on Applying IPTC Metadata and Keywords to Your Images Many publications use a standard set of image keywords the American Newspaper Publishers Association ANPA wire codes developed by the Newspaper Association of America are one example You can apply th
291. icult To help with this task you can organize related shots into stacks A stack is a set of similar or related images from which one image will be selected for use Aperture can automatically group such photos into stacks when you import them from a camera or memory card You can also select images and create stacks manually 175 176 The Stack button indicates the number of images in the stack Only the pick image is shown when the A stack appears in the Browser as a group of images The image that represents the stack called the pick is selected and displayed on the left You can select any image in the stack as the pick and it moves to the leftmost position in the stack You can rearrange the order of images in a stack For example you might choose an alternate image and position it next to the pick A Stack button appears in the upper left corner of the pick image in the stack indicating the number of images in the stack A stack with five images is shown expanded or open E custom 4 After creating a stack and selecting the pick you can close the stack by clicking the Stack button on the pick image When a stack is closed only the stack s pick image appears in the Browser Clicking the Stack button again expands the stack By closing stacks you quickly reduce the number of images you have to sort through when selecting images in the final photo edit Important The purpose of stacking is to
292. ield Important You can use keyboard shortcuts to quickly implement a search that displays images with specific ratings or images that have a specific keyword It s possible while working with images to accidentally press such a keyboard shortcut and see the number of images on your screen unexpectedly change or even disappear If this happens you can quickly display your images by clicking the Reset button with an X in the search field to reset the search criteria in the Query HUD Chapter 5 Working with Images in the Browser 127 128 When viewing the contents of albums including Smart Albums in the Browser you may not be able to see images with a rating of Reject This is because the Browser Query HUD is set to show unrated images or better To view rejected images you must set the Browser Query HUD to show all images To set the Browser Query HUD to show all images In the Projects panel select an album In the Browser click the Query HUD button with a magnifying glass icon In the Query HUD deselect the Rating checkbox All images including rejects appear in the Browser and Showing All appears in the Browser s search field To set the Browser Query HUD to show rejected images only In the Query HUD make sure the Rating checkbox is selected Choose is from the Rating pop up menu and set the Rating slider to X Reject Only images with the Reject rating appear in the Browser and X appears in the Browser
293. ield Some photographers who work in the field capture images and store them temporarily in an Aperture Library on a portable computer It s important to use a safe and reliable way of updating your main Aperture system with new images from the field To update your main system s Library without risking overwriting images it s recommended that you export images from your field computer as a project You can then transfer the project to your main computer and import it into the Library With this method no images are overwritten and there is no risk of losing work Important Copying the entire Aperture Library from one computer to another is not recommended Transferring images by copying the Library risks overwriting and losing images when two Library files are not identical Chapter 20 Backing Up Your Images 407 408 To export a project from Aperture Select the project you want to export in the Projects panel Do one of the following e Choose File gt Export Project or press Command Shift E e Choose Export Project from the Project Action pop up menu in the Projects panel Type a name for the exported project in the Save As field Choose a location to save the project from the Where pop up menu Click Save After exporting your project you can transfer it to your main Aperture system in a variety of ways One way is to transfer the project to an external hard disk You can then connect the hard disk to your main computer an
294. ields you want To add IPTC fields to the metadata view Click the IPTC button and select the checkboxes for the IPTC fields you want To add other fields to the metadata view Click the Other button and select the checkboxes for the fields you want You can also create new metadata fields by entering text in the New Custom Metadata and Metadata Value fields and then clicking the Add button The new metadata field appears in the list and you can select its checkbox to add it to the metadata view Note Once a new metadata field is created it isn t associated with a specific metadata view If you delete the metadata view in which a new metadata field was created the field is not deleted from Aperture To add information to the metadata view about where and when an image was backed up in avault Click the Archive button and select the Include in Summary checkbox You can remove a metadata category by clicking the Delete button beside it Modifying Existing Metadata Views You can change the combination of metadata displayed by a metadata view You can add or remove metadata categories or create new ones To modify a metadata view To show the Metadata Inspector choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D Choose the metadata view you want to change from the Metadata View pop up menu Choose the Edit command for the view you want to change from the Metadata Action pop up menu You can now change the metadata fields th
295. iew 226 rearranging in pop up menus 237 240 switching 228 231 232 types of 228 metadata view 108 Metadata View pop up menu 57 58 338 340 metering 445 metering pattern metadata 50 midtones 445 migrating to new equipment 400 409 mirroring displays 157 419 445 modifying See editing monitors See displays Move Current Page Up or Down commands 348 Move to Trash button 82 moving book pages 381 filmstrip 168 images from project or albums 134 images in Browser 128 images in Light Table 327 items to Trash 82 panning images 155 photo boxes 385 selected images 123 text boxes in web journals 346 text on pages 392 web journal images 346 Multi command 149 multiple computers working with 407 multiple criteria searches 140 262 263 multiple displays See dual displays multiple images printing 282 465 466 rating 192 selection modes 167 in slideshows 319 in Viewer 149 multiple projects 141 multiple search criteria 258 multiple stacks of images 183 multiple text fields 254 music settings for slideshows 317 321 N Name Format pop up menu 104 107 295 naming custom filenames 103 107 294 files 89 106 imported images automatically 105 Light Table albums 325 projects 79 renaming files 127 298 Smart Albums 270 vaults 404 Naming Presets dialog 103 107 294 299 navigating through book pages 56 368 370 in Browser 122 in filmstrip 166 167 through images 44 120 125 through slideshows 315 in web ga
296. iew settings in the Viewer Mode pop up menu Moving and Resizing the Filmstrip You can move the filmstrip to any location on your primary display But there are times especially when viewing an image at full resolution that you cannot keep the filmstrip from overlapping your image The filmstrip includes controls that let you define when the filmstrip appears You can also specify how the filmstrip fits on the screen in relation to the image or images you are viewing There are several ways you can configure the filmstrip You can choose to always show the filmstrip show it based on image dimensions or have Aperture automatically fit the images and filmstrip on your screens without overlapping To always show the filmstrip Choose On from the Viewer Mode pop up menu or press Control slash To only show the filmstrip when you move the pointer over its docked position Choose Auto from the Viewer Mode pop up menu or press Control period To have Aperture automatically fit the image and the filmstrip on the screen Choose Avoid from the Viewer Mode pop up menu or press Control V Aperture fits your images and the filmstrip on your screen keeping the filmstrip and your images from overlapping You can drag the filmstrip to any location on your primary display s screen When you move the filmstrip to the edge of the screen the filmstrip reconfigures to match the new orientation To move the filmstrip to a different location
297. ifferent hard disk For example if you use several hard disks you might want to move their master files to a convenient location on a different hard disk To move master files for referenced images to a new location In the Browser select the referenced images whose master files you want to move Choose File gt Relocate Masters Choose the folder location you want in the Relocate Masters dialog Choose No folder from the Subfolders pop up menu to specify that the files be stored as separate individual files in the selected folder You can also specify that Aperture create a hierarchy of subfolders with specific folder names to store your files For more information about specifying folders to hold your imported image files see Importing Master Files for Referenced Images into Folders on page 103 Choose whether you want the image files moved or copied to the new location by clicking the Move files or Copy files button Choose a naming convention from the Name Format pop up menu to specify how you want the master files named For example choose Master Filename from the Version Name pop up menu to have your files stored using the current master filenames from your camera or card Choose a name format from the Version Name pop up menu to have your master files stored using a specified name If you choose a custom name format enter the name you want in the Name Text field For more information about naming files see
298. ify the row height Click the arrows to increase or decrease the height or double click in the number field and enter a new value e Export Web Pages button Click this button to export your webpages Part Ill Distribution and Backup e Publish to Mac button Click this button to publish your finalized webpages to your Mac account For more information see Exporting to Mac on page 348 e Previous Page button Click this button to go to the previous webpage e Next Page button Click this button to go to the next webpage Making Adjustments to Images in a Web Gallery or Web Journal You can t select and use the Crop Straighten Spot amp Patch and Red Eye tools in the toolbar when using the Webpage Editor To use these tools to make a change to an image in a web gallery or web journal select the image in the Browser then click the Show Viewer button at the top of the Browser to the right of the Sort Direction button The selected image appears in the Viewer and you can make your changes Click the Show Viewer button again to return to the Webpage Editor Creating Web Journals Web journals provide a great way to mix images and text to chronicle trips and explain images on the web You can manually add and arrange images and text in your web journal Creating Web Journal Albums To create a web journal you must first create an album that holds your webpage s images The easiest way to do this is to select images you want
299. ifying folders to hold your exported images see Exporting Master Files into Folders in the Finder on page 294 296 Part Ill Distribution and Backup 6 Choose a name format for your files from the Name Format pop up menu 7 When you re ready to export files click Export Versions The dialog shows the progress of the export The images you selected are exported to the location you specified Setting Image Resolution When Exporting You can set the image resolution you want for exported images in the Export Presets dialog in two ways by specifying a dpi setting or by specifying image dimensions in inches First you select an export preset in the Export Presets dialog and then you specify the resolution you want used with that preset When exporting images you choose the export preset that has the resolution setting you want To specify the dpi setting for exported images in an export preset 1 Select the image or images you want to export 2 Choose File gt Export gt Export Version or press Command Shift E 3 Navigate to the location where you want the exported images placed 4 Choose Edit from the Export Preset pop up menu Export Presets oa Oya JPEG Original Size Image Format JPEG g JPEG 50 of Original Size Mi include Metadata JPEG Fit within 1024 x 1024 JPEG Fit within 640 x 640 reas o TEERDE Size To originat Size TIFF Original Size 16 bit TIFF 50 of Original Size
300. ightening Cropping e Highlights and shadows adjustments Monochrome color mixing Choosing monochrome colors e Applying sepia tones e Noise reduction adjustments Image sharpening e Edge sharpening adjustments Chapter 1 An Overview of Aperture 31 32 For especially efficient image adjusting you can save adjustment settings as presets collections of saved adjustments and apply the same adjustments to many images at once You can adjust your images using the controls in the Adjustments HUD Add Adjustments pop up menu Adjustment Action pop up menu Exposure Levels Highlights amp Shadows White Balance Noise Reduction The controls in the Adjustments HUD are also available in the Adjustments Inspector You can also easily export your images to a third party application such as Adobe Photoshop make adjustments and then bring the adjusted image back into Aperture For detailed information about making adjustments to your images see Performing Image Adjustments in the Aperture Help menu Distribution When it s time to show your work to others Aperture provides the following methods of distribution Creating slideshow presentations e Performing Light Table reviews Creating web galleries and web journals e Ordering printed books e Printing and exporting images Part Interface and Acquisition Presenting Your Images in Slideshows You can use Aperture to make slideshow presentations
301. ill your pages with the images in a book album Placing Images Manually You can place images in a book manually by dragging them in one at a time To add images to the book manually Drag an image from the Browser to a photo box on the page Viewing Images to be Placed in a Book Once an image is placed in the book its Browser thumbnail is marked with a number to show how many times it appears on the pages of the book The number indicates the number of times an image has been placed in a book In along book with many images it can at times be difficult to know which images have been placed in a book To help you work efficiently you can click the Show Unplaced Images button to see only the images that remain unplaced Click here to see only unplaced images Click here to see all the images in the book album To display only unplaced images in the Browser Click the Show Unplaced Images button Part III Distribution and Backup To display all an album s images in the Browser Click the Show All Images button To inspect selected images in detail you can also quickly display them in a standard Viewer When the Book Layout Editor is open the Browser provides a button for quickly switching to a standard Viewer Custom Jia rel Le Show Viewer button To display a selection of images in a book album in a standard Viewer Select the images in the Browser Click the Show Viewer button To
302. imes to undo your last series of actions Aperture places deleted digital master files in the Trash If you discover a deletion you did not intend to make and the Undo command cannot recover the deletion you can still recover the master file from the Trash until the Trash is emptied Chapter 5 Working with Images in the Browser 121 122 Navigating Through and Selecting Images Selecting images is a fundamental task in Aperture Knowing the many ways you can select images can help increase your productivity and satisfaction while working with your images You can select one or several of the images in the Browser to view them in the Viewer Aperture identifies the images you ve selected by displaying them with a white border When you select a group of images the actively selected image called the primary selection appears with a thick white border and the rest of the selected images appear with thin white borders All selected images display a white border A thick white border surrounds the primary selection To navigate to images do one of the following Press an arrow key to move left right up or down Use the scroll bar to scroll through the images in the Browser then click the image you want In the control bar click the Previous Image or Next Image button Previous Image button GO Next Image button Aperture provides fast and efficient ways of selecting images depending on your work style an
303. imply allow Aperture to access them without changing their current locations You can choose how images are named and include other information that is recorded with each image to help identify it For example you can specify the event name date time photographer and location as well as copyright information You can also specify other import options such as whether you want Aperture to group related images together in stacks For example if you have bracketed images or images shot in quick succession you can have Aperture import and stack these images together to make reviewing and working with them easier Chapter 1 An Overview of Aperture 19 20 Importing Files from Your Body of Work You can easily import your collection of archived digital images into Aperture from any hard disk or storage device connected to your computer When importing legacy images from your portfolio you can move them into the main Aperture Library or simply identify where the images are located and Aperture adds them to its management system without changing the image locations This means that with Aperture you can still work with your images in their current organization and on multiple hard disks without relocating or reorganizing your current files You can also move or copy images to new locations when needed Aperture can also import your iPhoto Library and files stored in a variety of common file types and formats including e GIF e JPEG JPEG
304. ing Press Command 5 or backslash To increase the image s rating Press Command equal sign To decrease the image s rating Press Command hyphen To assign the Reject rating Press Command 9 The rating appears as an overlay on the alternate image Navigate to the next alternate by pressing the Left or Right Arrow key or click the Previous Image or Next Image button in the control bar The new alternate appears in the Browser with a white border woke img202 If you discover that the new selection is a better choice or has the best rating you can make it the compare image by pressing Return or choosing Edit gt Set Compare Item You can then review and compare your alternates against this image to confirm it as the best image Tip To quickly make a selected item the compare image press Return To turn off the comparison feature press Command Return Part Il Photo Editing Keyboard Shortcuts for Displaying Images with Specific Ratings To quickly display images with a certain rating level or better use the following keyboard shortcuts Keyboard shortcut Function eae G Show unrated images or better contro Show images rated one star or better CJ control Show images rated two stars or better control Show images rated three stars or better control a Show images rated four stars or better S control ies Show images rated five stars Sele
305. ink the web gallery or journal to your Mac homepage Click View in Browser to see the new webpage The published web gallery or journal appears in your web browser To link your web gallery or web journal to your Mac homepage Go to http www mac com then click the HomePage link at the top of the screen If you haven t already done so log in If you don t have a menu page create one In the Pages list select the menu page then click Edit The page category is listed to the right of the selection In the Edit your page section click the Add button next to an existing link to add a new one Anew empty link is created to the right of the previous link Enter a page title and brief description then click the Edit Link button In the Edit your links section click the Other Pages tab paste the link to your web gallery or web journal in the Address field by pressing Command V then click Apply When you are ready to publish your new homepage click the Publish button at the top right corner of the screen A new screen appears with a link to your updated homepage address Chapter 18 Creating Webpages 349 350 If you later forget the address of your site you can check your iDisk to see a listing of sites From the Finder choose Go gt iDisk gt My iDisk then open the Sites folder The names listed in your Sites folder represent your published sites From that you can determine the path to a site by entering
306. int preset and turn off color management for each printer The following is a set of example tasks for turning off color management in Epson R2400 Canon i9100 and HP Photosmart 8700 series printers To turn off color management in an Epson R2400 printer 1 In Aperture choose File gt Print or press Command P The Print dialog appears 2 Click the Printer Settings button 3 In the dialog that appears choose Color Management from the third pop up menu from the top of the dialog and select Off No Color Adjustment Printer Stylus Photo R2400 FW gt Presets Standard Color Management E O Color Controls O ColorSync Off No Color Adjustment Gara 4 Make sure the other printer settings are correct then click Done Chapter 14 Printing Your Images 287 288 To turn off color management in a Canon i9100 printer 1 In Aperture choose File gt Print or press Command P The Print dialog appears 2 Click the Printer Settings button 3 In the dialog that appears choose Color Options from the third pop up menu from the top of the dialog and choose None from the Color Correction pop up menu Printer _i9100 Presets Standard Color Options gt ae ae Color Correction None R Color Balance Intensity Cyan Magenta Yellow Black 4 Make sure the other printer settings are correct then click Done Part Ill Distribut
307. int vendor you can choose from a selection of hardcover colors Note that you can only add images and text to the front cover of your book you can t specify images or text on the spine or back cover when purchasing books from Apple s print vendor For more information about purchasing printed books from Apple s print vendor see the electronic document Ordering Books and Prints available from the Aperture Help menu Book cover page Te a oT 0 a 58 Ss Cover page showing a hardcover design To add an image to your cover drag an image from the Browser into the photo box Title Information Here Cover title 20 pages large hardcover 11 x 8 4 Prints suytook e gt DE Book cover buttons To choose whether your book has a softcover or hardcover design you click one of the book cover buttons a e Large Softcover button Part III Distribution and Backup To select a hardcover or softcover design for your book Click the Large Hardcover or Large Softcover button If you don t plan to purchase printed books from the Apple print vendor you may want to employ a graphic designer to create the front and back cover for you or design the cover yourself using a graphics application Choosing a Master Page Layout You select a design for your page by applying a master page layout Aperture provides different master page layouts depending on the theme you chose You can choos
308. ion Name pop up menu to have your images stored using a specified name If you choose a custom name format enter the name you want in the Name Text field You can also apply the name format to the master image as well Choose Edit from the Version Name pop up menu to define a new naming scheme For more information about naming files see Automatically Naming Your Imported Images on page 105 6 To add metadata to your images as they re imported choose a metadata preset from the Add Metadata From pop up menu For more information about setting up and using metadata presets see Working with Metadata Views on page 235 7 When you are satisfied with your image selection click the Import arrow or the Import button in the lower right corner of the dialog The import process begins and an indicator appears next to the project s name showing the progress of the import When images are imported a dialog appears 8 Click Eject Card Erase and Eject Card or Done As the images appear in the Browser you can begin working with them Images may temporarily appear as gray boxes until the loading is complete Part Interface and Acquisition Importing Image Files Stored on Your Computer You can import image files stored on your computer and other storage devices You have a choice of storing imported images in the Aperture Library importing images as referenced images and leaving them in their current locations or importing images as
309. ion and Backup To turn off color management in an HP Photosmart 8700 series printer 1 In Aperture choose File gt Print or press Command P The Print dialog appears 2 Click the Printer Settings button 3 In the dialog that appears choose Paper Type Quality from the third pop up menu from the top of the dialog click the Paper button then choose Application Managed Color from the Color pop up menu Printer Photosmart 8700 series ww Presets Standard ra Paper Type Quality ff Paper Color Options Digital Photo Ink Paper Type HP Premium Plus Photo Quality Best E Color Application Managed C F Source Upper Tray B Cancel 4 Make sure the other printer settings are correct then click Done Chapter 14 Printing Your Images 289 Exporting Your Images 1 After you ve finished working on your images you can use Aperture to export them as files You can export these files to another application send them to a printing service or to your clients or publish them on the web This chapter provides information about exporting your images in several formats including JPEG TIFF PNG and PSD file formats During export you can rename resize and adjust images and include EXIF information IPTC information or other metadata You can also apply ColorSync profiles and watermarks to files you export This chapter covers e An Overview of Exporting
310. irst time you open Aperture You can choose to import images into your Library or have Aperture access them from other locations on different hard disks The Library tracks all your images and the information recorded about them as well as information about where backup files are stored You can access images in the Library by clicking Library at the top of the Projects panel You can change the location of the Library file to a different folder or a different disk You can specify where the Library should be located using the Preferences window For more information about working with multiple Library files in Aperture see Working with Library Files on page 83 Projects that you transfer from other Aperture systems to your Aperture system are also added to the Library And when you back up your digital master files to your vaults on external FireWire drives those actions are tracked by the Aperture Library as well What Are Managed Images and Referenced Images Aperture lets you choose how you organize your photos on disk You can store your photos in the Aperture Library or you can import images by simply linking to the image files in their current locations without placing them in the Library Images whose digital master files are stored in the Aperture Library are called managed images These master files are stored in the Library exactly as they were in previous versions of Aperture Aperture manages master image files in the Librar
311. isk locations If needed you can also move referenced master files into the Aperture Library by choosing the Consolidate command You can search for images based on whether they are managed images referenced images or online or offline images Aperture also provides robust file management tools that let you quickly determine which images are offline and easily reconnect images that have been moved to different volumes Chapter 3 Working with Aperture Projects 77 78 What Is a Vault To ensure you have backup copies of your images you create a vault to hold the backup A vault is a container that holds an exact copy of the Library This includes your projects digital master files and any versions you ve created You can easily create and update a vault to back up the Library It s a good idea to create multiple vaults on multiple external hard drives to safeguard copies of the Library You can have as many vaults as you deem necessary Creating more than one vault is useful if you work at different locations you can always keep one vault on a FireWire drive onsite and another one offsite All vaults and backup files are tracked by the Library so that even if you disconnect the external hard drive that contains your vault Aperture can access it the next time you reconnect the drive and update your vault All the managed master file images versions and all metadata previews and adjustment information associated with your images
312. ist view Choose View gt View Options or press Command J The View Options window appears In the List View Columns section choose a display option from the Set 1 pop up menu Columns in the Browser immediately change to display the information you selected Click Done One of the main advantages of list view is that you can quickly sort images based on a category of information When you click a column heading in list view Aperture reorders the images sorting them by that category For example you might sort your images by date To sort images in list view by a category Click the category column heading in the Browser Images in list view sorted by rating BS Rating i r Showing all version Name Badg Rating Image Aperture Shutter Exposure I Foc vietnam2004 0220 doe 8 12 0 f7 1 60 Oev A i vietnam2004 0159 dete 8 12 0 7 1 1 1000 Oev z E vietnam2004 0062 kkkk 8 11 0 f4 1 30 1 7 ev EE vietnam2004 0040 kam wK 8 11 0 2 8 1 200 Oev ea vietnam2004 0378 tok 8 14 0 f5 1 1000 Oev 9 vietnam2004 0340 kik 8 13 0 2 8 1 80 Oev NE vietnam2004 0243 kik 8 12 0 f2 8 1 50 Oev EI vietnam2004 0231 kik 8 12 0 f4 5 1 80 Oev Lal i 0632 kk ARBINS 28 ee pees When you work in list view it may sometimes be difficult to determine the content of an image based on the file information You can enlarge the thumbnail icons that appear in list view to give you a better look at the images
313. jority of the frame is also a close up CMYK A working space used for print pieces combining cyan magenta and yellow inks in different combinations to create a color that reflects the proper color of light Black ink K is added to the image last to generate pure black on the page See also subtractive color working space color cast An unnatural tint in an image due to a lack of color balance Color casts are often caused by artificial light sources such as interior lighting Color casts in images are commonly removed by adjusting levels tint or white balance See also white balance Glossary 435 436 color channels The individual channels into which color information for digital images is divided Each individual color channel represents one of the three individual primary colors that combine to represent the final image Each channel has a bit depth most digital image files have 8 bits per channel meaning that there are 256 levels of color for each channel See also bit depth color depth color depth The possible range of colors that can be used in an image There are generally three choices with digital images grayscale 8 bit and 16 bit Higher color depths provide a wider range of colors but require more storage space See also bit depth color channels color interpolation The process of calculating additional color values from light captured via the red green and blue elements on the digital image sensor color manage
314. k command 178 Auto Stack Selected Images HUD 178 Auto Stack slider 109 177 Avoid command 168 B B Bulb setting 435 backgrounds in book pages 382 in Browser 125 in images 434 in slideshows 316 in Viewer 148 backing up images after import 114 archives defined 433 creating vaults 404 functions and controls 403 overview 37 400 planning systems for 401 reconnecting hard disks 406 restoring files 400 restoring Library 409 storage space 402 403 updating vaults 405 in vaults 37 53 78 404 Index working with multiple computers 407 backing up in slideshows 315 backlighting 434 back to back printing 371 Badge referenced images checkbox 136 badges displaying 228 244 Light Table display 331 types of 243 Basic workspace layout 64 Batch Change dialog 241 batch changes to metadata 241 Bayer pattern color filter array 434 bit depth 278 434 black and white images 387 black point compensation 280 434 Black Point Compensation setting 280 302 308 black Vault Status buttons 403 blank screens setting 157 bleeds 282 Book Action pop up menu _ 55 367 374 book albums copying 396 creating 365 saving search results as 265 Book Layout Editor displaying 358 functions and controls 54 366 368 master page views 393 overview 36 printing books 283 selecting themes 369 switching to Viewer 373 books adding images 362 365 372 373 adding or removing pages 367 374 376 382 badge overlays 243 book albums 265
315. k this button to give the selected image a Reject rating e Decrease Rating Click this button to decrease the selected image s rating e Increase Rating Click this button to increase the selected image s rating e Select Click this button to give the selected image a Select rating Display Controls Primary Only button Zoom Viewer Exit Full Screen button button e Viewer Mode pop up menu Use this to choose how to view images on your display or displays and how to position images on each display You can also control the filmstrip with this pop up menu see Moving and Resizing the Filmstrip on page 168 e Zoom Viewer Click this button to enlarge the image to a 100 percent pixel for pixel view e Exit Full Screen Click this button to exit Full Screen mode e Primary Only Click this button to temporarily change between making metadata changes to all selected images or the primary selection only Chapter 7 Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode 167 168 Viewing Images with the Filmstrip You can easily view images in Full Screen mode by selecting them in the filmstrip To view an image that s in the filmstrip Select an image displayed in the filmstrip by pressing the arrow keys or clicking the image you want to see To view more than one image at the same time do one of the following Command click individual images that are not adjacent to select them Shift click images to select a range of images Change your v
316. k this button to purchase your book from Apple s print vendor e Previous Page button Click this button to see the previous page of your book e Next Page button Click this button to see the next page of your book 368 Part Ill Distribution and Backup 1 Choosing a Theme You choose a theme for your book when you create your book album A theme provides a professionally designed set of master pages that determine how you place text and images on the page It s a good idea to explore the page styles and looks of Aperture themes Some theme designs lend themselves better to presenting many pictures without much text others to more traditional mixes of text and images such as you might find in coffee table books Once you know the characteristics of the different themes you can choose the theme best suited to a project It s important to choose the theme you want at the beginning of a project Each theme presents different combinations of master pages Although you can change themes after you start a project and Aperture will attempt to convert your book structure to the new theme s master pages you may need to redo some of your work to make up for differences between themes Because themes are different the conversion may not be exact It s not recommended that you complete a book and then change themes to see it with different layouts Warning It s possible to lose text when you change themes If you change book themes
317. k up your entire image library for safekeeping Aperture lets you work with high quality JPEG TIFF and RAW image files directly from your camera or card reader and maintain that high quality throughout your workflow What s Next This manual is only one of several types of documentation you can use as you work with Aperture e For instructions for installing Aperture software see Installing Your Software e For an introduction to the basic concepts procedures and digital photography workflow for using Aperture see Aperture Getting Started e For an overview of Aperture an introduction to the Aperture interface and detailed instructions for using the many features and tools in Aperture continue reading this manual e For information about making image corrections and adjustments in Aperture see Performing Image Adjustments in the Aperture Help menu e Fora list of the keyboard shortcuts you can use to perform tasks in Aperture see Aperture Quick Reference e For an introduction to the fundamentals of digital photography see Digital Photography Fundamentals in the Aperture Help menu e For information about ordering printed books of your images see Ordering Books and Prints in the Aperture Help menu e For the most recent technical and release information about Aperture see Late Breaking News in the Aperture Help menu e For information about new features in Aperture see New Features in the Aperture Help menu e For the l
318. keting A setting on many professional cameras that automatically brackets the exposure of the image See also bracketing background The area in the rear of the image that appears behind the subject See also depth of field foreground backlighting A light source that faces toward the lens of the camera emanating from behind the subject Backlighting makes the outline of the subject stand out from the background often resulting in a silhouette See also frontlighting sidelighting silhouette Bayer pattern color filter array A specific arrangement of red green and blue lenses attached to the surface of a digital image sensor There are roughly twice as many green lenses as blue and red to accommodate how the human eye perceives color See also complementary metal oxide semiconductor CMOS charge coupled device CCD digital image sensor bit depth The number of tonal values or shades of a color each channel in a pixel is capable of displaying Increasing the bit depth of color channels in an image s pixels exponentially increases the number of colors each pixel can express See also color channels color depth black point compensation Black point compensation ensures that black and white luminance values are appropriately scaled to fit within the range or gamut of the destination device printer paper and ink Using black point compensation helps prevent clipping in shadows because the blacks are scaled to fit within the gamut of the
319. l Metadata View pop up menu Choose the type of metadata that is included with each image in the webpage Distribution and Backup Select the page you want to work on here Click here to see the enlarged version of the selected image e Add Text Box button Click this button to add a text box to the bottom of the current webpage Columns value slider Specify the number of columns you want on a page Click the arrows to increase or decrease the number of columns or double click in the number field and enter a new value e Fit images within pop up menu Choose an option for how you want images to appear on the webpage e Width value slider Use this to specify the width of photo boxes on the page Click the arrows to change the width or double click in the number field and enter a new value e Height value slider Use this to specify the height of photo boxes on the page Click the arrows to change the height or double click in the number field and enter a new value e Export Web Pages button Click this button to export your webpages e Publish to Mac button Click this button to publish your finalized webpages to your Mac account See Exporting to Mac on page 348 e Previous Page button Click this button to go to the previous webpage e Next Page button Click this button to go to the next webpage Viewing and Navigating Through Webpages As you modify your webpages there are some easy ways to view and n
320. l You can move a HUD as far as your display screen extends You can use HUDs in regular and Full Screen mode Adjustments HUD The Adjustments HUD contains controls for Aperture image adjustments such as Exposure Levels and White Balance The controls in the Adjustments HUD are the same as those in the Adjustments Inspector You can use the HUD in the Viewer or in Full Screen mode To show controls for an adjustment click its disclosure triangle to remove the adjustment applied to the image deselect the adjustment s checkbox To show the Adjustments HUD Choose Window gt Show Adjustments HUD or press H White Balance controls Adjust color temperature and tint using these controls B Exposure controls Use these controls to adjust exposure contrast saturation and brightness or adjust the tint of the black gray and white color values in the selected image C RAW Fine Tuning controls Use these controls to select the setting for treatment of RAW images D Auto Exposure button Click this button to have Aperture automatically adjust the image s exposure E Auto Exposure If you don t like the Auto Exposure adjustments click this Reset Reset button button to remove them F Add Adjustments Choose the type of adjustment you want to apply to an image pop up menu from this pop up menu When you choose an adjustment its controls appear in the Adjustments HUD G Adjustment Action Choose a histogram view and rem
321. lay only checkbox If you use a dual display system and want your slideshow to play only on your main display select this checkbox Rows slider Drag this slider to increase the number of rows of images Columns slider Drag this slider to increase the number of columns of images Background color field Change the background color of your slideshow by clicking the Background color field and then choosing a new background color from the Colors palette Part Ill Distribution and Backup Padding slider Adjust padding or the space between the top and bottom rows of images by dragging the slider to the right to add space and to the left to decrease space Fade Time slider Adjust the fade time between images by dragging this slider to the right to increase fade time and to the left to decrease fade time Crossfade checkbox Select this checkbox to move between images by fading out the first and fading in the second Play music during slideshow checkbox Select this checkbox to play your slideshow with an accompanying song or iTunes playlist iTunes library area Displays your iTunes music library Navigate through the library to select a song to accompany your slideshow or search for a song name artist or song time by entering it in the search field Creating Slideshow Presets It s easiest to create a new slideshow preset by duplicating an existing preset and modifying it First identify which existing preset you want to
322. le display settings M show decorations C Grid view Set 1 Grid View Basic Placement Below _ Show Labels Set 2 Grid View Expanded Placement Over Show Labels Browser metadata List View Columns Ose ues display settings Osea UsEd C image Tooltips pa Image tooltip settings When you position the pointer over an image Aperture can display information about it in a pop up text box called an image tooltip You can turn the display of image tooltips on or off in the View Options window Tooltips can also display whether an image is a managed image file or a referenced image file You can choose a metadata view to specify the combination of metadata that appears in image tooltips Part Il Photo Editing Metadata Inspector Exposure Bias Oev About Displaying Metadata in Full Screen Mode Choosing a metadata view for the Viewer also defines the metadata that appears with images in Full Screen mode Choosing a metadata view for the Browser in grid view defines the metadata that appears with image thumbnails in the Full Screen mode filmstrip You can view the metadata for a selected image in the Metadata Inspector To show the Metadata Inspector choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D Choose a metadata view from the Metadata View pop up menu Metadata View General E Edit and arrange your Rating metadata views using
323. lect the images you want to group Control click the selection then choose Arrange from the shortcut menu To reveal images in the Light Table that are covered by other images Select the top image in the group Chapter 17 Using the Light Table 329 330 2 Click the Uncover button or press Shift X Click the Uncover button to reveal all images under the selected image E Select an uncovered image The images are regrouped with the selected image on top Adjusting the Light Table View You can adjust the Light Table view to better view and work with images This is particularly useful when the Light Table is larger than your screen size You can also increase the area of the Light Table To zoom in or out of the Light Table do one of the following Drag the Light Table Zoom slider to change the view Scale to Fit All Items button Drag the Light Table Zoom slider to zoom in or out To fit the Light Table to your screen size do one of the following Click the Scale to Fit All Items button To change the Light Table view to 100 percent Control click in a blank portion of the Light Table then choose Zoom to 100 from the shortcut menu Part III Distribution and Backup To increase the area of the Light Table Drag an image to the border of the grid background so that the area of the Light Table automatically expands Drag an image to a
324. lect the photo box you want to change Choose Photo Box Aspect Ratio from the Book Action pop up menu then choose an aspect ratio from the submenu To change a box to a 4 3 landscape aspect ratio Choose Landscape 4 3 To change a box to a 3 2 landscape aspect ratio Choose Landscape 3 2 To change a box to a 2 3 portrait aspect ratio Choose Portrait 2 3 To change a box to a 3 4 portrait aspect ratio Choose Portrait 3 4 To change a box to a square aspect ratio Choose Square e To create a box that fits the cropping of the current image in the box Choose Photo Aspect Ratio Arranging Images on the Page You can resize and reposition photo boxes on the page You must first select the Edit Layout button to enable changing the page format You can then click boxes to select them Once selected image and text boxes show handles that you can drag to resize the box You can also drag the content of the box to move the box to a new position As you drag a box you ll see yellow guidelines appear that mark the important margins and image borders on your page Using the guidelines you can make sure that your boxes correctly align with other boxes on your pages To arrange photo boxes on the page Click the Edit Layout button if it s not already selected Select the photo box you want to move or resize Drag the box to a new location or drag a handle on the selected box to change the image s size Chapter 19 Creating Books
325. lideshow settings that determine how your images appear onscreen This chapter covers An Overview of Slideshows p 312 Creating a Slideshow p 314 Controlling a Slideshow p 315 Arranging the Order of a Slideshow s Images p 315 Controls in the Slideshow Presets Dialog p 315 Creating Slideshow Presets p 317 Modifying Slideshow Presets p 318 Creating a Growing Grid of Images p 319 Playing Your Slideshow on Your Main Display Only p 320 Displaying Your Images to Music p 321 311 312 An Overview of Slideshows Aperture makes it easy to create slideshows to present your images You can select a project in the Projects panel or any number of images in the Browser and immediately display the images in a slideshow on your computer screen You can determine the number of images that appear onscreen at one time set the timing of the display add music and more Your slideshows can play automatically or you can control them using keyboard shortcuts displaying images one by one as you review them with a client To create a slideshow you select a project or the individual images you want to display and then choose File gt Slideshow When the Run Slideshow dialog appears you can specify how you want images displayed by choosing a slideshow preset Run Slideshow Slideshow Preset Dissolve B Coancet Esar Slideshow presets are groups of predetermined settings for playing a slide
326. lied to Images on page 202 Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images 215 216 Creating a Keyword Preset Group You can create new keyword preset groups when you need them To create a keyword preset group and assign keywords to it In the control bar choose Edit Buttons from the Keyword Preset Group pop up menu Choose Edit Buttons to add a new keyword preset group The Name column on the left lists the keyword preset groups that already exist When you select a keyword preset group in this column the keywords included in the group appear in the center Contents column You add or remove keywords by adding them to or removing them from the Contents column The Keywords Library column provides a list of the existing keywords in your keyword library You can drag keywords from this list into the Contents column You can also add keywords and keyword groups to your keyword library using the controls below the Keywords Library column Part II Photo Editing A new untitled preset group appears in this list Click the Add button to add a keyword preset group 2 To create a new keyword preset group click the Add button An untitled preset group appears in the Name column 3 Type a name for the new keyword preset group then press Return 4 Drag keywords from the Keywords Library column to the Contents column If you wish you can select multiple keywords and drag them to the Contents column at once
327. ll them with a selection of images To show master pages choose Show Master Pages from the Book Action pop up menu Select a master page in the Master Pages panel Select the images you want in the Browser Select a page in the Pages panel where the new pages should appear The new pages will appear just after the selected page Choose Add New Pages From Master gt With Selected Images from the Add Pages pop up menu Aperture adds the selected images to new pages to your book All the pages are based on the selected master page Adding an Image Index to a Book You can add index pages to a book that show thumbnails of all the book s images Depending on the theme you choose Aperture provides different looks and layouts for image indexes Typically the image index appears at the end of a book or at its beginning To add an index page to the end of your book To show master pages choose Show Master Pages from the Book Action pop up menu Select an index master page in the Master Pages panel Choose Add New Page From Master from the Add Pages pop up menu Add as many index pages as your book needs to hold all the images To fill the index pages at the end of your book select all the images in your aloum and choose Autoflow Selected Images from the Book Action pop up menu All the selected images are flowed into the photo boxes on the index pages You can also drag images into the index pages manually If you want the index pag
328. lleries 339 in web journals 341 through webpages 341 342 navigation buttons 44 56 Navigator button 60 negatives 445 networks importing projects over 408 New Album button 46 New Album With Current Images button 252 273 New Book Album button 46 365 New Book From Selection command 365 New Empty Book command 365 New Empty Light Table command 325 New Empty Web Gallery command 337 340 New Light Table Album button 46 New Light Table From Selection command 325 New Project button 46 New Smart Album button 46 252 270 New Smart Web Gallery command 337 Newspaper Association of America 304 New Version From Master button 47 131 169 New Web Gallery Album button 46 New Web Gallery From Selection command 336 New Web Journal From Selection command 339 Next Image button 44 122 167 Next Page button 56 58 59 339 341 368 noise 445 Index nonadjacent images selecting 123 non Roman characters 106 Normal mode 91 numbering pages 367 382 numbers of images on pages 343 O object names in metadata 228 242 offline hard disks 406 offset presses 445 offsite storage 406 onscreen proofing 156 286 onscreen slideshows 312 318 opacity 445 opacity of watermarks 308 355 Opacity slider 355 Open 132 Open All Stacks button 109 170 opening Adjustments HUD 172 adjustment tool HUDs 173 Book Layout Editor 358 Keywords HUD 172 Metadata Inspector 204 227 multiple projects 141 projects 80 Query HUD 249 stacks 109 170 176 181 Viewer 148
329. lleries See web galleries web journals See web journals When a camera is connected pop up menu 68 white balance 61 451 475 476 White Balance controls 61 white borders 122 195 white point 451 white space characters 106 wide angle lenses 451 width of borders 281 of columns 338 341 of images 57 59 Width controls 281 Width value slider 57 59 338 341 wire codes 304 workflow processes 194 working space 451 workspaces arranging interface elements 40 defined 451 layout buttons 48 rotating 65 Index switching between 64 65 types of 64 X XMP sidecar files 292 X ratings 188 Y yellow Vault Status buttons 403 Z zooming full resolution view 155 viewing book pages 368 371 viewing images at 100 167 viewing images in Light Table 330 zoom lenses 451 Zoom to 100 command 330 Zoom Viewer button 43 155 167
330. low See also contrast density focal length The distance from the rear nodal point of the lens to the point where the light rays passing through the lens are focused onto the image plane the digital image sensor Focal lengths are measured in millimeters mm folder A type of container in the Aperture Library used to organize projects and albums within projects See also album Library project foreground The area of the image between the subject and the camera See also background depth of field format a File format A specific method of encoding information Most well known file formats such as TIFF and PNG have published specifications b Disk formatting The preparation of a hard disk or other storage medium for use with a file system For example disk drives used with Mac OS X use the Mac OS Extended format See also JPEG PNG PSD TIFF vault frame The border of an image Frame can also be used as a verb to describe the process of constructing a composition within a specific image area See also crop frontlighting A light source emanating from the direction of the camera that faces toward the subject See also backlighting sidelighting Full Screen mode A mode in Aperture with minimal user interface used to view full screen images with the least amount of light and color interference See also filmstrip HUD gamma A curve that describes how the middle tones of an image appear Gamma is a nonlinear function often
331. ly copy the files to your Mac account With a few clicks you can have Aperture open your Mac account transfer the files with links intact and create the Internet addresses that others need to use to access the pages To learn more about creating and setting up a Mac account go to http www mac com With your Mac account set up you can easily transfer your web gallery or web journal to your Mac account The web address of your new Mac album appears in the Publish Album dialog and in the web browser after the pages are published You can copy and send this address to clients so they can view the images Part Ill Distribution and Backup BW N To export your web gallery or web journal to your Mac account In the Webpage Editor click Publish to Mac In the dialog that appears specify the following Publish Album As Enter a name for the web gallery or web journal The Internet address for the webpage appears below the Publish Album As field Make sure to write down this address for later use Thumbnail Image Preset pop up menu Choose the quality you want for displayed thumbnail images Detail Image Preset pop up menu Choose the quality of detail images that will appear when someone clicks a thumbnail When you re ready click Publish The Publish Complete dialog appears listing the address of your webpage You can select the address and press Command C to copy the address to the Clipboard You need this address to l
332. ly plan the arrangement of images on each page If you ll be adding text to your images you may want to write edit and spell check your text using a word processor You can then easily cut and paste the text into your book later Choose a cover image and decide what text should appear on the cover Create any copyright or permissions notices you need Create a book album and choose a theme for your book Place the book s images in the book album and order them as they should appear in the book Don t place the images on your pages yet Specify any overall settings for the book such as size hardcover or softcover binding page numbering and so on Create the number of pages you need and apply master page designs to them Have Aperture automatically place your images or drag the images onto your pages Reposition and resize images adjusting individual page layouts if necessary Add text to your pages and cover Print a proof and carefully review the text and layout of the book Send the book to be printed using Apple s print vendor or create a PDF file that you can print or send to a print vendor If you create a PDF file make sure to include all the fonts you used in your book in the PDF file If you re creating a larger more complex book you ll want to contact a print vendor early to make sure you consider printing issues such as the choice of paper stock the use of inks and varnishes review of bluelines binding packaging
333. m folder name in the Custom Subfolder Name field Choose a name format for your master files from the Name Format pop up menu For more information about selecting and setting up filenaming formats see Creating Custom Name Formats on page 107 Aperture shows an example of the selected name format in the dialog To export the digital master file with an XMP sidecar file that contains the image s IPTC metadata select the Create IPTC4XMP sidecar file checkbox When you re ready to export your files click Export Masters Copies of the digital master files for the selected images are exported to the location you specified Chapter 15 Exporting Your Images 293 294 Exporting Master Files into Folders in the Finder When you export master files you can have Aperture place the files individually into a selected folder or create subfolders to hold the files For example you might have the exported files placed in subfolders identified by date You can create folder formats that you can quickly choose to select the folder structure you want To create a folder name format you select the name elements you want in the Folder Naming Presets dialog You can compose subfolder formats that combine the following name elements Version Name e Master Filename e Sequence Number 1 of 3 2 of 3 3 of 3 e Image Year Image Month e Image Day e Image Date Image Time Index Number 1 2 3 e Custom Name e Counter 00
334. mage into another album in the Projects panel To move an image into a different project Drag the image into another project in the Projects panel To copy an image into a different project Option drag the image into another project in the Projects panel You can also drag images out of Smart Albums If you drag an image from a Smart Album into another album the version is copied to the new location If you drag an image into a project different from the project that contains the digital master file Aperture moves the master file to the destination project All links to versions in other albums are maintained For more information about using Smart Albums see Chapter 13 Grouping Images with Smart Albums on page 267 Part Il Photo Editing Working with Referenced Images Master files for images that you import as referenced images may reside in many different locations on your hard disk storage devices instead of in the single location of your main Aperture Library file At times you may need to determine which images are referenced images in order to readily locate them in the Finder With Aperture you can easily Display badge overlays that identify referenced images Display a list of referenced images Locate a referenced image s master file on your hard disk Reconnect missing or offline referenced images Relocate referenced images master files Copy move and delete master files for referenced images Move referenced i
335. mages master files to the Aperture Library Use the Query HUD to search for referenced images Identifying Referenced Images After you import referenced images you can identify them in the Browser by turning on referenced image badge overlays Referenced images appear with badges that show whether their master files are currently available online or not found offline These badge overlays This badge overlay indicate the images are indicates the image is an referenced images offline referenced image Chapter 5 Working with Images in the Browser 135 136 1 To turn on referenced image badge overlays Choose Aperture gt Preferences Select the Badge referenced images checkbox You can select and work with online referenced images using the same procedures you use with images whose master files reside in the Aperture Library Aperture keeps track of referenced images master files when you simply move or rename the files in the Finder keeping them on the same hard disk or volume A referenced image appears as an offline image if the hard disk holding the referenced image s master file has been disconnected from your computer system A referenced image is listed as not found when its master file has been deleted moved to the Trash or moved from its original hard disk location to another hard disk drive and Aperture can t find it Displaying a List of Referenced Images When working with numerous images
336. mages Select the images you want to print in the Light Table e To print the entire Light Table arrangement Deselect all images in the Light Table by clicking the background Choose File gt Print Light Table or press Command Option P In the Print dialog specify the following settings e Select a Light Table preset in the Preset Name list Make sure the settings in the Printer Selection area are correct such as paper size and ColorSync profile After you ve verified that all the settings in the Print dialog are correct click Print Your Light Table arrangement is printed Creating and Modifying Print Presets After examining a selected preset s print settings you may want to change certain settings You can do this by modifying an existing print preset creating a new undefined print preset or duplicating an existing print preset and making changes to it Creating a New Print Preset In almost all situations it s better to create a new print preset than to modify an existing one You can easily create a new print preset based on any existing print preset Creating a new print preset does not modify or delete any existing print preset settings To create a new print preset Choose File gt Print Images or press Command P The Print dialog appears Choose a print preset category from the Print Preset Action pop up menu at the bottom left side of the dialog A new preset appears in the Preset Name list Enter a
337. make Aperture faster If you plan to work on large projects or have multiple applications open at one time it s a good idea to have extra RAM installed in your computer Additional Hard Disk Storage Options The more disk space you have the more images Aperture can store in the Aperture Library If you ll be shooting and storing many images a photography project can contain thousands of images consider purchasing the highest capacity hard disk you can afford for your startup disk the hard disk that contains the operating system Even high resolution JPEG files require a lot of space Aperture uses external FireWire drives to back up image files and the Aperture Library The Aperture database tracks the contents of all vaults located on external FireWire drives whether they are connected to your computer or not Storing multiple copies of your backup files in separate locations lessens your chances of losing your images to a catastrophic event Appendix A Setting Up an Aperture System 415 FireWire drives provide many advantages e All FireWire drives can be daisy chained meaning that you can connect multiple drives using a single FireWire port e FireWire drives are a good way to attach additional hard disk storage space to a portable computer e FireWire drives are hot swappable meaning that you can connect and disconnect them from a computer without having to shut down first Important You should never physically discon
338. make sure to first copy the text you ve entered into another document so that you have a backup copy To choose a new theme for your book In the Book Layout Editor click the Theme button Theme button E Theme Art Collection un A U N A dialog appears alerting you that you may lose text when you change themes Click OK Choose a book size from the Book Size pop up menu In the Themes list select the theme you want Click Choose Theme After you change the theme Aperture updates all your pages to use the new theme Chapter 19 Creating Books 369 370 Click to select the page you want in the Pages panel Viewing Pages As you work on a book you can select and view particular pages and you can change your view of the pages You can display your pages laid out singly or side by side and you can enlarge or reduce your view of book pages Navigating to Book Pages You can navigate to pages in your book by scrolling pressing the arrow keys or clicking the Previous Page and Next Page buttons To view a particular page in a book Use the scroll bar in the Pages panel to scroll to the page you want then click the page to select it Use the scroll bar to scroll through the pages in your book You can also quickly scroll through your pages by pressing the arrow keys or clicking the Previous Page and Next Page buttons Print Buy Book gt Pe ne Page button Part Ill Dist
339. mand 82 Remove Keyword button 63 207 212 Remove Page button 58 340 348 Remove Vault command 407 removing albums 83 background images 382 book pages 374 digital master files 132 133 export presets 309 folders 83 hard disks 406 images from Browser 132 images from Light Table 326 images from photo boxes 386 images from slideshows 315 images from Smart Albums 272 images from stacks 183 images from web galleries 345 images from web journals 346 image versions 82 items from projects 82 83 keywords 212 216 223 Light Table albums 332 metadata boxes 392 metadata categories 236 pages from books 367 374 382 photo boxes 387 print presets 286 projects 82 83 Smart Albums 273 text boxes 347 392 tools from toolbar 66 vault images 407 vaults 407 versions 132 web export presets 354 web journal pages 340 348 Index renaming files 127 image versions 127 rendering intent 448 Reset button 49 resetting images in Light Table 328 toolbar 66 resizing filmstrip 168 fonts 280 images during export 307 images for email 305 images for printing 280 images in Light Table 328 images in photo boxes 384 Light Table view 330 Loupe tool 152 watermarks 303 356 webpage images 344 resolution camera settings 278 defined 448 DPI setting 307 full resolution display 147 155 printing and 278 Restore Library dialog 409 restoring images in Light Table 328 last sorting arrangement 129 master page layouts 3
340. manually You can select versions and have Aperture create previews for them when needed Thus when projects are not set to create automatic previews you can still create previews for specific versions as you want You can also change the quality of the preview images to match your working preferences For example if you don t require high resolution previews and prefer to work with images that are smaller files you can lower the preview image quality This is particularly useful when working on a MacBook or MacBook Pro Part Il Photo Editing To change preview options Choose Aperture gt Preferences or press Command comma In the Previews area of the Preferences window do any of the following e To set Aperture to create previews for the images in all new projects and new Libraries Select the New projects automatically generate previews checkbox Deselect this option if you don t want previews created for images in new projects To enable sharing of JPEG preview images with other applications Select the Share previews with other applications checkbox To change the image quality of the previews Drag the Preview Quality slider The higher the quality you select the more disk space the preview requires Close the Preferences window You can turn the creation of preview images on for specific projects in the Projects panel or for the entire Library and Aperture automatically creates previews as new ver
341. mber of Images in the Viewer p 149 Comparing Images p 150 Viewing Stacks p 151 Viewing Images with the Loupe p 151 Using the Color Meter p 152 Showing Hot Areas in Your Images p 154 Viewing Images at Full Resolution p 155 Viewing Master Images p 156 Setting Up the Viewer for Onscreen Proofing p 156 Viewing Images on Multiple Displays p 157 Displaying Metadata Associated with Images p 158 Selecting Image Preview Options p 160 Quickly Accessing Commands p 162 145 146 An Overview of the Viewer When you select images in the Browser the Viewer immediately displays a detailed view of your selection You can display one image at a time three images at a time or multiple images A detailed view of the selected image appears in the Viewer The selected image in the Browser 1 of 46 images selected i e we j When rating or adjusting images you can set the Viewer to compare two images at once You can select an image to compare against and then display other similar or related images next to it for inspection You might use the Aperture comparison feature to select images from a series or compare versions of adjusted images to see which is the best You can use the Viewer to compare two images Part II Photo Editing The Loupe shows a magnified view of whatever is beneath it You can use a software loupe to magnify part of an image perhaps to see
342. ment system CMS An application that controls and interprets the reproduction of color between devices and imaging software for accuracy See also ColorSync color matching method CMM A software algorithm designed to translate color information from one device profile to another such as from your display to your printer ColorSync is a thoroughly integrated CMM used by Mac OS X See also ColorSync color space A mathematical model used to describe part of the visible spectrum Color from one device is mapped from the device dependent value to a device independent value in a color space Once in an independent space the color can be mapped to another device dependent space See also device dependent device independent color temperature Describes the color quality of light Color temperature is measured in units called kelvins K See also kelvin K white balance colorimeter An instrument capable of measuring the color value of a sample using color filters A colorimeter is used to determine if two colors are the same However it does not take into account the light under which a sample is measured Colorimeters are often used to calibrate displays and printers See also calibration colorimetry The science of measuring color both objectively and perceptively ColorSync A color management system that is part of the Mac operating system In Mac OS X ColorSync is thoroughly integrated with the entire operating system and is available t
343. metadata views e Modify existing metadata views e Arrange the order of metadata views in pop up menus e Rename metadata views e Duplicate metadata views e Delete metadata views You can also apply combinations of metadata to your images by recording metadata in a view and saving it as a metadata preset For more information about creating and using metadata presets see Working with Metadata Presets on page 238 Creating New Metadata Views You can create new metadata views that display different combinations of metadata You can also add new kinds of metadata to your metadata views in addition to the metadata categories that Aperture provides To create a new metadata view 1 To show the Metadata Inspector choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D 2 Choose New View from the Metadata Action pop up menu 3 In the dialog that appears enter a name for the new metadata view then click OK Please enter a unique name for your metadata view or preset Cone E The Metadata Inspector changes to display an empty area to which you can now add categories of metadata Chapter 11 Working with Metadata 235 236 4 To add metadata categories to your metadata view do any of the following To add a keywords field to the metadata view Click the Keywords button and select the Include in Summary checkbox To add EXIF fields to the metadata view Click the EXIF button and select the checkboxes for the EXIF f
344. mmediately create a backup so that you have copies safely stored As you routinely work with Aperture creating new image versions and making adjustments you ll want to make sure your work is copied to disk and your backup vaults are up to date A typical backup system used with Aperture might look like the following Office Remote location oe Aperture Library Vault Vault internal disk external disk kept offsite and updated regularly Chapter 20 Backing Up Your Images 401 402 _ N A UW A U N This system backs up the Aperture Library to two vaults stored on external hard disks You routinely back up the Library on one external hard disk You use the second hard disk as a backup that you keep offsite You can then alternately back up the Library on your onsite external hard disk and swap it with the offsite hard disk to keep all your vaults updated To set up your Aperture backup system you ll need to do the following Determine the number of vaults you need For example do you need one for routine backups one for weekly backups and one for offsite storage Determine the number of hard disks you need for routine backups Determine the number of hard disks you ll use for storing backups offsite Connect your hard disk drives to your computer Open Aperture and create the vaults you need assigning a hard disk to each vault Update the new empty vaults with copies of the Apert
345. modify existing presets when you need to The next time you export using that preset Aperture remembers your modified settings and exports your images accordingly To modify an existing preset 1 Doone of the following Choose Aperture gt Presets gt Image Export e With an image selected choose File gt Export Version or press Command Shift E and in the dialog that appears choose Edit from the Export Preset pop up menu The Export Presets dialog appears 2 Select the preset you want and change its settings as required then click OK Deleting an Export Preset You can delete an export preset when you no longer need it To delete an export preset in the Export Presets dialog 1 Select the preset then click the Delete button Click the Delete button to delete the selected preset The preset disappears from the preset list 2 Click OK The preset is permanently deleted Note If you click the Delete button and then click Cancel the preset will reappear the next time you open the Export Presets dialog Chapter 15 Exporting Your Images 309 Creating Slideshow Presentations 1 With Aperture you can easily create and present slideshows of your images You can use slideshows to review images with clients present a series of final select images or present your images to audiences complete with background music This chapter explains how to create and play slideshows You also learn how to specify the s
346. move x Q Search Y Antarctica McMurdo Sound aerial The selected keyword is highlighted beautiful dangerous drifting iceberg nature scenic untouched wide angle gt Personal Photo specs re 2 Click the Remove Keyword button x Q Search Antarctica McMurdo Sound aerial The selected keyword is di removed The next reg keyword in the list is eon s nature automatically selected scenic untouched wide angle gt Personal gt Photo specs gt Photojournalism y Click this button to remove a keyword Important Removing a keyword from the keyword library removes it from any images to which it s already assigned 212 Part Il Photo Editing Applying Keywords Using Keyword Controls and Keyword Presets One way to apply keywords is to use the keyword controls located in the control bar You can add new keywords to images or apply preset keywords that are part of a keyword group Man a Adults Boy 7 Children Add Keyword 1 2 Woman Couple w Girl t Baby P E Keyword controls About the Keyword Controls in the Control Bar The keyword controls are located at the right side of the control bar and are typically shown by default However if there is not enough room on your screen for example if the Adjustments Inspector and Metadata Inspector are shown they are hidden To show the keyword controls in the control bar 1 If necessary
347. mpression definition The clarity of details in an image See also resolution Glossary 437 438 densitometer An instrument designed to measure the optical density of photographs See also device characterization density The ability of an image to reproduce distinct dark colors An image with high definition in the darker colors is referred to as dense See also contrast flat depth of field The area of the image that appears in focus from the foreground to the background Depth of field is determined by a combination of the opening of the aperture and the focal length of the lens See also aperture background focal length foreground desaturate To remove color from an image Complete desaturation results in a grayscale image See also saturation destination profile The working space profile that defines the results of a color conversion from a source profile See also profile device characterization The process of creating a unique custom profile for a device such as a display or printer Characterizing a device involves specialized dedicated hardware and software to determine the exact gamut of the device See also calibration gamut device dependent Color values that are contingent upon the ability of a device to reproduce those colors For example some colors produced by displays cannot be reproduced on paper by a printer The colors produced by the display are outside the gamut of the printer Therefore those colors a
348. n Q 3 see O Good Fade through Black C Loop slideshow Y Play slideshow on main display only Manual Slow Dissolve 4 Up Slow ray RI Rows p s Padding 0 pixels 4 Up Fast m Columns 4 Fade Time 2 see Background Fl Crossfade 1 Play music during slideshow Search Playlists Song Name Anist Timej TH Ubrary 2 Purchased 60 s Music My Top Rated Recently Played 9 Top 25 Most Played 2 Bilts Ipod Ust 2 Party Shuffle 4 Podcasts 2 Test 2 Videos gt Music is not enabled for this preset GJC es The Slideshow Presets dialog has the following options Presets list Displays the list of current slideshow presets Timing pop up menu Choose how the slideshow duration is determined by fitting the slideshow to the duration of the music by showing each image for a fixed time or by advancing images manually Duration slider Determines the amount of time each image will be shown Drag the slider to the right to increase each image s display time and to the left to decrease display time Loop slideshow checkbox Select this checkbox to loop or continuously play your slideshow If you select this option you must stop your slideshow manually by pressing Esc Quality buttons Select a radio button to specify image quality either Best or Good images Selecting Best displays slides as full size images Select Good to display slides for faster display Play slideshow on main disp
349. n 60 327 372 Show warning when deleting masters checkbox 68 Show Watermark checkbox 308 352 355 shutter priority 448 shutters 448 shutter speeds 50 228 449 Shuttle control 43 120 125 166 449 sidelighting 449 single image prints 279 449 Single Images preset 281 single page view 368 371 Site Theme button 57 58 338 340 343 Size To pop up menu 307 sliders 449 slides 449 Slideshow Best quality 316 Good quality 316 slideshow button 46 Slideshow Preset pop up menu 313 471 472 slideshow presets creating 317 dual displays and 320 editing 318 functions and controls for 315 grid patterns 319 music settings 321 types of 312 Slideshow Presets dialog 313 315 slideshows backgrounds 316 changing images in 315 creating 314 defined 449 fade time 317 functions and controls for 315 grid patterns in 319 keyboard shortcuts 315 looping 316 music settings 317 321 overview 33 312 315 playing 320 presets See slideshow presets quality 316 saving 314 timing 316 transitions 312 Slow Dissolve slideshow preset 312 314 Smart Albums automatic updates to 269 changing contents of 272 collecting images into 270 273 creating 250 252 268 defined 250 449 deleting 273 displaying contents of 268 dragging images from 134 listing contents 30 overview 30 268 271 saving search results as 265 searching for images in 271 transferring images to projects or albums 272 Smart Web Gallery Albums 265 337 softcover books 368 380
350. n Click this button to create a new version from a selected image s From Master digital master file Stacking Buttons o x O For details about working with stacks see Chapter 8 Stacking Images and Making Picks on page 175 A Stack Click this button to group the selected images in a stack B Stack Pick Click this button to mark the selected image as the stack s pick or best image Adjustment Tools DERAF A Selection Select projects albums and images with this tool B Rotate Left Rotate an image to the left with this tool You can use this tool to rotate an image displayed in the Viewer or Browser C Rotate Right Rotate an image to the right with this tool You can use this tool to rotate an image displayed in the Viewer or Browser D Straighten Use the guides to help manually straighten or level the selected image E Crop Trim the selected image with this tool F Spot amp Patch Remove imperfections in the image such as sensor dust with this tool The tool either copies the pixels around the blemish spotting or copies pixels from another area of the image patching Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 47 48 G Red Eye Reduce red eye occurring when the subject s retinas reflect light from your camera s flash with this tool H Lift Copy a set of metadata and adjustments including cropping and straightening of images from a selected image with
351. n also remove keywords from an image by removing specific keywords in the Metadata Inspector To remove specific keywords using the Metadata Inspector Double click the image that has the keywords you want to remove The Inspectors panel appears If the Metadata Inspector isn t shown choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D Click the Keywords button to show the image s assigned keywords Click the Delete button beside the keywords you want to remove You can easily remove an individual keyword from a selection of images without removing the remaining keywords applied to the images Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images 223 224 _ To selectively remove an individual keyword from a group of images Select the group of images In the control bar type the keyword you want to remove in the Add Keyword field then press Shift Return The keyword is removed from the selected images Importing and Exporting Keyword Lists You can import and export keyword lists to share with other Aperture users and transfer to other Aperture systems You can also create keyword lists for specific projects and then import them as needed When you export a keyword list all your keywords are placed in a simple tab delimited text file txt The tab delimited list is set up in a hierarchical structure that matches the hierarchical structure of the Keywords HUD To export a keyword list In the Keywords HUD click the Export but
352. n mode hue An attribute of color perception also known as color phase Red and blue are different hues International Color Consortium ICC An organization established to create the color management standard known as the ICC profile ICC profiles are universally accepted by hardware and software vendors because they re based on an open standard See also ICC profile ICC profile Created as a result of device characterization the ICC profile contains the data about the device s exact gamut See also device characterization gamut International Color Consortium ICC importing The process of bringing digital image files of various types into a project in Aperture Imported files can be created in another application downloaded from a camera or card reader or brought in from another Aperture project See also project inkjet printer A type of printer that creates images by spraying little ink droplets onto the paper See also dye sublimation print photo printer RA 4 IPTC Short for International Press Telecommunications Council IPTC metadata is used by photographers and media organizations to embed keywords words describing the characteristics of the image including the photographer s name in the image files themselves Large publishers typically use image management systems to quickly identify images based on the IPTC information embedded in the image See also EXIF metadata iris See pupil ISO speed The relative sensitivi
353. n the Aperture Help menu PartI Interface and Acquisition Keywords HUD The Keywords HUD contains a library of keywords allowing you to efficiently organize and apply keywords to your images To show the Keywords HUD Choose Window gt Show Keywords HUD or press Shift H Lock button Click this button to lock the Keywords HUD and prevent changes Click it again to unlock the HUD Add Keyword button Click this button to add a keyword to the keyword library of the Keywords HUD Disclosure triangle Close button Click the disclosure triangle for a keyword group to view all keywords in the group Click this button to close the Keywords HUD Search field Export button Enter text to search for keywords that match the text Click the Reset button with an X to clear the field Click this button to export your Aperture keyword list Import button Click this button to import keywords into the Keywords HUD Remove Keyword button Click this button to remove one or more selected keywords Add Subordinate Keyword button Click this button to add a subordinate keyword such as a keyword within a keyword group Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 63 64 Workspace Layouts In addition to allowing you to show and hide areas of the interface Aperture offers three preconfigured workspace layouts created to accommodate different workflows e Basic Use the Basic workspace layout t
354. nal gt Photo specs gt Photojournalism Keyword list gt Stock categories gt Wedding Keyword group Remove Keyword button Lock button Add Subordinate Keyword button Add Keyword button Close button Click this button to close the Keywords HUD e Search field Enter text to search for keywords that match the text Click the Reset button with an X to clear the field 206 Part Il Photo Editing Drag a keyword from the Keywords HUD Keyword group A set of related keywords Some are predefined in Aperture but you can create new groups and add keywords to them You can have keyword groups within other groups Disclosure triangle Click the disclosure triangle next to a keyword group to view all keywords in the group Lock button Click the Lock button to prevent changes to the Keyword HUD Add Keyword button Click this button to add a keyword to the keyword library of the Keywords HUD Add Subordinate Keyword button Click this button to add a subordinate keyword such as a keyword within a keyword group Remove Keyword button Click this button to remove one or more selected keywords Keyword list Displays all keywords in the keyword library of the Keywords HUD Using the Keywords HUD to Apply Keywords You can use the Keywords HUD to quickly apply keywords to one or more images You can simply drag keywords to any image or selection of images in the Viewer or Browser When you select a group
355. ncremental changes to an image you can copy the last version you made and make more changes For example if you plan to use the same cropping and exposure adjustments in multiple versions it makes sense to perform those adjustments first and then make copies of the image version before proceeding To copy the selected image version Select the image you want to copy Do one of the following Choose Images gt Duplicate Version or press Option V e Click the Duplicate Version button in the toolbar e To duplicate the version and automatically select the duplicate choose Images gt Create and Add to Selection gt Duplicate Version or press Shift Option V If you create multiple versions of an image Aperture groups the versions in a stack The stack represents all the versions of a particular image that you have created You can open the stack and see the different versions you ve created for an image For example you might open a stack of versions and select a specific image version to copy The entire stack appears in all the different projects or albums in which the image appears Chapter 5 Working with Images in the Browser 131 132 Click the Stack button on an image to show all versions in the stack To open a stack to see all the versions Click the Stack button on the stack A light gray border surrounds the images in a stack When a stack is open you can select any of its image versions to display
356. nd 349 punctuation in filenames 106 pupils 446 purchasing books 368 397 Put Back button 60 326 Q Quality button 316 quantization 447 Query HUD date searches 256 EXIF data searches 260 functions and controls 252 IPTC data searches 259 keyword searches 200 255 multiple criteria searches 140 262 263 264 opening 249 overview 248 252 ratings based searches 258 saving search results 265 Smart Albums and 30 250 268 270 Smart Web Gallery Albums 337 text searches 253 working with 26 Query HUD Action pop up menu 252 Query HUD button 42 120 166 252 QuickTime 447 QuickTime compatible file formats 89 R RA 4 printers 447 RAID devices 447 RAM 415 447 rangefinders 447 raster image processors RIPs 447 rating buttons 44 190 rating images assigning ratings 190 comparing images 195 defined 447 displaying ratings 158 displaying unrated images 193 finding images by ratings 258 keyboard shortcuts 191 196 197 multiple images at once 192 multiple rating passes 194 overview 25 188 rating based web journal pages 347 rating buttons 44 167 190 Index ratings in metadata 228 sorting by ratings 129 192 star ratings 188 workflow processes 194 Rating pop up menu 258 RAW files color spaces and 427 defined 447 digital master files 72 file size 402 importing 89 resolution and 278 supported formats 20 RAW Fine Tuning controls 61 reapplying master page layouts 381 396 Reapply Master command 381 396 rear
357. nd Light Table as well as in Full Screen mode To lift all the keywords from an image and stamp them on another image or group of images Select the Lift tool or press 0 Lift tool in the toolbar The Lift amp Stamp HUD appears Click an image with the tool All the image s metadata such as applied adjustments rating and keywords appear in the Lift amp Stamp HUD Lift amp Stamp item RAW Fine Tuning 1 All information for Main Rating a PTC the selected image Keywords Girl Woman appears here Stamp Selected Images Part Il Photo Editing Make sure the Keywords checkbox is the only one selected Deselect the metadata checkboxes except for Keywords or select items in the HUD and press Delete to delete them Girl Woman Stamp Selected images To apply the keywords from the HUD select the Stamp tool and click the images to which you want to assign the keywords You can Shift click to stamp a range of images The keywords from the first image are applied to the second image or group of images You can also lift keywords and apply them to a selection of images at once To stamp keywords on a selection of images at once Using the toolbar s standard Selection tool select the images you want Select the Lift tool or press 0 The Lift amp Stamp HUD appears With the Lift tool selected click an image that has the keywords you want to stamp on the selected images All the image s met
358. nd resizing text metadata and photo boxes on pages F Book Action Choose options to reflow the images in a book add an index and pop up menu page numbers or add and change the look of text metadata and photo boxes from this pop up menu G Set Master Page Choose the master page you want to apply to a selected page from pop up menu this pop up menu H Delete Pages button Click this button to delete one or several selected pages from your book Book Layout Controls rely A Text Style Choose the style of text you want for a selected text box using this pop up menu pop up menu B Metadata Format Choose the type of metadata you want to display with your images pop up menu from this pop up menu C Photo Filter Choose a filter to change the look of images For example you might pop up menu apply filters that change an image to black and white or sepia Text Metadata and Photo Box Buttons 1 6T 0 Lett A Add Text Box Click this button to add a text box to the page B Add Metadata Box Click this button to add a metadata box to the page Cc Add Photo Box Click this button to add a photo box to the page D Send Backward Click this button to move a selected box backward in the stacking order of overlapping text or image boxes E Bring Forward Click this button to move a selected box forward in the stacking order of overlapping text or image boxes Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 55
359. ndex Light Table presets 284 locking presets 286 printing with 277 saving 279 print resolution 280 prints defined 446 print vendors 364 397 processing power 415 profiles defined 446 program exposure 446 Project Action pop up menu 41 79 project buttons 46 projects albums in 75 79 closing 141 creating 17 79 defined 72 74 446 deleting images 82 deleting projects 83 displaying 79 dragging images into 110 134 empty 93 95 exporting 114 408 favorites 82 filenaming schemes 106 folders in 75 importing images into 88 93 111 importing or exporting keyword lists 224 moving images into 134 naming 79 opening and closing 80 opening multiple projects 141 organization tips 75 78 79 90 Projects panel functions 41 searching for images 249 Smart Albums and 270 272 switching between 81 tabs in Browser 141 transferring images from Light Table 331 transferring projects 74 114 working with multiple computers 407 Projects panel 18 41 65 83 85 Projects pop up menu 41 79 Promote button 169 promoting images 169 182 proofing images onscreen 156 286 proofing profiles 286 Proportional spacing for images in Grid View checkbox 68 province state names in metadata 229 242 proxy image slideshows 316 PSD files defined 446 exporting 292 importing 89 metadata 304 supported formats 20 watermarks 303 PTP mode 91 Publish Album As option 349 Publish Complete dialog 349 Publish to Mac button 58 59 339 341 Publish to Mac comma
360. nect a FireWire drive before unmounting it from the desktop When evaluating a FireWire drive for use with Aperture take the following into consideration e Some FireWire drives may require driver software You may need to install special driver software in order to use a particular FireWire drive Check the documentation that came with your FireWire drive for more information e FireWire drives may be bus powered This means that they derive power from the FireWire interface itself via pins on the full sized 6 pin FireWire connector As a result these drives are more convenient for portable use and can be used in conjunction with a portable computer without the need for AC power Larger FireWire drives may not be bus powered however requiring you to plug them into a wall socket Additional Displays You can connect two displays to your computer With a second display you can use the extra screen space to take advantage of the ability of Aperture to compare images and play slideshows across multiple displays To connect three or more displays to your computer you must install a PCI graphics card in one of your computer s PCI expansion slots For more information see your computer s manual or the instructions that came with the PCI expansion card For information about supported graphics cards visit the Apple Aperture website at http www apple com aperture specs html 416 Part IV Appendixes and Glossary Setting Up Your System
361. new name for the preset Change the print settings as required then click OK You can now select this preset whenever you need to use these print settings Part Ill Distribution and Backup Modifying an Existing Print Preset Any existing print preset can be changed either temporarily or permanently If you change a preset s settings without saving it the preset will revert to its original settings after the print job is processed If you save the modified settings the preset will retain the setting changes To modify an existing print preset Choose File gt Print Images or press Command P The Print dialog appears Select a print preset then modify it as appropriate Changing an existing preset s settings activates the Save button When you re ready to save the preset click Save The print preset is saved with its new settings Duplicating a Print Preset If you frequently use the majority of a specific print preset s settings changing one or two items such as the type of printer or the paper size it s more convenient to duplicate the preset with the print settings you need than to create a new one For example if you plan to frequently print 8 by 10 inch and 11 by 14 inch prints on the same printer you can create a preset for 8 by 10 inch prints with the appropriate settings duplicate the preset with its settings and then change the paper size Then name one preset 8 x 10 and the other 11 x 14 After that y
362. new ones that you create e Single Images Displays settings for printing a single image per page Contact Sheet Displays settings for printing a series of images on one or more pages Preset Options Print Preset Action pop up menu Use this pop up menu to add new print presets and lock and unlock presets e Save As button Click this button to save a copy of the preset e Save button Click this button to save a preset with its current name Copies amp Pages e Copies field Enter the number of copies of the image to print e Pages buttons and fields Print the entire selection of images or a reduced set Chapter 14 Printing Your Images 279 280 Printer Selection Printer field Displays the printer that will print the images Printer Settings button Click this button to choose a printer and adjust its settings If you are using an ICC profile for your printer and paper choice click this button and choose Color Management from the third pop up menu from the top of the dialog then select No Color Adjustment to turn off system level color management Aperture can then control color management using an ICC profile selected for your printer and paper Paper Size pop up menu Choose a paper size from the list of available sizes Orientation pop up menu Choose landscape or portrait orientation or Best Fit Best Fit automatically orients your image to the page and is usually a good choice for printing single images but may
363. ng Hot Areas in Your Images Images may occasionally have areas that can t be reproduced by a printer For example white areas in an image brightly lit with direct sunlight or bright flashes off a water surface may be so bright that their color is outside the color gamut of a printer You may be able to adjust these areas by changing the exposure or the gamma setting of the image Aperture can display these hot areas of an image with red tints on the image To show the hot areas in your images Choose View gt Highlight Hot Areas or press Shift Option H 154 Part Il Photo Editing Viewing Images at Full Resolution A full resolution view of an image shows every pixel in the image You can set Aperture to display an image at full resolution even though the image may not fit within the Viewer Viewing images at full resolution allows you to inspect your images using the finest level of detail possible To display a selected image at full resolution do one of the following Choose View gt Zoom to Actual Size or press Z Click the Zoom Viewer button in the control bar Click the button again to turn off the full resolution display Zoom Viewer button it c When an image doesn t fit within the area of the Viewer a small gray box appears on the image with a red rectangle inside showing the portion of the image that is currently visible in the Viewer You can drag the red rectangle within th
364. ng Projects Opening and Closing Projects Creating and Showing Favorite Projects Deleting Images from Projects and Albums Deleting Items from the Projects Panel Working with Library Files Quickly Accessing Commands Importing Images An Overview of Importing Images File Formats You Can Import into the Library Planning Your Import Strategy Importing from Your Digital Camera or Card Reader Importing Image Files Stored on Your Computer Automatically Naming Your Imported Images Adding Metadata to Images During Import Creating Stacks Automatically During Import Adjusting the Image File s Time When Importing Dragging Files from the Finder to the Projects Panel Importing Folders of Images from the Finder Importing Your iPhoto Library Transferring Projects from Another System Making an Immediate Backup Where Aperture Stores Your Managed Files in the Library Photo Editing Working with Images in the Browser An Overview of the Browser Navigating Through and Selecting Images Working with a Selection of Images Working with Images in Grid View Working with Images in List View Searching for Images in the Browser Rearranging Images in the Browser Sorting Images in Grid View Rotating Images Creating Versions of an Image Deleting Images from the Browser Contents Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 134 135 141 142 145 146 148 148 149 150 151 151 152 154 155 156 156 157 158 160 162 163 164 165 165 169 171
365. ng in System Preferences that allows the Mac OS X desktop to span multiple displays See also display mirroring Glossary external editor An application used in tandem with Aperture to perform advanced adjustments such as compositing Aperture creates a new master file when an image is sent to an external editor and automatically retrieves the master file when the image is saved See also compositing master file external flash A type of flash connected to the camera via the hot shoe bracket or PC terminal Using an external flash is the best technique for avoiding the red eye effect in your subject s eyes See also flash red eye f stop The ratio of the focal length of the lens to the diameter of the opening of the aperture See also aperture fill in lighting The use of an artificial light source such as daylight lamps or flash to soften a subject or fill in shadows See also bounce lighting color temperature white balance film A flexible transparent base coated with a light sensitive emulsion capable of recording images See also dust and scratch removal emulsion filmstrip An interface element in Full Screen mode that allows you to scroll through rate rotate and search for images See also Full Screen mode filters a Modifiable search criteria used in the Query HUD to return a specific selection of images b Effects applied in Photoshop that affect the visual quality of the image to which they re applied c A colored pie
366. ng versions of an image and delete all the images in the stack as well as the digital master file Warning When you delete a master file the master file and all version information is permanently removed from the Aperture Library This includes all applied adjustments and metadata You cannot use the Undo command to restore the master file or associated versions Deleting a master file also clears the Undo queue so you cannot undo the series of actions before the master file deletion Deleted files are placed in the Trash in an Aperture folder The deleted files are recoverable from the Trash until you empty it To delete a stack and its digital master file Select the stack you want to delete Choose File gt Delete Master Image and All Versions When a dialog appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the digital master file and versions click Move to Trash Recovering Deleted Files If you accidentally delete an image you meant to keep and you can t recover it by choosing Undo you may be able to recover it from the Trash If you originally backed up your deleted digital master files the vault may also still hold them If necessary you can restore the Library from the vault If you updated your vault after the deletion the deleted digital master files are placed in a folder given your vault s name and the words Deleted Images You can find the Deleted Images folder in the folder that holds your vault T
367. ngle image on the screen Secondary Viewer Mirror XM Alternate XA Span xS Blank XB Desktop When the Viewer is set to show three images at a time Aperture displays the selected image in the center of the three images that appear in the Viewer To display three images do one of the following Choose View gt Main Viewer gt Three Up or press Option H Choose Three Up from the Viewer Mode pop up menu in the control bar When the Viewer is set to show multiple images Aperture displays all selected images To display multiple images do one of the following Choose View gt Main Viewer gt Multi or press Option U Choose Multi from the Viewer Mode pop up menu in the control bar Chapter 6 Displaying Images in the Viewer 149 150 The compare image is displayed with a yellow border visible in the Viewer and Browser Comparing Images You can select an image against which to compare other images in your project or the Library The selected image remains on the screen as you select and display other images to compare against it The comparison feature is useful for making final selections of the best images in a series or comparing two versions of an image for correct exposure or highlights When comparing images you can apply ratings and keywords and make adjustments to selected images Comparing images involves setting a compare image and then viewing other images against the compare image
368. not provide good results for contact sheets ColorSync Profile pop up menu Choose a printer profile to use when printing Black Point Compensation checkbox Select this checkbox to scale the black and white luminance values to the selected ColorSync profile This option compensates for the difference between the way black images are saturated on a computer screen compared to the way black ink is saturated on a print Turning on black point compensation can prevent shadows from appearing as solid black Gamma value slider Specify a gamma setting to adjust the brightness of the printed image so that it matches the display s output as closely as possible Because displays illuminate images images shown on a display screen tend to appear more luminous than when printed Increasing the gamma value can compensate for this difference A typical setting ranges between 1 1 and 1 2 Layout Options Scale To pop up menu When you select a single image preset you can use this pop up menu to choose whether to fit your image to the selected paper size print a specific image size or print a custom image size Fit Entire Image scales the image to be as large as possible for the paper size without cropping the image Fill Page makes the image fit the entire page cropping the image if necessary Custom allows you to specify the image dimensions you d like Number of pages and Number of columns and rows buttons When you select a contact sheet
369. ns aperture lens maximum mm color model profile name and badges IPTC Basic Version name caption keywords credit copyright notice and object name IPTC Expanded Version name caption credit copyright notice object name city province state country name special instructions byline category date created headline source and keywords Grid View Basic Badges and rating Grid View Expanded Badges rating and version name Viewer Basic Badges and rating Viewer Expanded Rating badges aperture shutter speed exposure bias focal length 35mm focal length caption keywords version name image date ISO speed rating file size and master location List Basic Version name badges rating image date aperture shutter speed exposure bias focal length 35mm focal length pixel size orientation aspect ratio filename file size camera model import group and master location List Expanded Version name badges rating image date caption keywords credit copyright notice object name filename camera model import group master location aperture shutter speed exposure bias ISO speed rating focal length 35mm focal length and pixel size Tooltips Version name file name image date caption keywords aperture shutter speed exposure bias ISO speed rating focal length 35mm focal length pixel size camera model and rating Chapter 11 Working with Metadata 229 230 T
370. o all native Mac OS X applications See also color management system CMS color matching method CMM ColorSync Utility ColorSync Utility A centralized application for setting preferences viewing installed profiles assigning profiles to devices and repairing profiles that do not conform to the current ICC specification See also ColorSync International Color Consortium ICC profile Glossary Commission Internationale de I Eclairage CIE An organization established in 1931 to create standards for a series of color spaces representing the visible spectrum of light See also color space device dependent device independent lab plot complementary metal oxide semiconductor CMOS A type of digital image sensor that is capable of recording the entire image provided by the light sensitive elements in parallel essentially all at once resulting in a higher rate of data transfer to the storage device Tiny colored microlenses are fitted on each light sensitive element ina CMOS sensor to increase its ability to interpret light See also charge coupled device CCD digital image sensor compositing A process in which two or more digital images are combined into one See also effects compression The process by which digital image files are reduced in size Lossy compression is the process of reducing digital image file sizes through the removal of redundant or less important image data Lossless compression reduces file sizes by mathema
371. o calibrate and profile your second display 1 Drag the application to the second display then attach the optical device Apple Cinema Display Apple Cinema Display Drag the color calibration window to the second display 2 Follow the previous calibration steps Now your second display is calibrated Important Your display s profile is a snapshot of the device s behavior If the behavior of the display changes the profile is no longer valid Therefore it s important to profile your display as frequently as possible Some color adjustment professionals profile their displays daily Appendix B_ Calibrating Your Aperture System 429 430 Calibrating and Profiling Your Printer Calibrating and profiling your printer is similar to calibrating and profiling your display The color management system comes with color charts specifically designed to help the calibration system create a profile for your printer To calibrate and profile your printer If you haven t already done so install the software that came with your color management system Open the color calibration software application Follow the onscreen instructions to print the color chart using the printer you want to profile Follow the instructions that came with your color management system to scan the color chart When the application has finished scanning the color chart it asks you to save the custom ICC profile created during the calibration process This pr
372. o have an image appear aligned on the right edge of the box Choose Scale to Fit Right Aligned You can also adjust the scaling of an image within a box Aperture provides an Image Scale slider to rescale images Image Scale we fa To change the scale of an image in a photo box Double click the image A slider appears that allows you to adjust the scale of the image Drag the slider to adjust the image scale Click outside the photo box to hide the slider again If an image is scaled so that only part of the image is visible within the photo box you can change the part of the image that s visible To change the part of the image that appears in a photo box Double click the image A slider appears that allows you to adjust the scale of the image Drag the image to change the part that s visible within the box Part Ill Distribution and Backup Changing the Aspect Ratio for a Photo Box Pages hold photo boxes with specific sizes and aspect ratios You can select a box and change the aspect ratio to fit the image For example you can change a box with a landscape orientation to one with a portrait orientation Aperture provides commands for creating photo boxes in the following aspect ratios 4 3 landscape e 3 2 landscape e 2 3 portrait 3 4 portrait e Square e The aspect ratio of the current image To change the aspect ratio for a photo box Click the Edit Layout button if it s not already selected Se
373. o one of the following e Choose File gt New Smart gt Album or press Command Shift L e Choose New Smart Album from the Add to Library pop up menu in the Projects panel e Click the New Smart Album button in the toolbar Anew untitled Smart Album appears within the project Rename the Smart Album by entering the name you want lug All Images Antarctica E Query HUD button Q Enter a new name for the _4 Antarctica Selects Smart Album E On Land wa Underwater Bali gt Belize Part Il Photo Editing Close button Select the Smart Album you want to search within 4 In the Query HUD specify the search criteria you want x Smart Settings Antartica Selects Library Match aay of the following Qe Quick Search V ating TS greater than or equal to Specify the search criteria cal for images you want in the Smart Album For more information about using the Query HUD and specifying search criteria see Chapter 12 Searching for and Displaying Images on page 247 5 Click the Query HUD s close button Searching Within a Smart Album After creating a Smart Album you can search for specific images within the contents of the Smart Album onn Aperture je Sade e ae ee oe Moe zheoes OB aa S EB sects Show the Browser s Query HUD and specify search criteria To search within the contents of a Smart Album
374. o review images perform initial rating passes and create and work with stacks of images e Maximize Browser Use the Maximize Browser workspace layout to work with multiple projects e Maximize Viewer Use the Maximize Viewer workspace layout to see an enlarged view of images with the Browser and Viewer controls still available This workspace layout is useful when working with the Light Table You can easily switch between workspace layouts by choosing commands or pressing keyboard shortcuts To choose a workspace layout do one of the following Choose Window gt Layouts then choose the layout you want from the submenu Press Command Option and the letter corresponding to the layout you want S for Basic B for Maximize Browser or V for Maximize Viewer Part Interface and Acquisition You can use keyboard shortcuts to quickly show or hide different areas of your workspace Keyboard shortcut Function Show Hide Import panel sin J ae e Show Hide Vaults panel Show Hide Projects panel Show Hide Viewer Show Hide keyword controls Show Hide Inspectors panel Swap workspace 4 Rotate workspace Show Hide toolbar Turn on off Full Screen mode Customizing the Toolbar The toolbar can be customized to display exactly the tools you need You can customize the toolbar by selecting the tools to include rearranging them and choosing whether both the tool s icon and text appear Hiding
375. o set the display of metadata in the Viewer 1 Choose View gt View Options or press Command J 2 Select the Viewer checkbox amp View Options Select this checkbox to viewer turn on the display of metadata in the Viewer D Set 1 Viewer Basic Set 2 Viewer Expanded 7 Placement Over M Show Labels Placement Below Show Labels Light Table F show decorations C Grid View Set 1 Grid View Basic Placement Below Show Labels Set 2 Grid View Expanded Placement Over _ Show Labels List View Columns Osara O Set 2 List Expanded C image Tooltips se Tootips 2 Choose the metadata view you want from the Set 1 pop up menu Choose an alternate metadata view from the Set 2 pop up menu Choose where you want the metadata displayed in relation to the image from the Placement pop up menus To include labels with metadata items select the Show Labels checkbox Click the Set 1 or Set 2 button to specify the set you want to use Click Done To set the display of metadata in the Browser in grid view Choose View gt View Options or press Command J Select the Grid View checkbox In the Grid View area choose the metadata view you want from the Set 1 pop up menu Choose an alternate metadata view from the Set 2 pop up menu Choose where you want the metadata displayed in relation to the imag
376. occer News Game Team San Jose Credit Photographer s name and or agency name 32 characters Example Matthew Birdsell Mercury News Copyright Copyright date photographer s name agency name and rights 128 characters Example 2003 Matthew Birdsell Mercury News All rights reserved Object name A unique identifier used by an agency or organization to 64 characters catalog images Example mt52642j Created date Date the image was created 16 characters Example 05 16 2005 City City where the image was captured 32 characters Example San Jose Province State Province or state where the image was captured 32 characters Example California Country Country where the image was captured 64 characters Example USA Special instructions Applicable restrictions rights or embargo information 256 characters Example MAGS OUT INTERNET OUT NO THIRD PARTY SALES Byline The image byline text 64 characters Example Matthew Birdsell Mercury News Category Applicable ANPA category codes 3 characters Example International Headline The headline published with the image 256 characters Example Mayor Alvarado Opens New Soccer Season in San Jose Source The source that provided the image 32 characters Example Mercury News Part II Photo Editing These four images are stacked together the checkmark identifies this image as the album pick Understanding Badge Overlays When you apply adjustm
377. of five stars You can show images with a specific rating images rated at or below a specific rating or images rated at or above a rating Aperture is preset to hide images rated as rejected showing only those that are unrated or better You can also search using multiple rating criteria by adding several rating search criteria options from the Add Filter pop up menu For example you might create a search that locates images that have a rating of three stars or four stars only To search for images by rating In the Projects panel select a project or an album you want to search Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser In the Query HUD select the Rating checkbox x Match aay 2 of the following V Rating is greater than or equal to 7 A par n Specify the rating level you want using this slider is one or more of the following New Smart Album New Album With Current Images From the Rating pop up menu choose whether you want to search for images with a rating that is equal to greater than or equal to or less than or equal to the specified rating Specify the rating level by dragging the slider The images that match the search criteria are displayed in the Browser To save your search results see Saving Your Search Results on page 265 You can quickly display images with specific ra
378. of the following To store imported master image files in the Aperture Library Choose In the Aperture Library from the Store Files pop up menu e To store imported master image files as referenced images in the Pictures folder on your hard disk Choose Pictures from the Store Files pop up menu e To store imported master image files as referenced images in a location other than the Pictures folder Choose Choose from the Store Files pop up menu and select the folder you want Choose No folder from the Subfolders pop up menu to specify that the files be stored as separate individual files in the selected folder You can also specify that Aperture create and store your files in a hierarchy of subfolders with specific folder names For more information about specifying folders to hold your imported images see Importing Master Files for Referenced Images into Folders on page 103 Choose whether you want the image files moved or copied to a new location by clicking the Move files or Copy files button For more information about moving and copying files see Changing the Location of Images When You Import Them on page 100 5 Choose a naming convention from the Version Name pop up menu to specify how you want the images named For example choose Master Filename from the Version Name pop up menu to have your files stored using the current master filenames from your camera or card Choose a name format from the Vers
379. ofile is saved at Users username Library ColorSync Profiles Now your printer is profiled Important Your printer s profile is a snapshot of the device s behavior This means that the profile is specific to the type of paper and ink used when the printer was profiled If you print on multiple types of paper such as glossy and semi glossy it is important that you create separate profiles for each paper type Part IV Appendixes and Glossary Credits Vietnam Photography by William McLeod Copyright 2005 william mercer mcLeod http www williammercermcleod com Sonoma Fairgrounds Photography by William McLeod Copyright 2005 william mercer mcLeod http www williammercermcleod com Antarctica Photography by Norbert Wu Copyright 2005 Norbert Wu http www norbertwu com Amanda Modeling Photography by Matthew Birdsell Copyright 2005 Matthew Birdsell http www matthewbirdsell com Appendix 431 Glossary Glossary additive color Images with color elements derived from the light source itself RGB is a common form of additive color See also RGB adjustment Any change to the appearance of an image Adobe RGB 1998 A commonly used color profile often used for printing Many professional labs request that image files be delivered in this color space See also color space album A type of container in the Aperture Library that holds only versions You can create albums at either the project level or
380. ol bar Select the Rotate Right tool in the toolbar then click an image Creating Versions of an Image Occasionally you may want to make copies of an image For example you might copy an image and apply different exposure settings or other adjustments or change it for a specific use such as for placement in a webpage or book When you copy an image Aperture makes a new version of the image When you create a new image version you have a choice of copying the original digital master file or the currently selected version with any changes you ve made For example if you ve made a series of adjustments to an image and now you want to start from the original digital master file and make different adjustments you can copy the digital master file and start with a fresh unchanged image Part Il Photo Editing To create a new version from a digital master file Select the image you want to copy Do one of the following e Choose Images gt New Version From Master or press Option G e Click the New Version From Master button in the toolbar To copy the master JPEG image choose Images gt New Version From Master JPEG or press Option J Note This command is dimmed unless a JPEG image is selected To duplicate the master file and automatically select the duplicate choose Images gt Create and Add to Selection gt New Version From Master or press Shift Option G If you re creating a number of image versions showing i
381. olbar when using the Light Table To use these tools to make a change to an image in the Light Table select the image in the Browser then click the Show Viewer button at the top of the Browser to the right of the Sort Direction button The selected image appears in the Viewer and you can make your changes Click the Show Viewer button again to return to the Light Table Moving and Resizing Images in the Light Table You can drag images to different locations in the Light Table trying out different combinations and orientations For example you might take a group of related images and arrange them to see how they d appear on a print page You can also enlarge or reduce images After resizing an image you can quickly reset the image back to its original size To move images in the Light Table In the Light Table select the images you want to move and drag them to a new location To drag an image to a location offscreen Drag the image to the border of the Light Table until the screen begins to scroll Chapter 17 Using the Light Table 327 328 To change an image s size 1 Select the image in the Light Table 2 Position the pointer over the image then drag a resize handle to change the image s size Move the pointer over the image to show resize handles then drag to change the image s size To reset an image to its previous size do one of the following Choose Edit gt Undo Resize or press Command Z Con
382. on Click this button to edit the text on your pages e Edit Layout button Click this button to change the page layout You can then select text metadata and photo boxes on the page and move and resize them as you like 366 Part III Distribution and Backup e Pages panel Click here to see an individual page in the book Add Pages pop up menu Choose an option from this pop up menu to add a page or pages to the book Delete Pages button Click this button to delete the selected page or pages from your book e Set Master Page pop up menu Choose the master page you want to apply to a selected page Book Action pop up menu Choose options to reflow the images in a book add an index and page numbers or add and change the look of text metadata and photo boxes Metadata Format pop up menu Text Style TDO Photo Filter pop up menu Text Style pop up menu Choose the style of text you want for a selected text box Metadata Format pop up menu Choose the type of metadata you want to display with your images Photo Filter pop up menu Choose to apply various filters to an image to change its look Add Metadata Add Photo Box Box button button Add Text Box button H ol 2m Ga Cea o Bring Forward button Send Backward button e Add Text Box button Click this button to add a text box to the page e Add Metadata Box button Click this button to add a metadata box to the page e Add Photo Bo
383. on about them Aperture can assign filenames using custom naming conventions as well as record metadata such as captions keywords dates copyright and credit information and IPTC information You can even set Aperture to stack related images together keeping bracketed shots or a series of shots taken in quick succession in groups that you can easily select and work with For more information about stacks see Chapter 8 Stacking Images and Making Picks on page 175 Does Aperture Support Tethered Shooting You can use an Automator workflow to set up tethered shooting between your camera and your computer to automatically import images into Aperture Aperture works with Automator to automate common tasks For information about using an Automator workflow for tethered shooting go to http automator us aperture File Formats You Can Import into the Library Aperture is a QuickTime compatible application so it supports standard QuickTime compatible still image file formats as well as some other file formats and file types The following file types and formats can be imported e GIF JPEG JPEG2000 PNG PSD 8 and 16 bit RAW files from a variety of supported digital cameras TIFF 8 and 16 bit Note For a list of supported digital cameras go to http www apple com aperture Chapter 4 Importing Images 89 90 Planning Your Import Strategy Before you import images into Aperture it s a good idea to plan the org
384. on page 105 8 To add metadata to your images as they re imported choose a metadata preset from the Add Metadata From pop up menu For more information about setting up and using metadata presets see Working with Metadata Views on page 235 9 When you are satisfied with your image selection click the Import arrow or the Import button in the lower right corner of the dialog As the images appear in the Browser you can begin working with them 102 Part Interface and Acquisition Importing Master Files for Referenced Images into Folders When you import images as referenced images you can have Aperture place their master files individually into a selected folder or create subfolders to hold the files For example you might have the imported image files placed in subfolders identified by date You can create folder name format presets that you can quickly choose to select the folder name format you want To create a folder name format you select the name elements you want in the Folder Naming Presets dialog You can specify a combination of name elements to create the custom folder names you want You can compose folder name formats that combine the following name elements e Version Name e Master Filename e Sequence Number 1 of 3 2 of 3 3 of 3 e Image Year e Image Month e Image Day e Image Date Image Time e Index Number 1 2 3 e Custom Name e Counter 001 002 003 e Current Date e Current Time e
385. on your Layout Options settings To print contact sheets In the Browser select the images you want to print Choose File gt Print Images or press Command P In the Print dialog specify the following settings Select a contact sheet preset in the Preset Name list Make sure the settings in the Printer Selection area are correct such as paper size and ColorSync profile In the Layout Options area specify the number of pages or the number of columns and rows as a basis for laying out the contact sheets Aperture automatically adjusts the size of images based on your Layout Options settings The size of the images on the contact sheet is based on whether or not you choose to constrain the images within a specific number of pages The fewer pages selected the smaller the images Similarly if you specify the number of columns and rows on the page the more columns and rows the smaller the images Verify the layout of your contact sheet in the preview area For printers incapable of printing full bleeds select the Show crop marks checkbox in the Border Options area After you ve verified that all the settings in the Print dialog are correct click Print Your contact sheet is printed Part Ill Distribution and Backup BW N Printing a Book You can print a book to check the final format and look of it before having it printed by a professional printer ordering a printed copy online or distributing copies to others
386. onal so saps gt Phots specs appears in this list within Emenee the keyword group gt Stock categories gt Wedding Type the new keyword then press Return The new keyword appears in the keyword group you selected sorted alphabetically within the group You can also create new keyword groups For example if you added the keyword Fish to your list you might want to add Angelfish Dolphin Tuna and Shark under the Fish keyword so you can further define your images To create a new keyword group with keywords in it To show the Keywords HUD do one of the following Choose Window gt Show Keywords HUD or press Shift H e Click the Keywords HUD button in the toolbar The Keywords HUD appears Click the Add Keyword button then type a name for the new keyword group With the new keyword group name selected click the Add Subordinate Keyword button type a keyword then press Return The keyword you just added becomes the first keyword in the new group To add another keyword to the new group click the Add Keyword button type a keyword then press Return Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images 211 Removing Keywords from the Keywords HUD After adding keywords to the keyword library of the Keywords HUD you may decide not to use certain keywords If so you can easily remove them To remove a keyword or keyword group from the keyword library 1 In the Keywords HUD select the keyword or keyword group you want to re
387. oose contain one or more of the following To display only those images that have all the keywords you selected Choose contain all of the following 5 Select the checkboxes next to the keywords you want to search for 6 Choose any from the Match pop up menu if it s not already chosen You can also search for IPTC keywords using the IPTC search options These options allow you to specify searches for specific IPTC fields in a variety of ways For example you can search for any images that don t have keywords assigned For more information see Searching by IPTC Information on page 259 The images that match the search criteria are immediately displayed in the Browser To save your search results see Saving Your Search Results on page 265 Chapter 12 Searching for and Displaying Images 255 256 Select the Calendar checkbox Select the dates you want to search by Searching by Date You can search for and locate images by the date they were taken For example you might locate any images taken during a trip between May 16 2005 and May 20 2005 To search for images by date you use the Calendar search options When the calendar appears any dates that appear in bold represent dates on which new photos were taken as registered in the EXIF data You can select a date or several dates in the calendar to search for images taken on those dates You can also specify a range of dates To search for imag
388. or The Browser displays the images in the web gallery album After you ve laid out your web gallery or web journal pages in the Webpage Editor you can export them to your Mac account or save them as HTML pages that you can post to your webpage server Once the images are posted online you can give clients the Internet address of the pages and clients can view them remotely 335 336 The new album you sxaracawescatey created appears in the Projects Panel Creating Web Galleries Web galleries offer a way to showcase your images on the web You have a number of options for designing these pages You can choose the type of information to accompany each image such as name and rating You can also specify the number of columns and rows you want on each page Creating Web Gallery Albums To create a web gallery you must first create an aloum that holds your web gallery images The easiest way to do this is to select images you want to appear in the web gallery create an album and have Aperture automatically place the images on the webpages Aperture creates as many webpages as necessary to hold all of the selected images To create a web gallery album from selected images In the Browser select the images you want to place on your webpages Do one of the following Choose File gt New From Selection gt Web Gallery e Choose New Web Gallery From Selection from the Add to Library pop up menu in the Projects
389. or press Option T Choose Stack from the Viewer Mode pop up menu Tip When the Viewer is in Stack mode you can press the Up and Down Arrow keys to move from stack to stack Part Il Photo Editing The Stack button appears on the current pick image Creating Stacks Manually After importing photos you may want to quickly review them and delete those that you immediately see have technical or content flaws You may then want to group the remaining images into stacks before rating them Stacking images manually can help provide an initial organization and an overview of your shots which you can then put through a more refined or discriminating rating pass later To create a stack manually In the Browser select the images you want to stack You can Shift click adjacent images and Command click nonadjacent images to select them Tip As a fast way to select a series of images select an image at one end of the series hold down the Shift key and press the Right or Left Arrow key to select additional images Choose Stacks gt Stack or press Command k The selected images are now stacked and have a dark gray line around them The selected images are now stacked and appear linked in gray The Stack button appears on the current pick image You can change the pick image and rearrange the order of the images in the stack as you wish You can unstack a selection of images if you need to To unstack a selection of ima
390. ors or press I to open the Inspectors panel Double click an image in the Browser to open the Inspectors panel Choose Window gt Show Adjustments or press Control A Adjustments eo R G ls am ea gt gt RAW Fine Tuning as amp 7 exposure 5 Exposure pg 00 Saturation E g 100 Contrast O 8 00 A Adjustments Click the disclosure triangle for an adjustment to view its controls Select the checkbox for an adjustment to apply changes using the adjustment controls B Add Adjustments Choose the types of adjustments you want to apply to an image pop up menu from this pop up menu When you choose an adjustment its controls appear in the Adjustments Inspector C Adjustment Action Choose a histogram view and remove selected or all pop up menu adjustments made D Reset button Click the Reset button for an adjustment to reset the controls to their default settings Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 49 To remove an adjustment from an image deselect the checkbox for the adjustment For more information about using adjustment controls see Performing Image Adjustments in the Aperture Help menu Although you can apply initial adjustments with the Adjustments Inspector it s often more convenient to use the Adjustments HUD in Full Screen mode For more information see Chapter 7 Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode on p
391. orting them Also plan the project organization you ll need to hold the images For more information about importing files see Importing Image Files Stored on Your Computer on page 97 Try out the different methods for importing individual files into your system You can import individual files import files stored in folders and drag files or folders from the Finder into Aperture For more information see Dragging Files from the Finder to the Projects Panel on page 110 and Importing Folders of Images from the Finder on page 111 Once you re familiar with Aperture you can begin to create and organize your professional image management system Part Interface and Acquisition Importing from Your Digital Camera or Card Reader You can import images from a camera or card reader into Aperture using the Import dialog in two ways e Import all images on the camera or card reader at once e Import a selection of images from the camera or card reader You can also Choose to store imported images in the Aperture Library or select a different location on your hard disk and import them as referenced images e Have Aperture automatically reformat your memory card after the images are imported e Have Aperture automatically create stacks of bracketed images or images shot in quick succession e Apply a naming convention to standardize the names of the image files in the Library e Apply metadata to the image files such as
392. ose a text style for your text from the Text Style pop up menu lt Da o Making Font Changes in Books Aperture provides a Font window that you can use to change fonts in your books You can select text in a text box on a page and change the font font size font color and more Important Aperture follows the text smoothing preferences you have set up in the Appearance pane of System Preferences The default setting for Mac OS X doesn t smooth fonts that are 8 points in size or smaller This setting only affects the appearance of fonts onscreen the fonts will appear smoothed when printed To show the Font window Choose Edit gt Show Fonts or press Command T 020 Font o a z2 Q s Typeface Size S Chapter 19 Creating Books 391 392 BW N Arranging Text on the Page You can resize and reposition text and metadata boxes on the page You must first select the Edit Layout button to enable changing the page format When you click boxes to select them the boxes show handles that you can drag to resize the boxes You can also drag the contents of a box to move the box to a new position To arrange text on the page Click the Edit Layout button if it s not already selected Select the page you want to work on in the Pages panel Select the text box you want to move or resize Drag the box to a new location or drag a handle on the selected box
393. ou may need to quickly find a referenced image s master file on your hard disk to copy or move it attach it to an email or otherwise work with it outside of Aperture You can select an image in the Browser and have Aperture display the image s master file location in the Finder To locate a referenced image s master file in the Finder Select the referenced image you want in the Browser Choose File gt Show in Finder A Finder window appears displaying the selected referenced image s master file Note If you open a referenced image s master file from the Finder in another application you will not see the changes or adjustments you ve made to the image in Aperture Your changes appear in versions stored in the Aperture Library and the referenced image s master file is always left unchanged To see the adjusted photo you need to export a version of it Reconnecting Missing or Offline Referenced Images When a referenced image s master file is offline you can t make adjustments to the image until you reconnect the master file to your Aperture system If you have disconnected a hard disk drive that holds a referenced image s master file you can reconnect the drive to your computer system and Aperture will automatically locate the hard disk and reconnect the master file If an image is offline or modified in some way that makes it unrecognizable as the original referenced image you can still select it and have Aperture reconnect th
394. ou simply select the preset for the image size you plan to print and click Print To copy a new print preset Choose File gt Print Images or press Command P The Print dialog appears Select a print preset to duplicate then choose Duplicate from the Print Preset Action pop up menu at the bottom left side of the dialog A new duplicate preset based on the currently selected print preset appears in the Preset Name list Enter a new name for the preset Change the print settings as required then click OK You can now select this preset whenever you need to use these print settings Chapter 14 Printing Your Images 285 286 Locking Print Presets If you worry that you may inadvertently modify your print presets you can lock them To lock or unlock a print preset In the Print dialog select the preset then choose Lock or Unlock from the Print Preset Action pop up menu at the bottom left side of the dialog When a preset is locked a lock icon appears to the right of the preset name Deleting a Print Preset You can delete a print preset that you no longer use To delete a print preset In the Print dialog select the preset then choose Delete from the Print Preset Action pop up menu at the bottom left side of the dialog The preset is deleted from the Preset Name list Proofing Your Images Onscreen Your printer paper type and color profile all affect the way your images are printed Onscreen proofing allows you
395. our images in Full Screen mode where you can work with them in detail Toolbar available in Full Screen mode Pf aa DE PUTT eos FO The displayed image fills the screen Filmstrip available in Full Screen mode To see images in Full Screen mode you press F Press F again to switch back to the Viewer In Full Screen mode you can change the display of images to show single images three images or up to ten images at once For more information about using Full Screen mode see Chapter 7 Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode on page 163 22 Part Interface and Acquisition Displaying your images clearly and accurately is a pivotal function of Aperture With Aperture you can take advantage of the latest display technology and view and work with your images in Full Screen mode and on dual displays Using Aperture with two displays is ideal for creating a large workspace You can easily compare and adjust images play slideshows and present the best of your photos at optimal size during client reviews Working with Heads Up Displays To work efficiently in Aperture you can use floating panels of controls called heads up displays HUDs to change images For example when you view images in Aperture in Full Screen mode you can open an Adjustments HUD to adjust your images HUDs are available for use in Full Screen mode and can make adjusting images easier As you work on your images you can position HUDs anywh
396. our own metadata views and metadata presets using the Metadata Action pop up menu in the Metadata Inspector Chapter 11 Working with Metadata 227 228 Select this checkbox to turn on the display of metadata in the Viewer Select this checkbox to crid view turn on the display of metadata in the Browser Select this checkbox to image Tooltips turn on the display of image tooltips Displaying Metadata with Your Images You use the View Options window to specify the metadata shown with images in the Viewer and Browser as well as the metadata that appears in image tooltips For the Viewer and Browser you can choose a metadata view to display and choose an alternate that you can quickly switch to by pressing a keyboard shortcut 0AA View Options Viewer D Set 1 Viewer Basic Set 2 Viewer Expanded Light Table Y show decorations Placement Below _ Show Labels Placement Over M Show Labels Set 1 Grid View Basic Set 2 Grid View Expanded List View Columns Oset 1 tist Basie Osez u eranda i Placement Below 1 Show Labels Placement Over _ _ Show Labels sex Tootips You can also choose whether the information should appear on or below the image using the Placement pop up menus Some metadata views are specifically designed for displaying information in the Viewer the Bro
397. ove selected or all pop up menu adjustments made Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 61 62 H Auto Levels Combined button Click this button to have Aperture automatically adjust the levels in the selected image based on the combined luminance values of all three color channels l Auto Levels Separate button Click this button to have Aperture automatically adjust the levels in the selected image by individual color channels J Auto Levels Reset button K Levels controls If you don t like the Auto Levels adjustments click this Reset button to remove them Use these controls to adjust the shadows midtones and highlights in the image based on a histogram that can be set to show luminance combined red green and blue channels RGB or individual red green and blue channels L Highlights amp Shadows controls M Noise Reduction controls Use these controls to adjust the shadows and highlights in the image Use these controls to adjust the noise in the image For more information about using the Adjustments HUD and its controls see Performing Image Adjustments in the Aperture Help menu Individual Adjustment Tool HUDs Many of the Aperture adjustment tools including Crop Spot amp Patch Red Eye Lift and Stamp work in conjunction with HUDs To view any of these HUDs Select the adjustment tool in the toolbar To learn more about the adjustment tools see Performing Image Adjustments i
398. ow one image per display To display the currently selected image in the secondary Viewer do one of the following Choose View gt Secondary Viewer gt Alternate or press Option A Choose Alternate from the Viewer Mode pop up menu in the control bar Main Viewer Y Multi xu Primary XR Three Up XH Compare XO Stack Secondary Viewer Mirror XM Y Alternate XA Span xs Blank XB Desktop Xx c Chapter 6 Displaying Images in the Viewer 157 158 The caption and keywords are displayed here To display the same images in both the primary and secondary Viewers do one of the following Choose View gt Secondary Viewer gt Mirror or press Option M Choose Mirror from the Viewer Mode pop up menu in the control bar To display a selection of images across both the primary and secondary Viewers do one of the following Choose View gt Secondary Viewer gt Span or press Option S Choose Span from the Viewer Mode pop up menu in the control bar To turn off the display of images in the secondary Viewer do one of the following Choose View gt Secondary Viewer gt Blank or press Option B Choose Blank from the Viewer Mode pop up menu in the control bar To turn off the secondary Viewer function do one of the following Choose View gt Secondary Viewer gt Desktop or press Option X Choose Desktop from the Viewer Mode pop up menu in the control bar Displaying Metadata Associated with Ima
399. ox 2 Click the Add button to create a new folder name format or select the preset folder name format you want to change 3 Drag the name elements you want into the Format field in the order you want them 4 Drag a forward slash between the elements where you want subfolders created 5 Enter a custom name in the Custom Name field if you want 6 Click OK Your new folder name format now appears in the Subfolder Format pop up menu When using a counter in your folder name format you can specify the starting number and the number of digits from one to six digits that appear in the counter When you use a folder name format with a counter make sure to reset the initial starting number if necessary Otherwise on the next export Aperture will continue numbering the folders containing the exported images starting from the last number of the previous export To reset the starting number of a counter in a folder name format In the Folder Naming Presets dialog type 0 zero in the Incrementing counter starting at field Chapter 15 Exporting Your Images 295 Exporting Image Versions You can export image versions that you ve created in Aperture For example you might make adjustments to images for a specific purpose and then export them for use in another application You can also rename images when exporting them make minor adjustments on export add watermarks and export images with metadata You can also quickly ex
400. panel A new untitled web gallery album appears in the Projects panel and the Webpage Editor appears above the Browser Rename the album The new album contains the selected images noa Aperture E auauod em Seino Maeziecao OB aa lii al ae Ba coum 4 towns a a Taimaa mitin angie BIC 173 gt 300 Antarctica BEI Underthe ice The Webpage Editor oe a appears with the ane selected images You can also create an empty web gallery album and then drag images into the album Part Ill Distribution and Backup To create a new empty web gallery album Do one of the following Choose File gt New gt Web Gallery e Choose New Empty Web Gallery from the Add to Library pop up menu in the Projects panel A new untitled web gallery album appears in the Projects panel Rename the album Drag the images you want into the new web gallery album To make changes to the webpages you use the controls in the Webpage Editor For more information see Web Gallery Controls in the Webpage Editor on page 338 Creating Smart Web Gallery Albums You can use the Aperture Smart Album feature to gather images from the Library or from projects and place them automatically in web gallery pages Smart Albums gather images based on search criteria that you specify For example you can create a Smart Web Gallery Album that gathers your select
401. photos will always be placed in one hard disk location while other groups such as sports photos will reside in a different hard disk location You can work with referenced images creating versions making adjustments cropping and adding metadata just as you can with images whose master files are stored in the Library Versions that you create from a referenced image are stored in the Library In order for you to make adjustments to a version from a referenced image the referenced image s master file must be available on your hard disk or other storage device For example if you delete a referenced image s master file in the Finder Aperture no longer has access to the master file and so no longer allows you to change your versions or create new ones To help you identify referenced images Aperture marks them with a badge overlay that you can display or hide When a referenced image s master file is missing or offline its badge changes to show that the image is not accessible For example if you disconnect a hard disk that holds master files for many referenced images Aperture automatically marks the referenced images in the Browser and Viewer as offline If you reconnect the hard disk or other storage device later Aperture accesses the master files automatically and you can work with and change their versions again You can also relocate master files moving them out of the Library or moving referenced master files to different hard d
402. ply a filter to a photo box Select the photo box that contains the image you want to change Choose the filter style you want from the Photo Filter pop up menu Note When you apply a filter to an image in a book and then examine the image with the Loupe the image appears without the filter effect The filter is applied only to the image in the book not to the image source The Loupe displays the image source Working with Text As you work with your book layout you can add text and position it on the page You can Place text on the page by entering it in text boxes Add new text boxes to the page Add metadata boxes that display an image s metadata Choose the style of your text changing the font font style and font size Arrange text on the page by changing the size and position of text boxes Change the number of text columns on the page Remove text boxes from the page You can make text changes to individual pages in your book or change master pages to create template pages with custom text styles and layouts Placing Text on the Page Master page designs provide text boxes that you can select and enter text into You can also copy text and paste it into text boxes To add text to a text box Click the Edit Content button if it s not already selected Select the page you want to work on in the Pages panel Select the text box you want to change Select any existing text and type or paste in the text you want
403. porarily appear as gray boxes until the loading is complete Part Interface and Acquisition Importing a Selection of Images You can also import a selection of images from your camera or card reader To import a selection of images Connect your camera or card reader to your computer The Import panel and Import dialog appear showing the images on the camera or card In the Projects panel do one of the following e Choose File gt New Project or press Command N to create a new project e Select an existing project to hold your images The Import arrow points at the selected project The top left portion of the Import dialog updates displaying where the images are being placed Select the images you want to import by Shift clicking to select a range of adjacent images Command clicking to select nonadjacent images or dragging a selection rectangle around the images you want The current number of images selected for import is displayed on the Import button in the lower right corner of the dialog Import button showing the number of images Cancel amp Import 36 Images B selected for import To reset the image selection so that no images are selected click in the background beside a thumbnail If necessary adjust the size of the thumbnails by dragging the Thumbnail Resize slider at the bottom of the dialog Chapter 4 Importing Images 95 96 4 Choose a location for the imported images by doing one
404. port digital master files as referenced images you can t rename the digital master files when you leave the digital master files in their original locations However when you import digital master files as referenced images and move them to a new hard disk location you can rename them at that time To choose a preset name format In the Import dialog choose a name format from the Version Name pop up menu To apply the filename to the digital master file as well as to the version names select the Apply to Master filenames checkbox Chapter 4 Importing Images 105 Applying Valid Filenames Proper filenaming is one of the most critical aspects of media and project management When you capture your digital master files consider how and where your files may be used in the future Naming your files simply and consistently makes it easier to share media among multiple photographers transfer projects to other Aperture systems move files across a network and properly restore archived projects The following sections present several issues to consider when naming project files and image files Avoiding Special Characters The most conservative filenaming conventions provide the most cross platform compatibility This means that your filenames will work in different operating systems such as Mac OS X and other UNIX based operating systems Mac OS 9 and Windows You also need to consider filenaming when you transfer files via the Internet
405. port images to your email application to send them to others When you export image versions you can specify settings for the exported files such as format size and filename To export versions of images 1 Select an image or images in the Browser 2 Choose File gt Export gt Export Versions or press Command Shift E 3 Navigate to the location where you want the exported images placed Cd Se Ct tomcar 2 search Choose a location for the Network GE Desktop exported files Z Macintosh HD gt Documents up Library IE Desktop lm Movies Lt Music gt Pictures _ Public Sites yvrvyyyyVY L Export Preset JPEG Original size Choose an export preset Subfolder Format No foider for the exported files Custom Subfolder Name Enter folder text here Name Format Choose a name format Custom Name Enter name text here for the exported files File Name Example IMP 008 jpg cancer Click this button to export the files 4 Choose an export preset from the Export Preset pop up menu Do one of the following e Choose No folder from the Subfolder Format pop up menu to specify that the files be stored as separate individual files in the selected folder To specify that Aperture create and store your files in a hierarchy of subfolders with specific folder names choose a folder preset from the Export Subfolder pop up menu For more information about spec
406. porting Your Images on page 291 Important If you are planning to export your keywords as IPTC data make sure your keyword phrases are no more than 64 characters in length Longer keyword phrases may not be displayed properly in other IPTC editors or operating systems There are several ways to apply keywords e Using the Keywords HUD x Q Search gt Personal gt Photo specs gt Photojournalism gt Stock categories gt Wedding e Using keyword controls and presets in the control bar 1 Man Adults Boy Children Add Keyword Woman Couple v Girl S Baby People Keyword controls e Using the Lift and Stamp tools via the Lift amp Stamp HUD Lift tool in the toolbar Stamp tool in the toolbar KA oA T Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images 201 202 e Using the Metadata Inspector Add keywords here P a Viewing Keywords Applied to Images You can view the keywords applied to an image version in several areas In overlays that appear on or below images in the Browser or Viewer e In the Metadata Inspector e In the Keywords column of the Browser when the Browser is in list view Displaying Keywords in the Viewer and Browser You can turn on the display of image keywords in the Browser and Viewer Your keywords are displayed in overlays that appear across the bottom of the image or below the image Part II Photo Editing Make sure the Viewer checkbox is selected
407. preset group You can select a keyword preset group whenever you need it and create your own keyword preset groups that include keywords you frequently use When you choose a keyword preset group Aperture assigns the specific keywords to keyword buttons in the control bar This allows you to quickly set the control bar to show the most useful keywords To choose a keyword preset group and apply keywords to images 1 Select an image or group of images in the Browser 2 Choose Window gt Show Keyword Controls or press Shift D 3 Choose a keyword preset group from the Keyword Preset Group pop up menu Choose the keyword group you want to use Stock Categories Wedding Details Wedding Prep Wedding Edit Buttons The keyword buttons in the control bar update according to the keyword preset group you chose i Personal lt Family Vacation ainhday ff Home Kids ii Backyard 4 Holiday Snapshots gt The Keyword Preset Group pop up menu displays your choice The keyword buttons now appear with keywords from the group you chose 4 Click the keyword buttons or press Option and a number key 1 through 8 on your keyboard to apply keywords to the selected images Tip You can quickly move through the keyword preset groups in the Keyword Preset Group pop up menu by pressing comma or period For information about viewing keywords applied to images see Viewing Keywords App
408. preview options 160 Preferences window 67 preset export options 296 306 350 351 preset filename formats 105 preset information display 158 preset keywords 45 206 213 214 215 preset metadata displays 158 preset print settings 279 281 467 presets 446 preset slideshows 312 314 Presets list 316 Preview button 281 preview creation 161 preview images preferences 160 previewing printing options 281 preview options 160 previews 160 deleting 162 Previous Image button 44 122 167 Previous Page button 56 58 59 339 341 368 Primary Only button 43 124 167 primary selections 122 124 167 primary Viewer 148 157 prime lenses 446 Print button 56 281 368 Print dialog 279 332 printers calibrating 430 color management 423 double sided functionality 371 gamut 424 settings 280 troubleshooting 281 printing Book Layout Editor and 36 book pages 368 books 283 358 363 397 contact sheets 282 controls for 279 crop marks and borders 281 double sided pages 371 dpi 280 hot areas and 154 layout options 280 Light Table arrangements 284 332 metadata sets 280 multiple images 282 overview 277 previewing 281 printer settings 280 print presets See print presets print vendors 364 397 proofing onscreen 286 single images 281 tips and suggestions 278 to PDF files 283 Use Best DPI checkbox 280 Print Preset Action pop up menu 279 284 print presets books 283 creating and modifying 279 284 deleting 286 duplicating 285 468 I
409. printed books see the electronic document Ordering Books and Prints available from the Aperture Help menu Chapter 19 Creating Books 397 Backing Up Your Images To safeguard your photography portfolio it s important to establish a reliable backup system and back up regularly This chapter provides instructions for using the Aperture backup system to back up the entire Aperture Library on a regular basis Aperture clearly indicates how up to date your most recent backup is and you can update your backups immediately whenever you wish In the event of a rare equipment failure or unforeseen catastrophe such as a fire or weather related damage you can easily restore the entire Aperture Library onto your computer or a new computer This chapter covers An Overview of the Backup Workflow p 400 Planning Your Backup System p 401 Working with the Vaults Panel p 402 Creating Vaults p 404 Updating Vaults p 405 Disconnecting a Vault s Hard Drive from Your System Temporarily p 406 Reconnecting a Vault s Hard Drive to your System p 406 Deleting a Vault Permanently p 407 Backing Up Images from a Portable in the Field p 407 Restoring Your Aperture System p 409 399 400 An Overview of the Backup Workflow Making backup copies of the Library affords you the reassurance that should an unforeseen incident cause the loss of your files you can easily restore them from your backup vaults later If
410. printer If Aperture Does Not Recognize Your Printer If your printer does not appear in the Printer pop up menu when you click the Printer Settings button visit your printer manufacturer s website and download the latest drivers Printing a Single Image When you want to print a single image on a single sheet of paper you use a single image preset To print a single image In the Browser select an image Choose File gt Print Image or press Command P In the Print dialog select a single image preset in the Preset Name list After you ve verified that all the settings in the Print dialog are correct click Print Chapter 14 Printing Your Images 281 282 Printing a Series of Images You can print multiple images at once each on its own sheet of paper To print a series of images In the Browser select the images you want to print For more information see Navigating Through and Selecting Images on page 122 Choose File gt Print Images or press Command P In the Print dialog select a single image preset in the Preset Name list After you ve verified that all the settings in the Print dialog are correct click Print Your images are printed one image per page Printing a Contact Sheet or Series of Contact Sheets You can print contact sheets of your images and Aperture does all the layout work for you All you have to do is select the number of pages or columns Aperture adjusts the size of the images based
411. r 3 seconds with a 2 second cross fade Fade through Black Displays each image on a black background for 3 seconds with a 2 second cross fade Manual You control this slideshow s progression with the Right and Left Arrow keys Slow Dissolve Displays each image for 5 1 seconds with a 5 second cross fade 4 Up Slow Successively displays four images one at a time showing each image for 3 seconds and then transitioning with a 2 second cross fade The first image is replaced with the fifth and so on 4 Up Fast Successively displays four images one at a time showing each image for 1 second The first image is replaced with the fifth and so on Click Start If either no image or a single image is selected the slideshow displays all images in the current album or project Saving Slideshows You can save a slideshow s images by creating an album and then placing the image versions for your slideshow in it You can also apply a keyword such as Slideshow or any other unique identifying keyword to images and then create a Smart Album that automatically groups the images Part Ill Distribution and Backup Controlling a Slideshow Once you start playing a slideshow you can use keyboard shortcuts to control the slideshow To pause the slideshow Press the Space bar To continue playing the slideshow Press the Space bar again To move forward through the slideshow Press the Right Arrow key To move backward throug
412. racter limits 242 defined 443 displaying 50 142 158 exporting 292 304 exporting keywords as 201 fields in 228 242 finding images by 259 irises 443 ISO speeds 228 443 iTunes playlists 317 321 J Journal Pages panel 58 340 journals See web journals JPEG files color spaces and 427 compressing 352 defined 443 digital master files 72 exporting 292 importing 20 89 keywords for 304 JPEG2000 files 20 89 K K kelvin 444 keyboard shortcuts arranging workspace elements and panels 65 assigning keywords with 215 217 Full Screen mode 174 lifting and stamping keywords 220 Loupe tool 152 metadata display 159 173 navigating through books 370 rating images 191 196 197 rotating images 130 selecting images 123 179 shuttling through images 125 slideshows 315 stack commands 186 versions 131 keyword buttons 213 keyword controls 30 45 65 213 213 214 keyword groups 207 keyword list 207 Keyword Preset Group pop up menu 45 214 215 keyword preset groups applying keywords 215 217 assigning to buttons 45 creating 216 keywords adding fields to metadata 236 adding or deleting from preset groups 216 adding to Keywords HUD 210 applying during import 108 applying preset groups 215 217 applying to images 201 applying to multiple images 219 241 applying with Keywords HUD 206 212 applying with Lift amp Stamp HUD 218 220 applying with Metadata Inspector 222 assigning to buttons 45 213 badge overlays 243 browsing through 209
413. ranging display positions 420 rearranging images on book pages 367 in Browser 128 in Light Table 328 324 327 moving photo boxes 385 in page layouts 361 in slideshows 315 in stacks 169 182 in web galleries 345 in web journals 346 rearranging metadata sets in pop up menus 237 240 rearranging pages in books 381 in web journals 348 rearranging text in page layouts 361 392 in web journals 346 rearranging tools in toolbar 66 Rebuild Book With All Images command 383 Rebuild Book With Selected Images command 383 reciprocity 447 reconnecting hard disks 406 recovering from file losses 400 red eye 48 170 447 Red Eye tool 48 170 Red Eye tool HUD 62 red rectangle symbol 155 red Vault Status buttons 403 referenced images 72 76 93 96 backing up 78 400 changing the location 100 consolidating into the Library 139 displaying a list 136 identifying 135 importing 88 99 102 importing iPhoto Library 112 locating master files 137 reconnecting 137 469 relocating 139 searching for 140 working with 135 refining search results 253 reflowing images in books 367 Reject button 44 167 190 rejecting images buttons for 167 190 compare images 196 displaying rejected images 193 hiding rejected images 250 Reject ratings 188 447 relative colorimetric 448 relinking metadata boxes to images 390 Remove Album command 132 Remove and Delete Vault button 407 Remove From Album command 345 Remove From Favorites com
414. rd Drive from Your System Temporarily You may routinely disconnect a backup hard disk drive from your Aperture system and take it to a safe offsite location When you disconnect a backup hard drive from your computer Aperture takes the associated vault offline When you reconnect the hard drive again Aperture automatically detects the hard disk and connects it to the corresponding vault To disconnect a vault s hard disk drive from your Aperture system Do one of the following e Click the disclosure triangle next to the vault name to display the name of the hard disk assigned to the vault then click the Eject button next to the hard disk name e In the Finder drag the hard disk icon for the drive to the Trash or select the disk in the sidebar and click the Eject button Disconnect the hard disk drive from your computer Reconnecting a Vault s Hard Drive to your System If you keep a backup of the Aperture Library on an offsite hard disk drive you ll occasionally need to bring it in for updating Aperture keeps track of the hard disks that have been disconnected from their vaults When you reconnect a hard disk drive Aperture automatically detects the hard disk determines which vault it s assigned to and reconnects the vault At times you may rename a backup hard disk drive or add a new one and copy a vault to the new drive In this case you need to specify the location or path of the new or changed backup hard disk drive
415. rd Preset Group Choose a keyword preset group to display on the keyword buttons pop up menu or edit the buttons in an existing keyword preset group Note If the Adjustments and Metadata Inspectors are shown there may not be enough room to show the entire control bar In that case the keyword controls are not shown You can hide the Inspectors panel by pressing I To learn more about applying keywords see Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images on page 199 Toolbar The toolbar is a collection of buttons and tools located at the top of the Aperture main window Its buttons and tools are grouped by function there are buttons for creating projects organizing images and configuring the Aperture workspace as well as tools for applying adjustments The toolbar is shown by default but you can hide it by choosing View gt Hide Toolbar You can customize the toolbar For more information see Customizing the Toolbar on page 65 nee Aperture k ER a i z Bipgenzrecaea OB aa Al projets ty Adjustments 9 ue Library amp Y amp Antarctica EB Antarctica Selects Ca Note Because you can customize the toolbar adding and deleting the buttons you want your toolbar may appear different from the one pictured in this manual Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 45 46 Import and Project Buttons Darana Import Panel Click this button to show or hide the Import panel When you sel
416. re information see Chapter 7 Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode on page 163 E Primary Only button Click this button to temporarily change between making metadata changes to all selected images or the primary selection only Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 43 Rotate Buttons ow G o A Rotate Left Click this button to rotate the selected image to the left B Rotate Right Click this button to rotate the selected image to the right Rating Buttons Reject Click this button to give the selected image a Reject rating B Decrease Rating Click this button to decrease the rating of the selected image Select Click this button to give the selected image a Select rating five stars D Increase Rating Click this button to increase the rating of the selected image To learn more about rating your images see Chapter 9 Rating Images on page 187 Navigation Buttons A Previous Image Click this button to go to the previous image B Next Image Click this button to go to the next image 44 Part Interface and Acquisition Keyword Controls A Individual keyword Click any of these buttons to apply a preset keyword to a selected buttons image or group of images Hold down Shift and click the button to remove the keyword B Add Keyword field Enter a new keyword then press Return Aperture creates a new keyword and applies it to the selected image C Keywo
417. re considered to be device dependent See also gamut device independent Standard color spaces such as CIE Lab and XYZ where the interpretation of a color is not dependent on a specific device See also color space Commission Internationale de l Eclairage CIE diffused lighting A type of light that is scattered across the subject or scene Diffused lighting results in an image with low contrast and detail as seen in images captured outdoors on an overcast day See also contrast flat digital A description of data that is stored or transmitted as a sequence of ones and zeros Most commonly refers to binary data represented using electronic or electromagnetic signals JPEG PNG RAW and TIFF files are all digital See also digitization digital image sensor The computer chip located at the image plane inside the camera that consists of millions of individual light sensitive elements capable of capturing light See also camera charge coupled device CCD complementary metal oxide semiconductor CMOS megapixel Glossary digital noise Misinterpreted pixels occurring as the result of high ISO settings also known as chrominance signal to noise ratio Random bright pixels especially in solid colors are the result of digital noise See also ISO speed digital point and shoot camera A lightweight digital camera with a built in autofocus feature aptly named for the two steps required of the photographer to capture an image The lens
418. re don t meet your needs you can create your own For example if you regularly send groups of photos to a stock photography house and a printer you can create an export preset for each destination For the stock photography house you can include the keywords and metadata you ve embedded in your images including usage marks For the printing service you can specify the image size and limit the file size Give the presets a name you ll remember and next time you need to send images to either destination simply select the correct export preset You can also modify existing export presets and delete export presets you no longer use Exporting Images to an External Editor Aperture provides an easy way to transfer images to another application for changes and then bring the revised images back into Aperture You can specify an application as an external editor in the Preferences window For example if your image editing sometimes requires one or more of the specialized tools available in Adobe Photoshop you can select Photoshop as your external editor You can then select an image and choose Images gt Open With External Editor Aperture makes a new version of your image and opens it in Adobe Photoshop After you make your changes and save the image the revised version automatically reappears in Aperture The external editor doesn t change the original digital master file For more information see Performing Image Adjustments in the Apertur
419. reate a name format you select the name elements you want in the Naming Presets dialog You can compose a name format that combines the following name elements e Version Name e Master Filename e Sequence Number 1 of 3 2 of 3 3 of 3 e Image Year Image Month e Image Day Image Date Image Time e Index Number 1 2 3 e Custom Name e Counter 001 002 003 e Current Date e Current Time e Current Year e Current Month e Current Day To create a custom name format In the Import dialog choose Edit from the Version Name pop up menu The Naming Presets dialog appears Click the Add button to create a new name format or select the preset name format you want to change Chapter 4 Importing Images 107 108 Drag the name elements you want into the Format field in the order you want them You can also add valid characters or spaces between the name elements For more information about valid filenaming characters see Automatically Naming Your Imported Images on page 105 Enter a custom name in the Custom Name field if you want Click OK Your new name format now appears in the Version Name pop up menu When using a counter in your name format you can specify the starting number and the number of digits from one to six digits that appear in the counter When you use a preset name format with a counter make sure to reset the initial starting number if necessary Otherwise on the next impor
420. reating export presets see Working with Export Presets on page 306 To adjust images at export Select the image or images you want to export Choose File gt Export gt Export Version or press Command Shift E Navigate to the location where you want the exported images placed Choose Edit from the Export Preset pop up menu The Export Presets dialog appears Select an export preset and specify any adjustment options you want Click OK Choose a name format from the Export Name Format pop up menu Click Export Your files are exported with the adjustments you specified Part Ill Distribution and Backup oN DO WU A WwW N 10 11 12 13 Adding a Watermark at Export A watermark is a visible graphic overlay that is applied to an image Photographers often use watermarks to indicate that images are protected by a copyright and discourage others from inappropriately using their images You can import a graphics file and add it to your images as a watermark To add a watermark image to your exported images Select the images you want to export Choose File gt Export gt Export Versions or press Command Shift E In the dialog that appears choose Edit from the Export Preset pop up menu In the Export Presets dialog select the export preset you want to use to export your images Select the Show Watermark checkbox Click the Choose Image button Select the image you want to use as a watermark then cl
421. reen Mode p 174 Quickly Accessing Commands p 174 163 164 The displayed image fills the screen Filmstrip available in Full Screen mode An Overview of Full Screen Mode Full Screen mode projects your images onto a black background for detailed viewing Using a dual display system in Full Screen mode gives you an enlarged space to compare and adjust images For more information about setting up a dual display system see Setting Up Your System with Two Displays on page 417 You can view compare and stack your images in Full Screen mode You can also apply adjustments and keywords When you ve finished working with your images you can use this mode to preview and proof your images Full Screen mode includes a toolbar and filmstrip to help you view organize and adjust your images Toolbar available in i Screen mode ff Baas BE Poors Use the toolbar buttons and tools to change your images The toolbar includes buttons for creating versions and working with stacks as well as a full set of image adjustment tools Use the filmstrip to move through organize and rate your images You can dock the filmstrip on the left right or bottom of the screen wherever it best suits your work habits You can also hide or show the filmstrip whenever you want You can use any of the Aperture HUDs in Full Screen mode You can open the Adjustments HUD or Keywords HUD by pressing its keyboard shortcut In fact you ll
422. registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U S and or other countries Other company and product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective companies Mention of third party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products Preface Part Chapter 1 Chapter 2 12 15 17 20 31 32 37 39 40 41 42 43 45 49 50 52 53 54 57 60 61 64 65 67 Contents Introducing Aperture What s Next Interface and Acquisition An Overview of Aperture A First Look at Aperture Creating Projects and Importing Your Photos Photo Editing with Aperture Image Processing Distribution Backing Up Your Work The Aperture Interface The Aperture Main Window Projects Panel Viewer and Browser Control Bar Toolbar Adjustments Inspector Metadata Inspector Import Panel Vaults Panel Book Layout Editor Webpage Editor Light Table Heads Up Displays Workspace Layouts Customizing the Toolbar Setting Aperture Preferences Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Part Il Chapter 5 71 72 78 79 80 82 82 83 83 85 87 88 89 90 91 97 105 108 109 110 110 111 112 114 114 115 119 120 122 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 130 132 Working with Aperture Projects Basic Components of Aperture Working with Projects Creating and Nami
423. ribution and Backup Previous Page button Displaying Single Pages or Spreads You can set the Book Layout Editor to display your pages singly or side by side For example you can display the pages side by side to see how images work in two page spreads B m Ee Show Single Pages ne button Show Full Spreads button To display pages singly or side by side Click the Show Single Pages or Show Full Spreads button Note Printing single or double sided pages is a function of your printer and the options available in the printer s Print dialog If you re purchasing printed books from Apple s print vendor your book is automatically printed double sided Resizing the Page View You can reduce or enlarge your view of your book pages For example you might enlarge the display of your pages to closely inspect details or reduce your view to get an overview of the general page composition Scale To Fit button 100 Fa FA Actual Size button Display Size slider To reduce or enlarge the display of your pages Drag the Display Size slider left or right to change your view To return your page view to a size that fits the current screen size Click the Scale to Fit button To change the page view to show the actual size of the page Click the Actual Size button Chapter 19 Creating Books 371 372 Placing Images in a Book You can place images manually on your pages or have Aperture automatically f
424. rlays on the image gt al Five stars indicate the highest rating Select Stars indicate a An X indicates a negative positive rating rating Reject Once images are rated you can have Aperture display only images of a certain rating so you can focus on a particular group of images For more information about rating your images see Chapter 9 Rating Images on page 187 Chapter 1 An Overview of Aperture 25 26 Finding and Displaying Images with the Query HUD You can use the Query HUD to search for and display only certain photos in a project or album Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser and the Query HUD appears In the Query HUD you can specify criteria for the photos you want to work with leri Aperture i dow ae seina Re ee he oes OB ua SEEE ERROME p The Query HUD is set to show images rated five stars Click the Query HUD i N button to open the lt r TIN T s AKARA O kaAKE Query HUD E TEREE 00 6000 GO E You can enter any search criteria you want to display specific images You can also display images based on rating date when shot keywords or import group After you specify the search criteria Aperture displays only those images that match the criteria and hides the rest For more information about searching for images see Searching for and Displayin
425. rs of Landscape again Aperture automatically enters Landscape in the field You can set up and change the list of metadata that Aperture automatically enters using the AutoFill List Editor You can enter up to 20 entries for a field type If you ve made a spelling mistake when typing an entry you can also use the AutoFill List Editor to correct the mistake so that Aperture always suggests the correct spelling Chapter 11 Working with Metadata 233 To set up autofill entries in the AutoFill List Editor 1 Choose Metadata gt Edit AutoFill List 2 To edit the list do one of the following Toaddan entry Select the metadata type you want to change click the Add button and enter the text you want To change an entry Click the disclosure triangle for the metadata type you want to work with to display its entries then double click the entry you want to change Type the new text e To delete an entry Click the disclosure triangle for the metadata type you want to work with to display its entries Select the entry you want to delete then click the Delete button 3 Click Save 234 Part II Photo Editing Working with Metadata Views You can create your own combinations of metadata to display with your images called metadata views In previous versions of Aperture metadata views were called metadata sets You can modify the metadata views that come with Aperture Using the Metadata Inspector you can e Create new
426. rt images by image date rating or keywords from this pop up menu Sort Direction button Click this button to sort images in ascending or descending order Query HUD button Click this button to show the Query HUD for searching For more information see Chapter 12 Searching for and Displaying Images on page 247 Search field Enter text to search for images associated with that text such as a version name or keyword Shuttle control Drag this to shuttle continuously through images in the Browser You can also use the J K and L keys Scroll bar Use this to scroll through all images in a project Thumbnail Resize slider Drag this slider to increase or decrease the size of thumbnails displayed in grid view Aperture provides fast and efficient ways of selecting images You can use the arrow keys to quickly select an image or multiple images to work on You can also select images by clicking dragging a selection rectangle and using keyboard shortcuts Part Il Photo Editing Images displayed in list view in the Browser You can display images in the Browser in either grid view or list view Grid view organizes thumbnails of your images in a grid pattern Use grid view when it s easiest to identify your images by sight and work with thumbnails as you organize stack or assign keywords to images List view displays a list of your images with associated file information Use list view when you need to see or sort your ima
427. s wide angle lens zoom lens Library In Aperture a container file that holds projects folders albums master files and versions You organize the elements in the Library rename items sort them and so on in the Projects panel By default the Aperture Library file is located at Users username Pictures See also album folder master file project version light Visible energy in the electromagnetic spectrum with wavelengths ranging between 400 and 720 nanometers See also electromagnetic radiation light meter A device capable of measuring the intensity of reflective light Light meters are used as an aid for selecting the correct exposure settings on the camera Most cameras have internal light meters See also center weighted metering evaluative metering meter spot metering luminance A value describing the brightness of all color channels combined in a pixel LZW compression A lossless data compression algorithm developed by Abraham Lempel Jakob Ziv and Terry Welch in 1984 LZW compression algorithms are typically used with JPEG and TIFF graphics files to reduce the file size for archiving and transmission at a ratio of 2 8 1 See also compression JPEG TIFF macro lens A type of lens used for extreme close up photography See also camera lens prime lens telephoto lens wide angle lens zoom lens master file The source image file that was copied from either your computer s file system or your camera s memory card In
428. s adding images 337 345 albums 336 controls 57 copyright information 345 creating 336 deleting images 345 exporting 338 348 350 functions and controls 338 metadata display 344 navigating and viewing 342 numbers of images on pages 343 overview 34 334 posting on Internet 348 rearranging images in 345 resizing images on 344 Index saving search results as 265 Smart Web Gallery Albums 337 text on pages 345 themes 342 watermarks on images 355 web journals adding images 340 346 adding pages 340 347 adding text to pages 341 albums 339 copyright information 345 creating 339 deleting images 346 deleting pages 340 348 exporting 348 350 functions and controls 58 header styles 347 metadata based pages 347 metadata display 344 navigating and viewing 342 numbers of images on pages 343 overview 35 334 posting on Internet 348 rearranging layout and images 346 rearranging pages 348 resizing images on 344 saving search results as 265 text boxes 346 themes 342 watermarks on images 355 Webpage Editor functions and controls 57 338 340 opening 335 336 overview 35 publishing functions 349 web journals 339 webpages badge overlays 243 copyright information 345 creating 334 displaying 341 exporting 338 341 348 350 linking to Mac homepages 349 metadata display 344 navigating through 341 342 numbers of images on 343 posting on Internet 348 resizing images on 344 themes 342 types of 334 watermarks on images 355 web ga
429. s and alobums with which you can organize your images You can create Smart Albums that automatically find and store images based on search criteria you specify You can also create webpages photo galleries and online journals Light Table arrangements and books all Projects seals O gt i Library a v Antarctica Loe Antarctica Selects Q Ed On Lana E Under The ice Book E Under The ice Light Table L Under The ice Web Gallery Ball gt gt Belize gt __ Rlorida and the Keys gt French Polynesia and Tahiti gt Galapagos islands Z Kenya The Wildlife of the Masai Mara A Projects Choose to show all your favorite or recently selected projects by pop up menu choosing an option from the pop up menu B Add to Library Create new projects and albums including web gallery web journal pop up menu Light Table and book albums from this pop up menu You can automatically fill your albums with selected images or create empty albums You can also create Smart Albums which you fill by specifying search criteria such as filenames or dates C Project Action Add and remove favorite items or export projects from this pop up menu pop up menu To learn more about using the Projects panel see Chapter 3 Working with Aperture Projects on page 71 Chapter 2 The Aperture Interface 41 42 Viewer and Browser The Viewer and Browser work together to display a project s or album s images
430. s or albums in the Browser when more than one is selected in the Projects panel You click a tab to view the contents of a currently open project folder or album See also album folder project target A reference file used to profile a device such as a scanner or digital camera It often contains patches whose color values have been measured The output from a device is then compared with the target See also device characterization telephoto lens A lens with a long focal length that magnifies the subject See also lens TIFF Short for Tagged Image File Format TIFF is a widely used bitmapped graphics file format developed by Aldus and Microsoft that handles monochrome grayscale images See also format transition A visual effect applied between the display of images in a slideshow In Aperture you can choose the duration of the cross fade between images tripod A stand with three legs used to keep a camera steady The use of a tripod is especially necessary when shooting long exposures See also camera shake exposure tungsten light A type of light with low color temperature Tungsten light sources usually include household lamps but should not be confused with fluorescent See also color temperature white balance underexposed The result of not exposing a scene long enough Underexposed scenes appear dark See also exposure overexposure unipod Similar to a tripod a stand with one leg used as an aid in keeping a camera stead
431. s in 182 transferring Light Table images into 331 types and functions 74 web gallery albums See web galleries web journal albums See web journals aligning images in Light Table 328 images in photo boxes 384 items on book pages 362 alternate images 433 Alternate option multiple displays 157 Always Show Toolbar button 169 171 ambient light 433 American Newspaper Publishers Association ANPA codes 242 304 analog to digital conversion 433 angles of view 433 ANPA codes 242 304 Aperture changing files outside of application 115 overview 16 Aperture Library file 115 Aperture options checkboxes 68 453 aperture priority 433 aperture settings aperture defined 433 in metadata 228 Apple Display Connector ADC ports 418 applying keywords 213 223 master page designs 361 Archive button 236 237 archiving images See backing up images Arrangement button 420 Arrange Sets command 237 240 arranging items See rearranging images aspect ratios 140 262 263 385 434 assigning keywords 207 213 217 222 223 attaching images to email 306 auto bracketed images 109 434 Auto Exposure button 61 Auto Exposure Reset button 61 Autoflow Selected Images command 374 Autoflow Unplaced Images command 374 auto focus 434 Auto Levels Combined button 62 Auto Levels Reset button 62 Auto Levels Separate button 62 automatic bracketing 109 434 automatic image placement 373 automatic page creation 376 automatic stack creation 177 Auto Stac
432. search criteria the contents of the Smart Album change Aperture comes with a selection of Smart Albums set up in the Library for you For example there are Smart Albums that gather all your select images all images taken in the last week and all images taken in the last month When you click the Library disclosure triangle you see the list of Smart Aloums created for you Select a Smart Album to see its contents in the Browser f All Projects v ae v isa Library leg kk lege or better lwg Rejected lug In the Last Week leg In the Last Month leg 2006 lug 2005 lug 2004 lug All Images Sonoma County Fair You can also create your own Smart Albums For example suppose you want to create a Smart Album that includes the best images you took of a particular sports event You select the project containing shots of the sports event create a Smart Album show the Query HUD and search for images rated Select five stars All images with that rating immediately appear in the Smart Album You can also choose where to search for images across the entire Library or within a specific project or folder The scope of a Smart Album s search is determined when you create the album and can t be changed afterward For example when you select the Library and create a Smart Album the Smart Album searches across the entire Library When you select a project the Smart Album searches within that project When you select a fol
433. search does include keywords aspect ratio filename rating version name orientation pixel size processed pixel size master location and import group Choosing a limited text search provides faster results You can set your preference for a full or limited text search using the Search Scope pop up menu in the Preferences window To set the search scope in the search field Choose the type of search you want to perform from the search field pop up menu To view specific images in the Library or a selected project you can also use the Query HUD Click here to show the F Qy Showing All Query HUD 248 Part Il Photo Editing Select Library to search across the entire Library Click here to show a Query HUD for searching across the Library The Query HUD is an easy to use panel with options for specifying search criteria For example you might enter the image name Dawn in the Query HUD and Aperture locates files that include that text in their metadata To show the Query HUD for a selected project you click the Query HUD button with a magnifying glass icon next to the search field in the Browser nee auauna ae Se oo e Al Query HUD set to show images rated five stars eee i COUA oo e000 Ep You can use the Query HUD to locate images across all projects to display particular images within a project and to create Smart Albums which automatically gather images bas
434. see the amount of free space your vault has available next to the vault name Make sure to assign enough disk space to the vault to ensure a complete backup of the Library and to allow the Library to grow as you import new images over time Part Ill Distribution and Backup N Updating Vaults You can have Aperture update your vaults at any time You can tell which vaults need to be updated by the color of the Vault Status button next to each vault You can have Aperture update a particular vault or all of your vaults at once After you import new images into Aperture you should make an immediate backup to ensure the digital files exist in more than one place You can make an immediate backup of your imported images by updating an existing vault To update all connected vaults Do one of the following e Choose File gt Vault gt Update All Vaults e In the Vaults panel click the Update All Vaults button In the dialog that appears click Update All Vaults To update an existing vault Do one of the following Choose Window gt Show Vaults or press Shift R e Click the Vaults Panel button Select the vault you want to update Do one of the following e In the Vaults panel choose Update Vault from the Vault Action pop up menu e Click the Vault Status button beside the vault name In the dialog that appears click the Update Vault button Chapter 20 Backing Up Your Images 405 406 Disconnecting a Vault s Ha
435. select a single pick from among a group of related photos When you close a stack only the pick image remains visible and available to searches For this reason you should not use stacks for the simple grouping of images Stacking images that you intend to use makes accessing and searching for them difficult when stacks are closed After creating stacks you can organize and change them as you need You can add images to a stack and remove those that don t belong You can also split a stack into multiple stacks when necessary Part Il Photo Editing This shows an example of a series of images taken in quick succession Creating Stacks When you import your images you can specify that Aperture create stacks automatically For example if you shoot a series of images in quick succession such as at a sports event or if you bracket images to allow for differences in lighting or exposure you most likely will want to view those images together Aperture can stack those images based on metadata recorded by the camera as the series of pictures is taken e Image series With a series of images shot in quick succession Aperture can determine the images in a sequence and group them in a single stack For example sports photographers shoot rapid bursts of images to capture actions Based on timeline metadata when a series of shots was taken and the interval between shots Aperture can determine which images fall into a sequence and group
436. selection rectangle around the images you want to stamp the adjustments on to select them Select the images you want to stamp the adjustments on by Shift clicking to select a range of adjacent images and Command clicking to select nonadjacent images In the toolbar select the Stamp tool then click the Stamp Selected Images button in the Lift amp Stamp HUD The adjustments and metadata copied from the first image are applied to the selected images however the RAW Fine Tuning parameter values are not applied to the image selection Chapter 10 Applying Keywords to Images 221 222 Applying Keywords Using the Metadata Inspector When you select an image you can use the Metadata Inspector to see the image s keywords and add new keywords if needed To apply keywords using the Metadata Inspector 1 Do one of the following e Select an image then choose Window gt Show Inspectors or press e Select an image then choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D e Double click an image in the Browser to show the Metadata Inspector 2 Click the Keywords button at the bottom of the Metadata Inspector A list of the image s keywords appears Metadata View IPTC Expanded Es Version Name vietnam2004 0220 lo Caption E C n Copyright Notice E Object Name 10 Gy OE Province State S y y y yi i io Z include in Summary EE Keywords EXIF IPTC Other Archive 4
437. sfade checkbox 317 cross platform filenames 106 Customize Toolbar dialog box 66 Custom name formats 299 Custom Name with Counter format 105 Custom Name with Index format 105 Cut Content command 386 cut lines 282 D Date pop up menu 257 dates creation dates 257 date based organization 79 date based web journal pages 347 in filenames 85 89 105 finding images by 256 in metadata 50 228 242 sorting by 129 decompression 437 decorations 245 331 Decrease Diameter command 152 Decrease Rating button 44 167 190 decreasing ratings 44 167 190 196 definition in images 437 Delete command 83 Delete Folder command 83 Delete Master Image and All Versions command 82 133 Delete Page button 382 Delete Pages button 55 367 Delete Project command 83 Delete Smart Album command 273 Delete Version command 132 deleting See removing deleting previews 162 Demote button 169 demoting images 169 182 densitometers 438 density 438 depth of field 438 desaturating images 438 deselecting images 123 designs for pages See themes desktop extended 419 Index destination profiles 438 destinations for restoration 409 Detail Image Preset pop up menu 349 Detail Images panel 57 58 338 340 342 Detect Displays button 420 device characterization 438 device dependent color capabilities 424 438 device independent color capabilities 425 438 device profiles 426 diffused lighting 438 digital cameras See cameras digital data 438 digital ima
438. show For example you can choose a slideshow preset to quickly set up a slideshow as a series of images that appear four at a time with a specific display duration and type of transition between images Aperture provides several slideshow presets that you can choose The slideshow presets include Dissolve Displays each image for 3 seconds with a 2 second cross fade Fade through Black Displays each image on a black background for 3 seconds with a 2 second cross fade Manual You control this slideshow s progression with the Right and Left Arrow keys Slow Dissolve Displays each image for 5 1 seconds with a 5 second cross fade 4 Up Slow Successively displays four images one at a time showing each image for 3 seconds and then transitioning with a 2 second cross fade The first image is replaced with the fifth and so on 4 Up Fast Successively displays four images one at a time showing each image for 1 second The first image is replaced with the fifth and so on Important To display slideshows at the best quality you should set Aperture to create high resolution previews You can also display slideshows with good quality images without creating high resolution previews For more information about creating high resolution previews see the Aperture User Manual in the Aperture Help menu Part Ill Distribution and Backup You can also create your own custom presets For example to prepare for a presentation you could
439. sing that preset Aperture remembers your modified settings and exports your web images accordingly When you modify an existing preset you lose its original settings Chapter 18 Creating Webpages 353 To change a web export preset 1 Doone of the following e Choose Aperture gt Presets gt Web Export e In the Webpage Editor click the Export Web Pages button then choose Edit from the Thumbnail Image Preset or Detail Image Preset pop up menu The Web Export Presets dialog appears 2 Select the export preset you want to change modify its settings then click OK Deleting Web Export Presets You can delete web export presets when you no longer need them To delete a web export preset n the Web Export Presets dialog select the preset then click the Delete button Click the Delete button to delete the selected preset The preset is permanently deleted 354 Part III Distribution and Backup Adding Watermarks to Webpage Images You can add a graphics file to your images as a watermark to discourage others from using your images without your permission Watermarks are especially useful when applied to images posted on the web To create a preset that adds a watermark to your exported web images 1 Choose Aperture gt Presets gt Web Export 2 In the Web Export Presets dialog select the web export preset you want to modify or click the Add button to create a new preset 3 Select the Show Watermark
440. sions are created or modified When a preview exists for an image you can drag it into other applications To turn the creation of previews on or off for specific projects Select the project or Library in the Projects panel Choose Maintain Previews for Project from the Project Actions pop up menu to turn high resolution preview creation on or off A checkmark beside the command indicates that high resolution preview creation is turned on To turn the creation of previews on or off for the entire Library Select the Library in the Projects panel Choose Maintain Previews for All Projects from the Project Actions pop up menu to turn high resolution preview creation on or off A checkmark beside the command indicates that high resolution preview creation is turned on You can also have Aperture create or update previews for selected images When you turn the creation of previews off Aperture does not delete previews that were created previously It stops creating new previews from then on Chapter 6 Displaying Images in the Viewer 161 162 To create or update previews for selected images In the Browser select the images you want to update with new previews Choose Images gt Update Previews Note You can also force Aperture to update previews for images by selecting the images you want to update and then holding down Option and choosing Images gt Generate Previews from the shortcut menu You can also delete the previews
441. soft lighting 449 soft proofs 449 software drivers 416 Sort Direction button 42 120 sorting images in Browser 120 in grid view 129 Light Table and 324 in list view 126 by ratings 192 restoring last sort 129 Sorting pop up menu 42 120 129 Index source image files See digital master files source profiles 449 sources in metadata 229 242 source vaults 409 space characters 106 spacing between images in slideshows 317 spacing images evenly in Light Table 329 Span option multiple displays 157 special characters in filenames 106 special instructions in metadata 229 242 spectrophotometers 449 Split Stack command 183 Split Stacks button 109 splitting master pages 395 stacks 109 183 Spot amp Patch tool 47 170 Spot amp Patch tool HUD 62 spot adjustments 170 spot metering 449 square photo boxes 385 sRGB color space 425 427 450 Stack 47 Stack button 132 176 181 stacking buttons 47 stacking photo boxes on pages 387 Stack Pick button 47 169 stacks adding and removing images 183 arranging images in 182 closing 170 176 comparing images in 178 creating 109 177 179 defined 450 displaying 151 dividing 109 dragging images in 184 dragging stacks 184 Full Screen mode 185 importing images automatically 109 177 keyboard shortcuts for 186 list view 184 in multiple albums 182 opening or closing 109 170 181 overview 28 175 picks 123 169 176 181 promoting and demoting images 182 selecting images in 123 splitting 1
442. ss Command Option P 3 In the Print dialog specify your print options then click Print For more information see Chapter 14 Printing Your Images on page 277 Deleting a Light Table Album You can quickly delete an entire Light Table album If you ve transferred images from the Light Table album to other projects or albums the images in the other projects and albums remain unchanged even though the Light Table versions are gone To delete a Light Table album 1 Select the Light Table album in the Projects panel 2 Choose File gt Delete Light Table or press Command Delete Part III Distribution and Backup Creating Webpages 1 In Aperture you can easily create webpages of your images that you can post to your Mac account homepage or to your own website Then clients can conveniently review your work via the Internet This chapter provides instructions for creating and posting webpages of your images Using the built in Aperture webpage themes or designs you can create webpages that show your images in eye catching settings You can also create web journal pages of images and explanatory text narrative or captions that support your images For example you might create web journal pages that show and tell the story of an overseas shoot or a journalistic project This chapter covers An Overview of Creating Webpages p 334 Creating Web Galleries p 336 Creating Web Journals p 339 Viewing and Navigatin
443. ssential to effective color management See also device characterization gamut program exposure An exposure mode on many automatic cameras where the camera automatically sets the aperture and shutter values for a correct exposure See also exposure project In Aperture the top level container that holds all the master files versions and metadata associated with your shoot See also album folder Library master file version PSD The file extension for Photoshop Document PSD files are proprietary graphics files for Adobe Systems Incorporated See also format pupil The part of the eye that contracts and expands depending on the amount of light also known as the iris Glossary quantization The process of converting a value derived from an analog source into a discrete digital value See also digitization QuickTime A cross platform multimedia technology developed by Apple Widely used for editing compositing web video and more RA 4 A type of professional printer capable of printing digital files on traditional photographic paper RA 4 printers use a series of colored lights to expose the paper the colors blend together to produce continuous tone prints See also dye sublimation inkjet printer print photo printer RAID Short for Redundant Array of Independent Disks A method of providing photographers who have large image libraries many gigabytes of high performance data storage by formatting a group of hard disks to act as
444. ster pages 395 unipods 450 unlinking metadata boxes from images 390 Unlink Metadata Box command 390 unlocking print presets 286 unlocking vaults 407 unplaced images creating pages automatically 376 displaying 372 flowing into books 374 377 Light Table placement 327 unrated images 193 250 unstacking images 179 untagged images 450 Update All Vaults button 53 403 405 Update Vault command 405 Update Vault Path command 406 updating images on multiple computers 407 master pages 395 Smart Albums 269 vault images 401 vaults 53 78 402 403 405 USB cables 415 Use Best DPI checkbox 280 Use proportional spacing for images in Grid View checkbox 68 user interface elements 39 40 V vault backing up referenced images 400 Vault Action pop up menu 53 403 404 vaults adding or deleting 403 backing up Library to 400 creating 404 Index defined 72 78 451 deleting images in 407 identifying hard disks 404 locking and unlocking 407 overview 37 planning backup systems 402 reconnecting hard disks 406 restoring images from 400 restoring Library from 409 source vaults 409 status of 53 402 updating 78 401 403 405 working with multiple computers 407 Vaults panel displaying 65 functions 53 hiding 65 illustrated 37 opening 16 overview 402 Vaults Panel button 53 403 Vault Status button 53 401 403 version buttons 47 169 Version Name and Date Time format 105 Version Name format 105 version names formats for 105 in meta
445. t New gt Book e In the Projects panel choose New Empty Book from the Add to Library pop up menu In the dialog that appears specify the following e Theme list Select a theme in the list to see a preview of its design on the right e Book Size pop up menu Choose the physical size of the book When you re ready click Choose Theme A new untitled book album appears in the Projects panel Rename the book album To add images to the empty book album Select the project that holds the images in the Projects panel The project s images appear in the Browser Drag the images from the Browser to the book album in the Projects panel Chapter 19 Creating Books 365 Controls in the Book Layout Editor The Book Layout Editor is where you design the layout of pages in your book and add images and text to pages E tremesartcotecion BBY a T a st Rm ta Ss fe Pages l The Book Layout Editor is where you design your book Title Information Here jm f m 20 pages large hardcover 11 x 8 1 The following controls are available for working with books in the Book Layout Editor Edit Content button Theme button T Themes a colection ar Edit Layout button Pages Pages panel Add Pages pop up menu Book Action pop up menu Delete Pages button Set Master Page pop up menu Theme button Click this button to choose a theme for your book s pages e Edit Content butt
446. t Aperture will continue numbering the imported images starting from the last number of the previous import To reset the starting number of a counter in a name format In the Naming Presets dialog type 0 zero in the Incrementing counter starting at field Adding Metadata to Images During Import You can add metadata to your images as they are imported into Aperture Adding metadata during import helps you keep track of your images and quickly locate them using the Query HUD For example you can add IPTC keywords and other metadata to the image files To add metadata to your images as they re imported Choose a metadata view or preset from the Add Metadata From pop up menu in the Import dialog 6 Click the Reset button Append O Replace to clear entries in the Pe eT metadata fields Add Metadata From Caption amp Credits Credit Caption Copyright Notice When you choose a view Aperture displays the metadata fields for that view for you to complete You can enter the metadata you want in the fields When you choose a metadata preset Aperture displays the list of metadata fields and metadata for that preset You can edit the metadata preset to store any metadata that you want to apply frequently to your images using the Metadata Inspector For more information about editing metadata presets see Chapter 11 Working with Metadata on page 225 Part Interface and Acquisition To clear the entries in the
447. t Dialog p 279 Printing a Single Image p 281 Printing a Series of Images p 282 Printing a Contact Sheet or Series of Contact Sheets p 282 Printing a Book p 283 Printing a Light Table Arrangement p 284 Creating and Modifying Print Presets p 284 Proofing Your Images Onscreen p 286 Turning Off Color Management in Your Printer p 287 An Overview of Printing Aperture allows you to print your photos as high resolution single images and multi image contact sheets You can also print books and Light Table arrangements created in Aperture Aperture offers a variety of printing options including using a standard or custom paper size and assigning a specific ColorSync profile The easiest way to print images is to use one of the Aperture print presets Print presets or groups of print settings allow you to easily print your images without having to repeatedly change your settings If the preconfigured presets don t meet your needs you can create your own 277 278 For example if you regularly print both 8 by 10 inch and 11 by 14 inch photographs you can create a print preset for each of these paper sizes For photographers with multiple printers such as a standard and wide format inkjet printer you can create print presets for each printer Give the presets a name you ll remember and next time you need to print simply select the print preset that corresponds to your paper size or your printer type
448. t the folder of images you want to import When you have selected the folder containing the image files you want to import image thumbnails appear in the Import dialog In the Projects panel do one of the following e Select Library to create a new untitled project or choose File gt New Project or press Command N The Import arrow points at the Library e Select an existing project to hold your images The Import arrow points at the selected project The top left portion of the Import dialog updates displaying where the images are being placed Select the images you want to import by Shift clicking to select a range of adjacent images Command clicking to select nonadjacent images or dragging a selection rectangle around the images you want Part Interface and Acquisition 6 Choose a location for the imported images by doing one of the following To store imported master image files in the Aperture Library Choose In the Aperture Library from the Store Files pop up menu e To import the files as referenced images stored in their current locations on your hard disk Choose In their current location from the Store Files pop up menu e To store imported master image files as referenced images in the Pictures folder on your hard disk Choose Pictures from the Store Files pop up menu To store imported master image files as referenced images in a location other than the Pictures folder Choose Choos
449. tack appears as a series of linked photos in the Browser The pick of the stack appears on the left with a Stack button You can drag an image in the stack into the pick position By clicking the Stack button you can close the stack so that only the pick image appears You can then work with the single pick image without the encumbrance of the other stacked photos You can expand a stack to see all its images whenever you want Working with stacks can greatly increase the efficiency of reviewing large collections of photos For more information about working with stacks of images see Chapter 8 Stacking Images and Making Picks on page 175 PartI Interface and Acquisition Keywords and other metadata Assigning Keywords to Images Carefully assigning keywords to images is critical for the photographer who needs a means to easily locate specific images among thousands Applying keywords is also required if you plan to sell images to image libraries such as Corbis or Getty Images You can use Aperture to assign keywords to images using standard IPTC fields the standard metadata fields defined by the International Press Telecommunications Council You can also select images and assign keywords that you define You can display images in the Viewer with their version names and any assigned keywords appearing on or below the image VIET110 RO1 050 23A The Keywords HUD lists all the keyword categories and keywords that you define
450. tacks You can close a stack and open it again whenever you wish You may want to do this to free up space in the Browser You can also close stacks to quickly reduce the number of images you must sort through when selecting images for a final photo edit When a stack is closed only the stack s pick image appears in the Browser To close a stack do one of the following Select an open stack then choose Stacks gt Close Stack or press Shift K Click the Stack button on the pick image To close all stacks Choose Stacks gt Close All Stacks or press Option semicolon To open a stack do one of the following Select a closed stack then choose Stacks gt Open Stack or press Shift K Click the Stack button To open all stacks Choose Stacks gt Open All Stacks or press Option apostrophe Designating a Pick Image for a Stack The pick image represents the stack You can set the image you like best as the pick or Aperture can set the pick automatically When you select and stack images manually in the Browser the leftmost image becomes the pick You can change the pick whenever you wish To set an image as the pick do one of the following Select an image in the stack then choose Stacks gt Pick or press Command backslash Drag the image you want into the pick or leftmost position in the stack When you see a green bar appear release the mouse button Note When you place a stack in a book album or
451. te a metadata preset Select a metadata preset then press the Delete key When you work with other Aperture users you can share your metadata presets to ensure a consistent application of metadata to all the images You can export metadata presets for others to use and import presets when you need them To export a metadata preset To show the Metadata Inspector choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D Choose Manage Presets from the Metadata Action pop up menu Select the metadata preset that you want to export then click Export Choose a location where you want the metadata preset information stored then click Save To import a metadata preset To show the Metadata Inspector choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D Choose Manage Presets from the Metadata Action pop up menu Click Import Select the metadata preset file that you want to import then click Open Part Il Photo Editing Batch Changing Metadata You can select a group of images and make metadata changes to all the images at once For example if you need to add the same set of keywords to a selection of images or change the version name format you can select the images and use the Batch Change dialog to change them To change the metadata associated with a selection of images 1 Select the images you want to change 2 Choose Metadata gt Batch Change or press Command Shift B aAA Batch Change Time Adjustment None CO Adjust
452. te book album selected in the Projects Panel select an image in the Browser and choose Edit gt Select All or press Command A To remove the images from the album choose Images gt Remove From Album or press Delete All the images are removed from the Browser and the book pages Select the project that has the images you want to place in the book Select the images and drag them to the duplicate book album in the Projects panel Select the duplicate book album in the Projects panel Arrange the images in the Browser in the order you want them to appear in your book Choose Autoflow Unplaced Images from the Book Action pop up menu The images are automatically placed in the book pages Part Ill Distribution and Backup Click here to print your book on your printer or create a PDF file Printing Books After you ve created your book you can purchase printed and bound copies from Apple s print vendor You can also print your book using your own printer or create PDF files that you can send to clients or your own print vendor eco es Click here to purchase a printed book using your Mac account If you plan to hand off your files to a print vendor you can save your book either as a PDF file or a PostScript document You can then deliver this file to the printer or lab For more information about printing books on your printer see Chapter 14 Printing Your Images on page 277 For information about purchasing
453. ter you need To connect a second display to your computer Turn off the computer Connect a display cable and adapter if necessary from an available display port on your computer or graphics card to the display Depending on your displays you may have one or more cables to connect Refer to the documentation that came with the display and your computer for detailed information Important Make sure the cables are connected firmly or you may not be able to see an image on the display Part IV Appendixes and Glossary The following illustration shows one possible scenario for connecting two displays to a computer Power Mac G5 Apple Cinema Display ab E E o adapter Power ADC display port outlet ICI DVI display port le Y USB ports 9 FireWire 400 port AC plug Power adapter DC plug Power outlet e AC plu Power paa adapter DC plug Second Apple Cinema Display o oe FireWire connector not used 3 Turn on the displays if necessary and start up your computer You ll now want to adjust your displays for proper viewing Configuring Mac OS X for Multiple Displays If your computer is connected to two displays you can set them up to show a continuous desktop that extends across both screens This is known as extended desktop mode Because Aperture controls the second display you must keep your computer in this mode for the application to operate properly If you work in mirroring mode w
454. that version in the Viewer For more information about working with stacks see Chapter 8 Stacking Images and Making Picks on page 175 Deleting Images from the Browser When necessary you can delete versions and even digital master files When deleting images you can e Remove a version from an album leaving any other versions of the image in their original locations e Delete versions from within a stack e Delete digital master files To remove a version from an album Select the version and choose Image gt Remove From Album or press Delete You may also want to delete a version from a stack To delete a version from a stack Open the stack and select the version you want to delete Choose File gt Delete Version or press Command Delete If you delete the last version in a stack Aperture asks whether you want to delete the digital master file If you confirm that you want to delete the master file the master file is moved to the Trash When an image is represented in the Browser by a single version you can select the version and delete it and the corresponding digital master file is deleted as well Part Il Photo Editing To delete a master file Select a version in an album or project Choose File gt Delete Version or press Command Delete When a dialog appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the digital master file and versions click Move to Trash You can select a stack containi
455. the Finder filename of images to the selected name format by selecting the Apply to Master filenames checkbox Then an image will have the same filename in the Finder and in Aperture When you move or copy image files to a different location you can have Aperture place them as individual files in the destination folder or place them in subfolders within the destination folder For example a group of images might be copied into a destination folder with each image placed in a subfolder identified by a date Or each image might be placed in a hierarchy of subfolders organized by year month and day You choose the subfolder organization you want from the Subfolders pop up menu You can also specify your own custom folder organizations by choosing the Edit command Image Information File Name No Adjusted File Name No Selection File Date Ne Type No Size No Dimensions Vo Store Files Documents g O Move files Copy files Subfolders Subfolders pop up menu Folder Texti Date Version Name Untitled Date Name EJ Year Month Day D Month Day Version Name Name Text s Edit Time Adjustment None PartI Interface and Acquisition Import Panel button Select the disk where the images you want to import are located For more information about creating custom subfolder hierarchies see Importing Master Files for Referenced Images into Folders on page 103 To copy
456. the effect of removing blemishes or sharpening an image You can position the Loupe over different portions of an image and see the magnified view oe80e Aperture O E E ENER EN CET Se ue Moe nzteoes OB aa Depending on the size of your display and Viewer images may be displayed at a reduced size to fit your Viewer You can have Aperture display your images at full resolution pixel for pixel which can create images larger than can fit on your display s screen Displaying an image at full resolution allows you to examine the image exactly as it was recorded and see the precise effects of your adjustments and changes Aperture o Ride 4b ecao QD aa Full resolution view of an image that is larger than the Viewer s screen size Chapter 6 Displaying Images in the Viewer 147 Using two displays with your Aperture system is an excellent means of viewing your images Aperture can show your images on both displays allowing you to dedicate one display to enlarged views When your system uses two or more displays Aperture provides two Viewers called the primary Viewer and secondary Viewer Just as you can with a single Viewer you can set the Viewer on your second display to show images singly three at a time or up to ten at a time You can also set view options that determine the amount of information that appears with each image For example you can display images in the Viewer
457. the images in your iPhoto Library any changes you make to those images in iPhoto will not be reflected in the duplicate images in Aperture Note You can also import individual images or albums from your iPhoto Library Chapter 4 Importing Images 113 114 Oo ON O Transferring Projects from Another System If you work with several computers or work on a project with other people you may find it necessary to transfer projects from one Aperture system to another Transferring projects is a simple import process To transfer a project from one computer to another Select the project you want to transfer then choose File gt Export Project or press Commanc Shift E Enter a name and choose a location for the exported project If your project contains referenced images select the Consolidate images into exported project checkbox to transfer the original referenced images master files as well as the previews and metadata as a self contained project that another Aperture system can use If you want to transfer projects with referenced images to another computer and don t want to transfer the referenced images master files but would rather transfer just the referenced image previews don t select the Consolidate images into exported project checkbox Click Save The project file is exported to the location you chose Connect or network the two computers together For more information see the documentation that
458. the most basic component of Aperture because they contain your digital master files and track all changes to versions You can easily transfer projects from one Aperture system to another All links between versions and their master files are maintained when projects are transferred This is particularly useful if you use a portable computer when on location or away from your studio and a workstation at your studio For more information see Transferring Projects from Another System on page 114 f an Projects v gt liia Library Q gt 2002 Examples of items in gt 2003 the Projects panel gt 2004 gt 2005 E Antarctica Projects J E Bali t Belize L Cephalopods Q E Deep Sea Animals Q gt Florida and the Keys gt French Polynesia and Tahiti gt Galapagos Islands t Kenya The Wildlife of the Masai Mara Komodo You can have multiple projects open at the same time each represented by its own icon in the Projects panel and tab in the Browser What Are Albums An album is a container in the Aperture Library that holds only image versions not the digital master files to which they refer You use albums to organize images in the Library making your selections of versions easier to manage You can create albums at the Library level or within a project You use albums created at the Library level to organize versions from multiple projects For example you can creat
459. the organization of your images All images remain stacked but they are now part of new stacks The image selected as the splitting point becomes the pick for the new stack To split a stack In an expanded stack select the image that you want as the first image in a new stack Select the image you want as the first image in the new stack 2 Choose Stacks gt Split Stack or press Option k alik img105 The selected image becomes the pick in the new stack which is marked with a white outline The new stack is marked with a white outline The selected image becomes the pick of the new stack Chapter 8 Stacking Images and Making Picks 183 184 Dragging Stacks You can drag an entire stack to a new location and you can drag specific images within a stack to a new location When a stack is closed dragging the stack moves the entire stack When a stack is open you can drag individual versions to new locations in the Browser You can also drag images into a stack If you drag a stacked image into a different project however the entire stack moves to the new location Working with Stacks in List View If you prefer you can also create and work with stacks in list view You can select images to stack select a pick add and remove images and split stacks just as you can in grid view B image date 4 BG showinga SG Version Name Badges Rating pimage Date Al Aperture Shutter Speed Exposur
460. the paper dots per inch dpi A printer resolution measurement that refers to the maximum number of dots within a square inch See also print resolution drift Changes in the way a device reproduces color over time For example the age of inks and type of paper can cause a printer s color output to drift See also device characterization gamut drop shadow An effect that creates an artificial shadow behind an image Typically used on websites and in photo albums to create the illusion of three dimensions dust and scratch removal The process of digitally removing the blemishes caused by dust and scratches on film scans Glossary 439 440 dye sublimation A type of printer that creates images by heating colored ribbon to a gaseous state bonding the ink to the paper See also inkjet printer print photo printer RA 4 editing The process of arranging and eliminating images See also photo edit effects A general term used to describe the introduction of unnatural visual elements to enhance an image See also compositing filters electromagnetic radiation A type of energy ranging from gamma rays to radio waves that also includes visible light See also light embedded profile The source profile saved in the digital image file JPEG TIFF PNG and PDF file formats support embedded profiles See also device characterization profile emulsion The tiny layers of gelatin consisting of light sensitive elements found in film When
461. them in stacks Bracketed shots These typically represent a series of three pictures with slightly different exposure settings Advanced digital cameras often have options for shooting bracketed shots automatically When Aperture detects a series of bracketed images it includes the neutral image and the over and underexposed images in the stack Creating Stacks Automatically When importing images you can have Aperture automatically group them into stacks To set Aperture to stack images automatically during import Connect your camera or card reader to your computer When the Import panel and the Import dialog appear select your camera or card reader Drag the Auto Stack slider to set the interval between successive shots that should be stacked Click these buttons to Drag the slider Click here to stack Click here to open or close stacks to stack images selected images unstack all stacks i 1 i i off 0 15 0 30 0 45 1 00 Click here to split a stack The images in the dialog are stacked according to the slider setting Inspect the stacks to determine if the time interval should be shortened or lengthened Note You can also manually select images in the Import dialog and stack and unstack them using the same commands and procedures you use to stack images in the Browser Chapter 8 Stacking Images and Making Picks 177 178 Specify the other import options you want then click Import All For more inform
462. this tool l Stamp Stamp or apply a copied set of adjustments or metadata to one or several images with this tool For more information about working with the adjustment tools see Performing Image Adjustments in the Aperture Help menu Loupe and Keywords HUD Buttons oad A Loupe Click this button to open the Loupe tool which zooms in on your image by magnifying the area of the image it is placed over You can adjust the diameter of the Loupe by choosing View gt Increase Diameter or View gt Decrease Diameter B Keywords HUD Click this button to show or hide the Keywords HUD Adjustments and Metadata Inspector Buttons Aperture provides three layout buttons that you can use to quickly change the workspace layout l m A Adjustments Inspector Click this button to show or hide the Adjustments Inspector B Metadata Inspector Click this button to show or hide Metadata Inspector For more information about workspace layouts see Workspace Layouts on page 64 Part Interface and Acquisition Adjustments Inspector You can use controls in the Adjustments Inspector to apply edit and remove image adjustments Controls in the Adjustments Inspector are grouped according to the type of image adjustment they perform You can see the controls for an adjustment by clicking its disclosure triangle To show the Adjustments Inspector do one of the following Choose Window gt Show Inspect
463. tically consolidating redundant image data without discarding it See also decompression LZW compression composition The arrangement of visual elements in a scene contact sheet Based on a print preset in Aperture a printed selection of thumbnail sized images with or without associated metadata Contact sheets in Aperture are similar in appearance to contact prints made by exposing negatives or transparencies against photographic paper cones A type of receptor in the eye capable of perceiving color There are three types of cone cells each sensitive to a particular frequency range in the visible spectrum Cone cells are capable of seeing either red green or blue colors See also rods contrast The difference between the brightness and color values in an image that allows the viewer to distinguish between objects in an image High contrast images have a large range of values from the darkest shadow to the lightest highlight Low contrast images have a more narrow range of values resulting in a flatter look See also density flat crop The process of printing or distributing only part of the original image The general purpose of cropping an image is to create a more effective composition Another reason for cropping an image is to make it fit a particular aspect ratio such as 4 x 6 See also adjustment aspect ratio effects decompression The process of creating a viewable image from a compressed digital image file See also co
464. ting an accurate color profile for a device Calibrating a device ensures accurate color translation from device to device See also device characterization camera A photographic device usually consisting of a lightproof box with a lens at one end and either light sensitive film or a digital image sensor at the other See also digital point and shoot camera digital single lens reflex DSLR camera camera shake Blurring of the image caused by the combination of a slow shutter speed small aperture and long focal length See also aperture shutter speed tripod unipod capture The process of taking the image received by the digital image sensor and camera processor and storing that information on the memory card in the camera See also camera digital image sensor memory card center weighted metering A type of metering that measures the light in the entire viewfinder but gives extra emphasis to the center of the frame Center weighted metering is the most common type of metering in consumer cameras See also evaluative metering light meter spot metering charge coupled device CCD A type of digital image sensor that records the pixel information row by row See also complementary metal oxide semiconductor CMOS digital image sensor close up An image where the subject usually appears within 3 feet of the camera For example head shots are often referred to as close ups A shot of an ant on a flower s petal where the ant fills a ma
465. tings using keyboard shortcuts For more information see Keyboard Shortcuts for Displaying Images with Specific Ratings on page 197 Part Il Photo Editing Specify the search criteria here Select the IPTC checkbox Searching by IPTC Information You can now search for and locate images using any IPTC information that you ve assigned using enhanced search qualifiers For example you might locate any images that have IPTC keywords assigned to them To search for images by IPTC information you use the IPTC search options For example you can search for any image that doesn t have keywords applied by specifying a search that uses the keywords criteria and an is empty search qualifier 6 Match any 7 of the following Rating Is greater than or equal to Calendar je or more of the following EAA o i empty New Smart Album New Album With Current images F To search for images by IPTC information 1 In the Projects panel select a project or an album you want to search 2 Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser 3 In the Query HUD choose IPTC from the Add Filter pop up menu 4 Select the IPTC checkbox then choose the IPTC field you want to search by from the IPTC pop up menu x Filter Vietnam Match any 7 of the following Qe Quick Search Rating is greater than or
466. tion and Backup To create a new master page design from a page in your book In the Pages panel select a page in your book whose modifications you want to save as a master page Choose Save Page gt As New Document Master from the Book Action pop up menu Choose Show Master Pages from the Book Action pop up menu if necessary to show the Master Pages panel Select the new master page in the Master Pages panel and rename it After updating the design of a page in your book you can update the original master page with those changes To save changes in a book page to the original master page design In the Pages panel select the page whose design you modified Choose Save Page gt To Document Master from the Book Action pop up menu Aperture updates the original master page with your design changes Unifying and Splitting Master Pages Some master pages have left and right versions to match the book margins on the left and right facing pages You can select a left or right master page and consolidate the two versions into one page To unify left and right versions of a master page Select a left or right master page in the Master Pages panel Choose Unify Master Page from the Book Action pop up menu You can also select a master page that has only one version and split it into left and right versions To split a master page that doesn t have left or right versions into left and right versions Select a master page in th
467. to display an image s version name caption keywords and other metadata mi T ca sT an ea Sh Photo box holding an image 56 pages large hardcover 11 x 8 4 Text box holding text If you prefer you can build a book page by page You can add a new page to your book choose a master page design fill in images and text and then create the next page repeating the procedure for each page you add You can also select a group of images in the Browser and have Aperture automatically place them into pages in your book Aperture creates as many pages as you need and fills them with your images You can change the page design of individual pages later by applying different master page designs As you work on a book you may need to adjust the layout of individual pages For example you may discover that one image in a group should appear slightly larger You can move and resize the boxes that hold images on individual pages making minor layout adjustments when a master page design doesn t quite suffice Chapter 19 Creating Books 361 To change the design of a page click the Edit Layout button You can then work with the photo boxes and text boxes that appear on the page resizing and rearranging them The Book Layout Editor automatically displays grid lines that show you how the item you re working with aligns with other items already on the page Edit Layout button Oe aTa ta oT 0 ta
468. to proof the color in your images onscreen before you print them To use onscreen proofing choose the proofing profile that most closely matches the characteristics of the final output device and then turn on onscreen proofing To choose a proofing profile Choose View gt Proofing Profile then choose the profile you want from the submenu To turn onscreen proofing on or off Choose View gt Onscreen Proofing or press Shift Option P When onscreen proofing is on a checkmark appears beside the option in the View menu For more information about using the Aperture onscreen proofing feature see Setting Up the Viewer for Onscreen Proofing on page 156 For more information about ColorSync profiles and color calibrating your computer see Appendix B Calibrating Your Aperture System on page 423 Part Ill Distribution and Backup Turning Off Color Management in Your Printer For best results you should turn off color management in your printer when printing an image using Aperture By default most printers are set to convert the image to the printer s color space However Aperture is designed to perform this conversion internally Each printer manufacturer creates its own print dialog This means the setting for turning off color management in your printer varies depending upon the manufacturer of your printer and the printer model Note If you have multiple printers connected to your computer you must create a pr
469. ton In the dialog that appears give the keyword list a name choose a location and click Save The keyword list is saved as a text file txt to the location you chose Once you have an exported keyword list you can transfer the file to another Aperture system and import it You can also manually create or edit keyword lists using other applications such as TextEdit and import the lists into Aperture as long as they follow a tab delimited text file structure To import a keyword list In the Keywords HUD click the Import button In the dialog that appears navigate to the keyword list file and click Open The Keywords HUD is updated to include all the new keywords from the imported keyword list Part Il Photo Editing Working with Metadata 1 1 You can display different combinations of metadata such as version names captions ratings keywords and IPTC information with your images This chapter explains how to set the display of metadata with your images using the View Options window It also explains how to use the Metadata Inspector to display and change the metadata for a selected image as well as create custom sets of metadata for display This chapter also provides information about the icons called badges that appear on images when you ve made changes to them This chapter covers An Overview of Metadata Metadata Views and Metadata Presets p 226 Displaying Metadata with Your Images p 228 Turning the
470. tration shows some of the search criteria you can specify using the Query HUD x Filter Vietnam Match Bay 5 of the following Qr Quick Search Y Rating E Y calendar saian aaia ik ik a August 2004 September 2004 October 2004 smTwtrters smMTM QWwT Fs SMTWTF S 33 32 33 4 TETEE Specify your search criteria V Keywords contain one or more of the following lt Background Family Y Full body V Headshot Landscape Image typ Silhouette Import Session is one or more of the following V text Mekong amp New Smart Album New Album With Current Images gt To search using a particular type of search criteria you select the checkbox to turn on the search option and then specify the criteria that Aperture should look for For example to find images taken on a specific date you select the Calendar checkbox and select a date or range of dates x Filter Vietnam Match any of the following Q Quick Search Rating is greater than or equal to 7 a Unrated Y Calendar rr aia ai i August 2004 September 2004 October 2004 S MNES SMTWTFS Ce fe a 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 Keywords Import Session is one or more of the following New Smart Album New Album With Current Images ey The images taken on the dates you specified are displayed in the Browser where you can review and work with them You can also create complex searches by adding search criteria options to the Query HUD
471. trol click the image then choose Reset Selected Size from the shortcut menu Aligning and Arranging Images in the Light Table You can select a group of images in the Light Table and automatically align them according to their top bottom or side edges or by their centers You can also have Aperture arrange a selected group with equal space between each image To align selected images In the Light Table select the images you want to align Control click one of the images choose Align from the shortcut menu then choose the type of alignment you want from the submenu se a Choose Align from the shortcut menu The selected images are aligned according then choose an option from the submenu to the option you chose Part III Distribution and Backup The top image is selected To distribute selected images with an equal amount of space between them In the Light Table select the images you want to distribute Control click one of the images choose Distribute from the shortcut menu then choose Horizontal or Vertical Distribution from the submenu The images are distributed horizontally or vertically in the Light Table You can also automatically group a selection of images Aperture gathers the images and places them together for easy arrangement If some images in a group are hidden behind other images you can also reveal or uncover all images in the group To group images in the Light Table In the Light Table se
472. ture system It s important to calibrate your display and printer so that your printed images look as much as possible like the images you see on the computer screen For more information about color calibrating your Aperture system see Appendix B Calibrating Your Aperture System on page 423 Part Ill Distribution and Backup Copies amp Pages area Printer Selection area Layout Options area Border Options area Controls in the Print Dialog Whether you re printing a single high resolution print a series of contact sheets or your latest travelogue book you use the Print dialog to print your work To open the Print dialog Select an image in the Browser then choose File gt Print Image or press Command P Preset Name list Preview area f cases oases A ee Pages Oan Orom han Sample Contact Sheet Preset Printer Selection Printer Detaut Printer Windiass mse o n Oven Ger 2 Colas Pete Sytem Mamged _ F mack Point Compensation Gamma 100 7 Layout Options sae o x0 in Print Resolution ppe 259 useBest opi T border options Width O oeoo Cl Stow crop marks Preset options a em ee Geena Creer Cas D P rint Preset Action pop up menu The Print dialog is divided into six areas Preset Name List This column contains all presets those that come with Aperture as well as
473. ty of film provided as a benchmark by the International Standards Organization ISO In digital cameras the minimum ISO rating is defined by the sensitivity of the digital image sensor When the ISO setting on the camera is increased allowing the photographer to shoot in low light situations the camera amplifies the voltage received from the light sensitive elements on the digital image sensor prior to converting the voltage signals to digital values See also digital image sensor digital noise JPEG Short for Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a popular image file format that lets you create highly compressed graphics files The amount of compression used can be varied Less compression results in a higher quality image See also format Glossary 443 444 kelvin K A unit of measurement used to describe color values of light sources based on a temperature scale that begins at absolute zero See also color temperature white balance keywords Descriptive words about the subject in the image that are added to image versions and saved as metadata See also metadata lab plot A visual three dimensional representation of the CIE Lab color space See also color space ColorSync lens A series of sophisticated elements usually glass constructed to refract and focus the reflective light from a scene at a specific point the digital image sensor in a camera See also camera digital image sensor macro lens prime lens telephoto len
474. u can create your own An easy way to create a new export preset is to copy an existing preset and then modify the copy To create a new web export preset Do one of the following e Choose Aperture gt Presets gt Web Export In the Webpage Editor click the Export Web Pages button then choose Edit from the Thumbnail Image Preset or Detail Image Preset pop up menu The Web Export Presets dialog appears Web Export Presets Wet baal Je ee Image Format eec Web Deta G Best 2 Web Detail JPEG High Quality C include Metadata Web Detail JPEG Medium Quality Web Thumbnails JPEG Best Quality Fon amiRa a Web Thumbnails JPEG High Quality Web Thumbnails JPEG Medium Quality Gamma Adjust gt 0 00 ani ColorsyneProtie RGBLECEIO6S 21 i show Watermark Position Top Left Opacity _g 00 ede ance Select a web export preset on which to base your new preset then click the Add button A new preset based on the export preset you selected appears highlighted in the Web Export Preset Name list Enter a new name for the preset Change the export criteria as required then click OK Modifying Web Export Presets After examining a selected preset s settings you may want to change something about the preset To modify a selected preset you can simply change the necessary settings and click OK The next time you export u
475. u may want to change their stacking order For example you might want to place three images on top of one another in a specific order To change the stacking order of boxes you select a box and then click the Bring Forward or Send Backward button l l sT e 27 Qaj E w Bring Forward button Send Backward button To change the order of a stack of boxes Click the Edit Layout button if it s not already selected Select the box whose stacking order you want to change Do one of the following e Click the Bring Forward or Send Backward button e Choose Arrange from the Book Action pop up menu then choose an option from the submenu Removing Photo Boxes After creating a page and applying a master page design you may want to remove one or more photo boxes from the page You can choose a different master page design that has fewer photo boxes or you can remove photo boxes from the page To remove photo boxes from a page Click the Edit Layout button select a photo box or boxes then choose Edit gt Cut or press Delete Changing the Look of Images with Filters Aperture allows you to change the look of images by applying filters For example you might apply a filter that fades an image so that you can position text over it to create an interesting cover You can also apply filters that change an image to black and white or sepia A ToD a Photo Filter pop up menu Chapter 19 Creating Books 387 388 BW N To ap
476. u ve selected multiple images to rate and find that only one image receives a rating check to see if the Primary Only button in the control bar is deselected You can quickly select or deselect the Primary Only option by pressing S Sorting Images by Rating After you ve rated your images you can sort images according to a specific rating For example after an initial rating pass you can choose to show only those images rated Select with five stars You can then closely inspect and further refine your selection or begin making adjustments to images Image files are not deleted when sorted by rating They are only temporarily removed from view Part Il Photo Editing To sort images by rating 1 Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following e Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e In the Browser click the Query HUD button next to the search field Query HUD button aj Qe Showing a in the Browser x Match any ofthe following Make sure this checkbox V Rating Ts greater than or equal to is selected then choose Calendar Set the slider to a rating an option from the pop up menu is one or more of the following New Smart Album New Album With Current images Choose an option from the Rating pop up menu 4 Drag the Rating slider to specify a rating The Browser instantly displays only images that meet the specified rating criteria To view all images again Deselect the Rating checkbox in t
477. u want here Chapter 19 Creating Books 359 360 When you choose a theme the Book Layout Editor provides a professionally designed set of master pages that determine how you mix text and images on the page For example you can choose among master pages that create a cover page pages of text in columns of various sizes pages of images in different arrangements and pages with different combinations of images and text You ll find master pages provide a fast and convenient method for quickly laying out a book ai T0 ca oT 2 alla 7 Selected page The new page format appears here You can drag images into the gray photo boxes that appear on pages Choose a master page design from the Set Master Page pop up menu Choose the master page design you want here When you first create a book album in the Projects panel Aperture automatically creates a default set of pages for you You then use the Book Layout Editor to format your pages and create any additional pages you need Part III Distribution and Backup You can apply a master page design to any selected page to define where your text and images appear Pages appear with gray photo boxes to hold images and text boxes to hold text To add images you drag them into the photo boxes from the Browser To add text you select a text box and type or paste text into it If you wish you can also place metadata boxes next to images
478. ult on your backup disk to the other computer If you experience equipment failure or other unexpected events such as fire or weather related damage to your equipment you can easily restore the entire Library to your new computer from a backup disk To restore the entire Library from an external backup disk Connect the hard disk drive that contains the most up to date vault to your computer and open Aperture Choose File gt Vault gt Restore Library The Restore Library dialog appears jeae Restore Library Restore Library is used to setup a new machine or recover from a disk failure It will construct a new library from data in the source vault and will exactly match the library you had when the vault was last updated Your existing library will be preserved but changes are not merged into the restored library The Library Destination has to have enough space for everything in the vault Choose an existing library or a folder in which the library will be created After copying the files from your vault to the new library the program will need to relaunch and reconstruct the database Source Vault Backup Vault X Library Destination Aperture Library aplibrary Ceancet JHC resore Choose Select Source Vault from the Source Vault pop up menu Navigate to the vault from which you want to restore then click Select Choose Select Destination from the Library Destination pop up menu Navigate to t
479. ultiple search options using the Add Filter pop up menu To search for images by a combination of search criteria In the Projects panel select a project or an album you want to search Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following e Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser In the Query HUD choose the search options you want to add from the Add Filter pop up menu Select the checkboxes beside the criteria you want to use and specify the search criteria x Filter Vietnam Qe Quick Search To add additional search options choose them from this pop up menu Match any gt of the following V Rating E Y Calendar August 2004 SMTITWTFS 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 Specify your search criteria V keywords contain one or more of the following lt Background Family Y Full body Landscape Image typ Silhouette Headshot import Session is one or more of the following V text Mekong New Smart Album New Album With Current Images ey Do one of the following e To specify that an image must match at least one of the criteria or keywords Choose any from the Match pop up menu e To specify that an image must match all the criteria and keywords Choose all from the Match pop up menu The images that match the search criteria are immediately displayed in the Browser To save your search results see th
480. unction Increase ratin Cea s Jor S g Decrease rating Apply Reject o Jor s o pply Rej Apply one star 2 Jorfe sjt Apply two stars 3 Jorfa s Apply three stars 4 Jos tl Apply four stars s Jor Apply five stars lia e Q 4 a Increase the rating of the selected image and cancel the rating ae assigned to the previously rated image a Decrease the rating of the selected image and cancel the rating si assigned to the previously rated image 4 o Reject the selected image and cancel the rating assigned to the previously rated image The last three keyboard shortcuts in the table allow you to easily cancel the rating of the previously rated image For example if you rate an image Select and then find the next image you re rating is better you can remove the rating given to the previous image and increase the currently selected image s rating Chapter9 Rating Images 191 192 You can also apply a rating to several images at once To apply the same rating to multiple images at once Select the images you want to rate For more information see Navigating Through and Selecting Images on page 122 Click a rating button or press the keyboard shortcut for a rating see Keyboard Shortcuts for Rating Images on page 191 I the rating you assign is displayed on all the selected images Note If yo
481. ur images for use on the web Aperture comes with a number of web export presets and you can also create your own Viewing the Settings for a Web Export Preset Before using a web export preset whether it s one that comes with Aperture or one that you created you can view its settings to make sure they are exactly what you want Chapter 18 Creating Webpages 351 352 Available presets are shown here To view the settings for an export preset Choose Aperture gt Presets gt Web Export The Web Export Presets dialog appears listing the presets available and their export settings Web Export Presets Image omat FEE Web Detail JPEG High Quality include Metadata Web Detail JPEG Medium Quality Web Thumbnails JPEG Best Quality pee eect Ox Web Thumbnails JPEG High Quality Web Thumbnails JPEG Medium Quality Gamma Adjust 0 00 Web PNG Sharpened ColorSync Profile sRGB 1EC61966 2 1 C Show Watermark 7 x postions TEK a The right side of the Opacity ow dialog shows the settings for the selected preset oc Ceancet J Gon The Web Export Presets dialog includes these controls e Image Format pop up menu Choose an image format to convert your images to such as JPEG or PNG from this pop up menu e Include Metadata checkbox Select this checkbox to include EXIF and IPTC metadata information in the image files e Image Quality slider Choose how much to compress
482. ure Library Disconnect one of the vault hard disks and take it to an offsite location for safekeeping When planning the amount of storage space you ll need estimate the amount of disk space needed to hold your existing digital images photos you plan to import into Aperture and the amount of space you might need for new projects For example RAW images typically require 8 to 18 MB of disk space per file Estimating the number of images in a typical project and the number of projects you usually do in a year you can make a rough estimate of what might represent a year s storage space For step by step instructions for initially setting up your hard disks and backup system see Appendix A Setting Up an Aperture System on page 413 Working with the Vaults Panel You use the Vaults panel at the bottom of the Projects panel to set the location of your vaults and check their status To show the Vaults panel do one of the following Choose Window gt Show Vaults or press Shift R Click the Vaults Panel button Part Ill Distribution and Backup Disclosure triangle The colored bar represents the space used by the vault Controls in the Vaults Panel There are several controls that you ll use when you update vaults Vault 1 83 4GB of 232 8GB availab ai i celeron _ of Vault Status button E Backup Disk Vault 1 ane y Vault 2 834GB of 232 868 available ey E EEEE E Backup Disk Vault 2
483. w Background Brightness slider 68 Grid View Background Levels slider 125 Grid View button 42 120 125 grouping images in Light Table 329 in Smart Albums 30 in stacks 28 Grow Selection command 123 H hardcover books 368 380 hard disks adding additional disks 415 backing up to 400 bus powered 416 disconnecting 406 identifying 404 importing images from 97 locations of images 115 offsite storage 406 planning backup systems 402 reconnecting 406 restoring from 409 storage space 402 403 transferring images 408 vaults on 78 404 hardware color management 424 considerations 416 device profiles 426 disk drive considerations 415 multiple display systems 416 See also specific types of hardware header styles 347 headings on pages 345 headlines in metadata 229 242 heads up displays See HUDs names of specific HUDs height of rows 338 341 Height value slider 57 59 338 341 hidden images in Light Table 329 hiding badge overlays 245 filmstrip 168 image tooltips 232 Loupe tool 152 master pages 394 metadata 143 159 231 overlays 204 page numbers 382 Index panels with keyboard shortcuts 65 rejected images 250 unrated images 250 Viewer 148 Highlight Hot Areas command 154 high resolution images 278 high resolution previews 160 homepages linking to 349 Hot Area Display Threshold slider 68 hot areas 68 154 HTML files exporting 348 350 saving web galleries or journals 335 HUDs heads up displays using in Full Scr
484. web journal page Click an image to select it Drag the grid mark at the top of the photo box to move the image to the new location Release the mouse button when a green bar appears where you want to place the image Aperture places your images in the photo boxes designed for the page To remove an image from a web journal page Click the image to select it Click the Remove button with a minus sign to remove the selected photo box You can add text boxes to web journal pages as you need them Text boxes are added to the page one after another New text boxes are always added to the bottom of the page but you can drag text boxes to new locations when you need to rearrange them To add text to a web journal page In the Journal Pages panel select the page to which you want to add text Click the Add Text Box button Enter the text you want You can drag the text box to a new location if you wish To move a text box Click the text box to select it Position the pointer on the grid mark at the top of the text box and drag the text box until you see a green bar appear where you want to place the text box Part Ill Distribution and Backup To remove a text box from a web journal page Click the text box to select it Click the Remove button with a minus sign to remove the selected text box Adding Pages to a Web Journal You can add pages to your web journal as you need them To add a page to a web journal Select a p
485. where you can never be certain what computer platform your files may be stored on even if temporarily Avoid Example characters File separators colon slash backslash Reasons You cannot use colons in the names of files and folders because Mac OS 9 Classic uses this character to separate directories in pathnames In addition some applications may not allow you to use slashes in the names of items These characters are directory separators for Mac OS 9 Mac OS X and DOS Windows respectively Special characters not included O0 in your native alphabet These characters may not be supported or may be difficult to work with when exported to other applications Punctuation marks parentheses lt gt quotation marks brackets and operators These characters are often used in scripting and programming languages White space characters such as spaces tabs new lines and carriage returns the last two are uncommon White space is handled differently in different programming languages and operating systems so certain processing scripts and applications may treat your files differently than expected The most conservative filenames avoid all use of white space characters and use the underscore _ character instead Part Interface and Acquisition Creating Custom Name Formats In addition to the preset name formats you can create custom name formats To c
486. with Two Displays Using more than one display gives you additional screen space to view and adjust images play slideshows and present your full size full color images For connecting a second display you ll need the following e Power adapter for the display e Display cable to connect the display to the graphics card on your computer Power adapter Apple Cinema Display cable connectors A Ay DC power 5 K FireWire Q IOI DVI Appendix A Setting Up an Aperture System 417 418 Note You may also need to purchase an adapter to connect the display cable to the graphics card on your computer ADC to DVI adapter Macintosh computers come with two possible display ports Apple Display Connector ADC ports to connect ADC displays and Digital Visual Interface DVI ports to connect digital displays that have DVI connectors such as a flat panel Apple Cinema Display HEH ol GEER 5 gt DVI display port ADC display port e If your second display is an ADC display Connect it to an available ADC display port on your computer or use a DVI to ADC adapter to connect the display to a DVI display port e If your second display is a DVI display Connect the display to an available DVI display port on your computer or use an ADC to DVI adapter to connect the display to an ADC display port See the documentation that came with your computer or graphics card for more information about the type of display cable or adap
487. with their keywords and other information such as IPTC or EXIF metadata Showing or Hiding the Viewer You can quickly hide the Viewer to provide more room for the Browser and show it when needed To show or hide the Viewer Choose Window gt Show Hide Viewer or press V Changing the Viewer Background Depending on your work preferences you may want to lighten or darken the background that your images appear against in the Viewer You can darken the background from shades of gray all the way to black or lighten it from gray to white To change the background of the Viewer 1 Choose Aperture gt Preferences or press Command comma 2 Drag the Viewer Background Brightness slider to lighten or darken the background 3 Close the Preferences window Part Il Photo Editing Changing the Number of Images in the Viewer You can specify whether the Viewer displays one image three images or multiple images at a time If your system uses multiple displays you can configure your primary and secondary displays to show single images three images or multiple images simultaneously The display settings you choose also set the display of images in Full Screen mode To display a single image do one of the following Choose View gt Main Viewer gt Primary or press Option R Choose Primary from the Viewer Mode pop up menu in the control bar Main Viewer Choose Primary from the Viewer Mode pop up menu to view a si
488. wser in grid view or list view or in image tooltips The following table lists the metadata views that you can choose and the information that each view displays Metadata view name Information displayed All IPTC Lists all IPTC fields General Rating badges caption version name image date aperture shutter speed exposure bias ISO speed rating focal length 35mm focal length pixel size filename file size credit copyright notice object name camera model master location and keywords Name Only Version name Caption Only Caption Name amp Rating Version name rating and badges Name amp Caption Version name and caption Ratings Rating and badges Caption amp Keywords Version name caption and keywords Caption amp Credits Version name byline credit caption and copyright notice File Info Version name filename file size pixel size color model image date and badges Part II Photo Editing Metadata view name Information displayed Photo Info EXIF Version name image date camera model pixel size aperture shutter speed exposure bias focal length 35mm focal length and ISO speed rating EXIF Expanded Version name image date camera make camera model pixel size aperture shutter speed exposure bias focal length 35mm focal length ISO speed rating aspect ratio orientation depth color space exposure mode flash serial number lens minimum mm maximum le
489. x button Click this button to add a photo box to the page to hold an image e Send Backward button Click this button to move a selected box backward in the stacking order of overlapping text or image boxes e Bring Forward button Click this button to move a selected box forward in the stacking order of overlapping text or image boxes Chapter 19 Creating Books 367 Scale To Fit button E 100 Fa Actual Size button al Display Size slider e Scale To Fit button Click this button to scale the display of your pages to fit the Viewer size e Actual Size button Click this button to view the selected page at its actual size e Display Size slider Drag this slider to increase or decrease the size of the page in the Viewer Large Hardcover button ps amp foley E Show Single Pages button Large Softcover Show Full Spreads button button e Large Hardcover button Click this button to specify your book format as a large hardcover book e Large Softcover button Click this button to specify your book format as a large softcover book e Show Full Spreads button Click this button to display two facing pages in the Viewer e Show Single Pages button Click this button to view single pages only Print button Print Buy Book ka ad Next Page button Buy Book button Previous Page button e Print button Click this button to print book pages e Buy Book button Clic
490. xport File Format pop up menu 67 exporting adjusting images for export 301 black point adjustments and 302 ColorSync Profiles and 302 digital master files 293 export presets See export presets gamma adjustments 302 HTML files 348 image quality and 302 images defined 440 images for email 305 keywords 201 224 lists of metadata 292 metadata 304 metadata with images 304 overview 292 PDF files 283 projects 114 408 renaming files during export 298 using plug ins 305 versions 296 350 watermarks 303 355 web export presets 351 web journal pages 341 Index webpages 338 348 XMP sidecar files 292 Export Name Format pop up menu 297 299 export plug ins 305 Export Preset pop up menu 296 export presets creating 308 defined 292 306 deleting 309 displaying settings 307 for email 305 filenames and 299 image adjustments and 301 metadata included in 304 modifying 309 versions of images 296 watermarks 303 web export presets 351 Export Presets dialog 306 307 308 Export Web Pages button 58 59 338 341 351 exposure defined 440 hot areas 154 metadata 50 exposure bias 228 Exposure controls 61 exposure meters 440 extended desktop mode 419 440 external editors 115 441 external flashes 441 external hard disks adding additional space 415 backing up to 400 disconnecting 406 identifying 404 offsite storage 406 planning backup systems 402 reconnecting 406 restoring from 409 space on 402 403 vaults on 78 404 External Image
491. y See also camera shake exposure untagged A document or an image that lacks an embedded profile Glossary vault A designated storage space that contains an exact copy of the Aperture Library from the last time you backed up usually saved on an external FireWire drive See also FireWire Library version The file containing all the metadata and adjustment information applied to an image In Aperture only versions are changed The master image files are never touched See also master file Viewer An area in Aperture that displays the images currently selected in the Browser You can use the Viewer to perform adjustments on images as well as compare them with each other See also Browser viewfinder The part of the camera designed to preview the area of the scene that will be captured by the digital image sensor See also camera digital image sensor vignetting Darkening also known as fall off at the corners of the image as a result of too many filters attached to the lens a large lens hood or poor lens design See also filters lens watermark A visible graphic or text overlay applied to an image to indicate that the image is protected by a copyright Watermarks are used to discourage the use of your images without your explicit permission white balance An adjustment that changes the color temperature and tint of a digital image The goal of adjusting an image s white balance is to neutralize color casts in an image For ex
492. y keeping them always accessible and provides benefits such as one click backup of digital master files to vaults Imported images whose digital master files haven t been placed in the Library are called referenced images Using referenced images in your Aperture system can provide a number of substantial benefits to your photography workflow You can incorporate your existing portfolio of images into Aperture without changing the current location of the files Importing images by reference does not result in a duplication of your image files in the Aperture Library thus saving hard disk space You can also connect and disconnect hard disks holding your referenced images master files as you need them This allows you to keep master files for less used images offline or to make specific types of images available for editing or adjustments as needed Using referenced images in your Aperture system provides a means of building a flexible image management system customized to your work style Part Interface and Acquisition You specify that an image will be a managed image or a referenced image when you import it When importing images you can e Specify that master files be stored in the Aperture Library e Import images as referenced images so that their master files remain in their current locations e Move or copy image files to a new location For example you might decide that a certain group of referenced image files such as wedding
493. y in the Pictures folder on your internal hard disk You can specify that the Library be located in a different folder or on a different disk Each time you open Aperture the application opens the Library in the location you specified To change the location of the Library you move it to a new location and then use the Aperture Preferences window to specify the new location Tip To maximize performance place the Library file on an internal hard disk Chapter 3 Working with Aperture Projects 83 84 a un A WwW BW N BW N To change the location of a Library file Quit Aperture Locate the Aperture Library file in the Pictures folder on your hard disk and move it to the new location in a different folder or on a different hard disk Open Aperture and choose Aperture gt Preferences or press Command comma Click Choose under the Library Location option Navigate to the new location of the Library select it and click Select Quit Aperture and then reopen it When you reopen Aperture it accesses the Library in the new location If the Aperture Library becomes large you can create additional separate Library files to hold more images For example you might create different Library files in different locations on your internal hard disk or on different hard disks You then specify in the Aperture Preferences window which Library the application should access when it opens Creating a new empty Library file is as easy as sp
494. you back up the Library regularly and store backups offsite you run little risk of losing your work When you back up your images Aperture makes a complete copy of the Library in its current state If you remove items from the Library those items are removed from the backup when it is next updated You can make and store as many complete backups of the Library as you wish If you want to keep a historical archive of the Library you ll need to devise a system of storing separate backups in some regular chronological order You set Aperture to back up a copy of the Library to a designated storage area called a vault For safety and redundancy use external hard disks to hold your vaults Aperture lets you create as many vaults as you deem necessary For example you may want to create one vault on an external hard disk for daily backups and a second vault on another external hard disk that you keep offsite All the managed master file images versions and all metadata previews and adjustment information associated with your images are backed up The versions previews and metadata associated with referenced images master files are also backed up in the vault Referenced images master files are not backed up in the vault with the Library Important Referenced images are not backed up in the vault with the Library Because the digital master files for referenced images are stored outside of the Library you must manage the backup and ar
495. you can set Aperture to display the metadata associated with images by changing grid or list view options For example you can set Aperture to display keywords IPTC information or EXIF information with images in grid view You can also configure two views of information to be displayed with images and quickly switch between views For example the first view might show ratings for use while photo editing You might also create another view to display IPTC and EXIF information as you manage files for export You can then switch between views to change the information that appears with your images depending on the task at hand You use the View Options window to customize the display of information shown with images in the Browser fase __ View Options _ M viewer O Set 1 Name Only Placement Below Show Labels Set 2 Viewer Expanded Placement Over _ Show Labels Light Table Y show decorations Grid view Set 1 Name Only Placement Below _ Show Labels O Set 2 Grid View Expanded Placement Over Show Labels The Browser s metadata List View Columns Ose display settings appear Oset 2 List expanded here Image Tooltips Sez Toottips 8 In the Grid View section you select the Set buttons and choose the information you want displayed You can also choose where the information should appear from the Plac
496. you move a referenced image between the projects on your Aperture system the referenced image s master file remains in its original location on your hard disk When you delete a referenced image s master file from Aperture you can specify whether the image s master file is placed in the Trash Using the Query HUD to Search for Referenced Images Master Files You can also search for images using their file status For example you can search for images that are referenced images managed images and online or offline images To search for images by file status you use the File Status search options To search for images by file status In the Projects panel select a project or an album you want to search 2 Show the Query HUD by doing one of the following e Choose Edit gt Find or press Command F e Click the Query HUD button beside the search field in the Browser 3 In the Query HUD choose File Status from the Add Filter pop up menu and select the File Status checkbox 4 Deselect any checkboxes that aren t part of your query and choose the search criteria Select the File status checkbox from the File Status pop up menu x Match aay of the following Rating Ts greater than or equal to Calendar Import Session is one or more of the following File status Offline New Smart Album New Album With Current images Choose the file status you want to search for 5 Choose any
497. you want then click OK To apply a metadata preset when changing images with the Metadata Inspector Select the images you want to change Show the Metadata Inspector by choosing Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D Choose the metadata preset you want from the Add Metadata From pop up menu Do one of the following From the Metadata Action pop up menu choose Append with Preset then choose the preset you want to use to add metadata to the image maintaining any currently associated metadata From the Metadata Action pop up menu choose Replace with Preset and then choose the preset you want to use to add metadata to the image removing any previously applied metadata Chapter 11 Working with Metadata 239 240 A WN A W N Managing Metadata Presets You can make changes to the list of metadata presets that appears in pop up menus To arrange the metadata preset list To show the Metadata Inspector choose Window gt Show Metadata or press Control D Choose Manage Presets from the Metadata Action pop up menu To rearrange the order of metadata presets drag them to new locations in the Metadata Presets list Metadata presets can be rearranged renamed deleted imported and exported below Metadata Presets You can also rename and delete metadata presets in this dialog To rename a metadata preset Double click the metadata preset name then type a new name in the field that appears To dele
498. your JPEG files by selecting a number with the slider Setting the slider to 12 applies the least compression and results in a higher quality image setting the slider to 0 zero applies the most compression and results in a lower quality image e Gamma Adjust slider Gamma describes how your image distributes brightness Drag the slider to apply a uniform gamma adjustment to your exported images e ColorSync Profile pop up menu Choosing a ColorSync profile ensures consistent color reproduction on other systems and in the printed image Aperture provides a large selection of profiles as well as any custom profiles you ve saved during calibration To apply a ColorSync profile to the images you ve selected for export choose a profile from the pop up menu e Show Watermark checkbox A watermark is a visible graphic or text overlay that is applied to an image Photographers often use watermarks to indicate that images are protected by a copyright and discourage others from inappropriately using their images To add a watermark to your images select the Show Watermark checkbox After selecting the checkbox you can select a file to apply as a watermark image and place your watermark in various positions on your image For more information about adding watermarks see Adding Watermarks to Webpage Images on page 355 Part Ill Distribution and Backup Creating Web Export Presets If none of the existing web export presets suit your needs yo
499. your webpage service You can export webpages that you ve created in Aperture When you export your Aperture webpages you can export them to a folder on your computer to keep them organized in one place You can name the folder and choose the image quality and file types that are created Aperture has web export presets you can choose that automatically set up the export of webpages You can choose an existing export preset or create your own Part Ill Distribution and Backup To export webpages Click the Export Web Pages button Type a name for the folder that will hold the webpage files in the Export As field TC Where _ Macintosh HD Thumbnail Image Preset Web Thumbnails JPEG High Quality Detail Image Preset Web Detail JPEG High Quality J cancel export Choose a location for the webpage folder from the Where pop up menu Choose a web export preset for your thumbnail images from the Thumbnail Image Preset pop up menu Choose a web export preset for your detail image pages from the Detail Image Preset pop up menu When you re ready to export your webpages click Export The dialog shows the progress of the export The images you selected are exported to the location you specified Working with Web Export Presets Web export presets are groups of saved export settings that are configured to produce different types of web images You use them to help you quickly and easily export yo

Aperture User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents